View Tend

SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
Construction of Interior work at NBCC Centre
3rd floor, OKHLA, New Delhi

(SECTION B&C)
CLIENT

Pharmacy Council of India
Combined Councils Building
Kotla Road,
Aiwan‐E‐Ghalib Marg
NEW DELHI‐110002
Project Management and Construction

NSL
2nd Floor, Local Shopping Centre,
East Kidwai Nagar,
New Delhi 110023

SPECIFCATIONS: Pharmacy Council of INDIA, at 3rd Floor, NBCC Center, OKHLA, New Delhi

INDEX

1. SECTION B : SPECIFICATIONS
a. SECTION B1: SPECIFICATIONS INTERIOR WORKS
b. SECTION B2: SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL WORKS
c. SECTION B3: SPECIFICATIONS HVAC
d. SECTION B4: SPECIFICATIONS FIRE AND PLUMBING WORKS
2. SECTION C: LIST OF APPROVED MAKES

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT

SECTION‐B

SPECIFICATIONS
FOR THE
Construction of Interior work at NBCC Centre
3rd floor, OKHLA, New Delhi

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT

SPECIFICATIONS COMMON FOR ALL SECTIONS

The work in general shall be carried out as per CPWD Specifications, for Civil work
specifications 2016 shall be followed and for electrical work CPWD specifications 2016
shall be followed with latest amendments along with relevant IS codes with latest
amendments. Where the same are not applicable the work shall be carried out as per
specifications mentioned in this volume with best engineering practice in the industry.
This is applicable for all type of work covered in the scope of this contract whether it is
interior, civil, electrical, furniture,CCTV, Access Control, BMS, HVAC, IT, Networking
firefighting, EPBAX etc. etc.
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT
SPECIFICATION: Interiors Pharmacy Council of INDIA, at 3rd Floor, NBCC Center, OKHLA, New Delhi

SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTERIOR WORKS
SECTION B1

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A1

Technical Specifications ‐ Interior Work

PREAMBLE TO BILL OF QUANTITIES

RATES TO INCLUDE:
Rates quoted shall be for the items completed in all respect at all floors/heights/levels including all
taxes, octroi, duties and levies transportation, loading and unloading and the cost of all materials,
fittings, fixtures, all labour for all the operations as detailed in the specifications and contract
conditions. Apart from other factors mentioned in the specifications and contract conditions, rates
quoted for the items in this schedule shall also include the following:

1. GENERAL:
1.1 Whether mentioned or not in the Bill of Quantities, all works are to be carried out as per the
drawings, designs, catalogues and or instructions of NBCC Engineer‐IN‐Charge of the work. Nothing
extra shall be paid over the quoted rates for not understanding the designs etc. before hand.
1.2 Sample of all works/items shall be got approved from the Engineer in Charge before taking the
mass production in hand and nothing shall be paid for the cost of samples.
1.3 Any incidental work required to complete the item and not specifically covered in the item as
mentioned in Bill of Quantities shall be completed at no extra cost.
1.4 Unless otherwise specified all exposed surfaces of wood/wooden mouldings and plywood of
loose furniture/items tops shall be finished in at least two coats of melamine polish, including
staining to match the shades of laminates etc.
1.5 Rates for carpeting shall include for fixing of Aluminium grippers over the junction of carpet
and/or marble stone flooring.
1.6 All laminates for furniture items shall be 1.0 mm thick in Satin finish, colour texture and shade
as per the schemes given by the Architects.
1.7 Unless otherwise specified, all inner surfaces, sides and under sides of furniture items,
drawers/cabinets shall be polished/Painted flat oil painted as directed by Architects.
1.8 All exposed edges of plywood/block boards shall be finished with teak wood lippings 5 mm
thick of profile as per detail and Melamine polished unless otherwise specified and no extra cost
shall be paid.
1.9 All furniture items shall be delivered at site packed in polythene sheets.
1.10: All the necessary approvals to be taken before the start of the work
1.11 All approvals taken in one go, and not in piece meal
1.12 Articles which has high lead time of delivery has to be given priority and necessary approval
to be taken within 15 days of award of work. To avoid any delay in project.
1.13 Furniture will be approved only after mock‐up
1.14 Contractor has to furnish shop drawing and take necessary approval from Engineer in charge,
before starting the work
1.15 Its responsibility of Contractor to take necessary approval and has to furnish the approvals
received from from NBCC, of articles used, during or after the construction, as and when asked
1.17 any deviation in quantity and new item/substitute has to be notified well in advance, and
necessary approval to be taken from the competent authority
1.18 After the award of the work, appointed contractors, has to submit, details of deadline and
time line and has to adhere to it, for approvals and completions of the project.
1.19 Contractor will submit weekly report on project, on work completed in previous week and
work which will be done in the next week
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A2

2. WOOD WORKS:
2.1 Wherever ply is mentioned it will mean ply wood.
2.2 All Board/Ply will be of BWP Type.

3. HARDWARE:
3.1 Necessary handles, tower bolts, ball catchers, stoppers, hinges, brass/GI screws, nails, locks,
sliding rails, nut and bolts etc. shall be provided by the Contractor which shall be out of the
approved make of these materials annexed in the technical specifications/approved by Architects.

4. PAINTING AND PO LISHING:
4.1 All finishes, shade of colours, texture of fabrics including all surfaces of finishes like POP,
painting, lamination, panelling, stitching joints in upholstery, all polishing shall be as per the
satisfaction of the Architects/Engineer in Charge
4.2 Thoroughly brushing the surface to be finished, free from mortar dropping and other foreign
matter including preparing the surface and sand papering to give an even surface.
4.3 For painting and polishing items – on all kinds of wood and wood based surfaces
4.4 All painting work to be completed with at least one coat of the primer along with two or more
coats of the paint as per the Technical Specification, till desired finish is achieved, Manufacturer’s
specification and to the satisfaction of the Architects/ Engineer in Charge.
4.5 All the polishing works to be completed with at least two coats of the polish of the approved
make as pr the list of approved manufacturers and to the full satisfaction of the Architects/
Engineer in Charge.

5. GLASS WORKS:
5.1 The edges of glass tops for tables wherever shown shall be beveled as per approval of the
Architects.
6.1 Rates shall include Aluminium grippers as directed. Rates shall include laying of carpet to
required shape with piles in one direction including all wastage, Rate quoted shall be applicable to
skirting and steps and net area of laid carpet only shall be measured and paid.

6. FALSE CEILING

6.1 Gypboard and G.I. Framework

6.1.1 Scope of work

The work envisaged under these specifications refer to supplying and fixing in position false ceiling
at any floor, any location and at any height.

a) Providing and fixing suspended G.I. frame work of specified width as mentioned in
drawings

b) Providing and fixing one layer of 12.5 mm gypboard over this frame work.

c) Jointing the board flush, applying two coats of primer suitable for gypboard and two
coats of acrylic emulation matt finish paint of approved shade and make.

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A3
d) Making necessary cut out for light fitting, A.C. grills diffusers and other necessities.
The work shall include horizontal, vertical and inclined surfaces depending upon the
various requirements.

6.1.2 Material

G.I. Frame work:

The system consists of G.I. frame work suspended from the soffit of the RCC ceiling. The following
G.I. components shall be used for grid work (or) as specified in the drawing.

1. Ceiling section of 80X26X0.5 mm
2. Perimeter channel of 20X27X20X0.5mm
3. Intermediate channels of 15X45X0.9mm
4. Ceiling angel of 25X10X0.55mm
5. Connecting clips of 2.64 mm dia.
6. Soffit cleat 22X37mm
7. Anchor fasteners 6 mm

All the G.I. components shall be of standard approved make.
The G.I. grid work system shall be suspended from the soffit of RCC ceiling using anchor fasteners
of 6mm of approved type and make and connected to soffit cleats and ceiling angle by means of
necessary nuts, bolts and washers etc.

Gyp Board

Gyp Board of plain series 12.5 mm manufactured by India gypsum shall be used. The Gyp board
shall conform to IS 2095. The longitudinal edge of the Gyp board shall be of tapered / square edges,
so as to have flush joints while fixing. Handling and transporting of Gyp board shall be done
carefully and as recommended by the manufactures. The board should always be kept in a dry an d
covered place sheltered from rain and to avoid dampness from flow, they should be supported on
wooden battens which should not be more than 45cm apart on a flat surface. The material shall be
stacked in piles of smaller heights and should not be stacked on edges. Gyp board which have
deformed due to poor stacking should not be used.

Insulation

Perimeter channels are levelled at the required position of the finished ceiling line and fixed to the
wall at 610 mm centre with the screws and nylon plugs. The remaining G.I. grid component are
installed to form a regular grid suspended from the soffit of RCC slab using soffit cleats ceiling angle
and anchor fasteners as specified. Extra frame for various cut outs of different shapes, light fittings,
AC grills, diffusers, smoke detectors and other necessities have to be provided frame work has to
be made with perimeter channel of specified size and shall be suitably supported. The line and level
of the grid work has to be checked for perfection and prior clearance of the grid work has to be
checked for perfection and prior clearance of the grid work has to be obtained from the Engineer‐
in‐charge before the placement of Gyp board.

The Gyp board are fixed with bound edges at right angles to ceiling section with all joints staggered.
All joints of Gyp board has to be fixed on ceiling section. The Gyp boards are screwed to the ceiling
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A4
section and perimeter channels with Gyp board dry wall screws with joints staggered. Spotting of
screws and jointing are then carried out according to India Gypsum recommendations to give a
flush and smooth joint.

Necessary door openings of hinged type of suitable sizes has to be provided with a suitable frame
work for control valves and for access above false ceiling / AC duct boxing at not extra cost. Joints
at horizontal, vertical and inclined surfaces shall be suitably strengthened with additional G.I. frame
work as required.

Finally the boards are jointed and finished so as to have a flush look which includes fling and finish
gin the tapered and square edges of the board with a jointing compound, paper tape and two coats
of primer suitable for gyp board (all as per recommended practices of Indian Gypsum). Then, the
finished Gyp board has to be painted with 2 coats of acrylic emulsion matt finish paint of approved
color and make.

The rate shall includes providing all materials, erecting, suspending, G.I. grid work, jointing the
boards, providing required cut outs and open able doors and painting including providing necessary
fittings and fixtures etc. complete as per the specifications and all other activities related to the
completion of the above job.

Details of A.C. grills, diffusers, recessed type electrical fittings to be erected in false ceiling will be as
per specifications and as shown in drawings.

The scope of works includes fixing with screws, fixtures etc. the recessed electrical light fittings in
the grid work of false ceiling/ boxing, Marine plywood (6mm thick)/special G.I. sections, if required,
shall also be provided at no extra cost. The rate quoted shall include all the above mentioned
activities related to the completion of the above job.

6.2 Grid Ceiling (Gypsum anhydrous Ceiling)

The false ceiling mainly will be consisting of 2’ – 0” x 2’ – 0” grid system. To avoid partial grid (less
than 2’ – 0” x 2’ – 0”) at the ends, a band of uniform size Gypsum Board false ceiling may be
provided along the periphery. The size of the

6.3 Mineral Fiber tile false ceiling

False ceiling tiles will be of Fine Fissured type High NRC tiles of size 595 x 595mm and minimum
15mm thick manufactured from high density Glass wool with the visible surface be batch pre
painted. The system should have sound Absorption NRC value of 0.7 .Tiles should withstand a
permanent ambient RH up to 95% without sagging, The light reflectance of the tiles should not be
less than 83%.Providing and fixing pre coated (Exposed portion only) Grid system in 600x600mm
module which includes providing and fixing wall angle along the perimeter of the room with help of
nylon sleeves and wooden screws at 300mm centers. Then suspending the main tee of size from
the soffit with help of soffit deat,rawl plugs and wire rod with Leveling spring dip at 1200mm c/c.
1200mm Cross Tee is then interlocked into the pre‐Cut slots in the main Tees at 600mm centres in
direction perpendicular to the main Tee to make a grid of 600x1200mm.Finally 600mm Cross tees
are then interlocked into the pre‐cut slots in to the 1200mm tees at 1200mm centres and in
direction parallel to the main tee. Cross Tees having length more than 600mm are to be supported
independently. Tiles of size 595x595mm shall be placed into the grid size.
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A5

7. PARTITIONS AND PANELLING
7.1 Quoted rate shall include labour/materials required to fix the sub‐frame to the wall with GI
Sections (‘L’/ ‘U’) shape clamp with adequate screws and repairing the portion damaged while
putting the gutties. etc. and making good the same.
7.2 Quoted rate shall be inclusive of making provisions for electrical conduits and switch boxes and
time required while coordinating with other Contractors for the final finishing of the work.
7.3 The partition frame work shall be provided upto the RCC slabs at top but measurement for
payment shall be of partition upto false ceiling and frame /support of partition above false ceiling
shall be carried out within the quoted rate for which no extra shall be paid.
7.4 All electrical works shall be got carried out through licensed “A” class Electrical Contractor
having experience of similar work and duly approved by Architects/ Engineer in Charge. The work
shall be executed as per specifications and strictly in keeping with relevant IS code and rules and
regulations of authorities.
7.5 All work/materials will be as per good engineering practice.
7.6 Wherever glass is mentioned it will be clear float glass.
7.7 Glass wool of Twiga make of 50mm thk of density 32Kg/cubic meter to be used between in 75
mm thk partition and 100 mm thk glass wool for 125 mm partition

8. WOOD WORK AND JOINERY:
8.1 PLY WOOD:
Ply wood shall be BWP quality phenol bonded as per relevant Indian Standard Specifications with
commercial or decorative facing as required. These shall be obtained from approved sources and
thickness shall be as shown in drawings.
8.2 BLOCK BOARDS:
Block board shall be Grade‐I exterior grade bonded with BWP type synthetic phenol bonded
adhesives. These shall be of the required thickness and type and obtained from approved sources.
8.3 LAMINATE (ESD Electrostatic Dissipative laminate):
Laminates where specified shall be of approved brand type, texture and thickness and
manufacturer as per IS:2046‐95.
Fixing of laminates shall be done as per best trade practices and strictly as per printed instructions
of the manufacturers using phenol Formaldehyde Synthetic Resin adhesive of approved make.
Unless otherwise indicated laminated shall be 1.5 mm thick of approved make.
Laminates property

8.4 JOINERY:
All details shall conform to the drawings, but all measurements shall be checked at site. The
scantlings shall be accurately planned and finished smooth to hold full dimensions shown in the
drawings after finishing and rebates, rounding’s and mouldings made before they are framed. No
patching or plugging of any kind shall be prepared and got approved by the Engineer before
proceeding with bulk manufacture.

9. IRONMONGERY:

9.1 This section shall cover all finish hardware, latches, locks and other fittings and fixtures etc.,
used in wood doors. All finish hardware shall be well made, reasonably smooth, and free sharp
edges and corners flaws and other defects and shall be as per relevant Indian Standard Code.
Unless otherwise required all finish hardware shall be polished brass.
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A6
9.2 All hardware shall be of approved make and shall be specifically got approved by the Engineer
before ordering. No fittings and fixtures shall be fixed before all major work is over. While fixing
correct handling of fixtures shall be ensured.
9.3 All finish hardware shall be fixed by skilled carpenters experienced in this work. Work shall be
done as per manufacturer’s printed instructions and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
9.4 All hardware fixed to respective locations shall be adequately protected from damage and
splashes of mortars and paints by covering suitably with Jute clothes/Black PVC sheet till handling
over of the work to the Engineer/Owner to his satisfaction. The finished hardware shall be
absolutely clean without any foreign materials and fully showing original finish in its best condition.

10. Vitrified Tile Flooring, Dado / Skirting / Facia

Materials:

Vitrified Tiles: The tiles shall be of approved make as mentioned in the approved makes and shall
generally conform to the approved standards. They shall be flat and true to shape, free from
cracks, crazing spots, chipped edges and corners. Unless otherwise specified, the nominal sizes of
tiles shall be as under:

The tiles shall be square or rectangular of nominal sizes such as: 600 x 600 mm; 800 x 800 mm or
drawings or as directed by the Engineer‐in‐ Charge. Thickness shall be as per recommendations of
the approved manufacturers.

Technical specifications of the tiles shall be generally conforming to the following standards:

Technical Specifications for Glazed Vitrified Tiles/Digital

NO PROPERTY EXPECTED STANDARDS
1. Deviation in length (+/‐) 0.6%
2. Straightness of sides (+/‐) 0.5%
3. Rectangularity (+/‐) 0.6%
4. Surface flatness (+/‐) 0.5%
5. Water absorption < 0.50%
6. Mohs. Hardness > 6
7. Flexural strength > 27 N / mm2
8. Abrasion resistance Class V
9. Skid resistance (friction coefficient) > 0.4
10. Glossiness Min. 85% reflections

The tiles shall conform to the relevant standards in all respects. Samples of tiles shall be got
approved from the Engineer‐in‐charge before bulk procurement for incorporation in the work.

Preparation of Surface for Flooring:

Following procedure shall be followed:

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A7
Sub grade concrete or RCC slab or side brick wall / or plastered surfaces on which tiles are to be laid
shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped.

Mortar and bedding: Cement mortar for bedding shall be prepared of mix 1:4, to a consistent paste
and shall conform to the specification for materials; preparations etc. as specified under cement
mortar. The amount of water added while preparing mortar shall be the minimum necessary to
give sufficient plasticity for laying. Care shall be taken in preparation of the mortar to ensure that
there are no hard lumps that would interfere with even bedding of the tiles. Before spreading the
mortar bed the base shall be cleaned off all dirt, scum or laitance and loose materials and well
wetted without forming any pools of water on the surface. The mortar of specified proportion and
thickness shall then be evenly and smoothly spread over the base by use of screed battens to
proper level or slope.

Once the mix is prepared, no further water be added and the same shall be used within one hour of
adding water. Apply on an average 20 mm thick bedding of mortar over an area of 1 sqm. at a time
over surface of the area for laying tiles, in proper level and allowed to harden sufficiently to offer a
fairly good cushion for the tiles to set.

Laying of Tiles for Flooring:

The tiling work shall be done as per the pattern shown in the drawing or as directed by the
Engineer‐in‐Charge. As a general practice laying of tiles shall be commenced from the centre of the
area and advanced towards the walls. Cut tiles, if any, shall be laid along wall with necessary border
pattern as shown / directed by the Engineer‐in‐ Charge. Tiling work shall be completed by pressing
tiles firmly into place along the wall / floor. A white cement slurry to the back of the tile to be
applied to ensure proper and full bedding. The tiles shall be laid on the bedding mortar when it is
still plastic but has become sufficiently stiff to offer a fairly firm cushion for the tiles.

Tiles, which are fixed on the flooring adjoining the wall, shall be so arranged that the surface on the
round edge tiles shall correspond to the skirting or dado. Press gently the tile with wooden mallet
for even adherence at the back of the tile. Do not use an iron hammer or some heavy material to
press the tile.

The edges of the tiles shall be smeared with neat white cement slurry and fixed in this grout one
after the other, each tile being well pressed and gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is
properly bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. There shall be no hollows in bed or joints. The
joints shall be kept as close as possible and in straight line. Unless otherwise specified, joint‐less
tiling shall be done butting the tiles with each other. If joint is specified, the same shall not exceed
1.00 mm. in width. The joint shall be grouted with white / matching colour cement slurry. After
fixing the tiles, finally in an even plane or slope, the flooring shall be covered with wet sand and
allowed undisturbed for 14 days.

Fixing Tiles for Dado & Skirting / Facia:

The fixing of tiles on wall surfaces shall be done only after completing fixing of the tiles on the floor.
Following procedure shall be followed:

The back of tiles shall be cleaned off and covered with layer of approved adhesive with proper
toweling as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A8

The edges of the tiles shall be smeared with the adhesive and fixed on the wall one after the other,
each tile being well pressed and gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly fixed in level
with the adjoining tiles. There shall be no hollows on the back or in joints. Unless otherwise
specified, joint‐less tiling shall be done butting the tiles with each other. If joint is specified, the
same shall not exceed 1.00 mm. in width. The joint shall be grouted with approved adhesive. The
joints shall be kept in straight line or as per the approved pattern.

While fixing tiles in dado / skirting work, care shall be taken to break the joints vertically. The top
line shall be touched up neatly with the rest of the plaster above. If doors, windows or other
openings are located within the dado area, the corners, sills, jambs etc. shall be provided with true
right angles without any specials. The contractor will not be entitled to any extra claims on this
account for cutting of tiles if required.

The fixing shall be done from bottom of wall to upward without any hollows in the bed of joints.
Each tile shall be as close as possible to one adjoining. All tiles faces shall be in one vertical plane.

Grouting of Joints in Floor / Skirting / Dado:

The joints, if specified, shall be cleaned off and all dust and loose particles removed. Joints shall
then be filled with approved adhesive like BAL‐ENDURA or equivalent grouts. After finishing the
grouting process, after 15 minute, wipe off excess grout with a damp sponge and polish the tiles
with a soft & dry cloth for a clean surface.

The Finished work shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.

Cleaning:

As directed by the Engineer‐in‐Charge, the tiles shall be cleaned by mild acid (However,
Hydrofluoric acid and its derivatives should not be used). After the tiles have been laid in a room or
the days fixing work is completed, the surplus cement grout / adhesive that may have come out of
the joints shall be cleaned off before it sets. The dado / skirting shall be thoroughly cleaned. In the
case of flooring, once the floor has set, the floor shall be carefully washed clean and dried. When
drying, the floor shall be covered with oil free dry sawdust. It shall be removed only after
completion of the construction work and just before the floor is used.

Cleaning Agents for Vitrified Tiles:

Vitrified tiles are resistant to all chemicals (except hydrofluoric acid and its derivatives), hence
commercially available detergents and cleaning agents can also be used for regular maintenance.
Any spills and stains must be removed immediately. If left dry they may leave stains, which may be
difficult to remove completely.

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A9

11. GRANITE SLAB FLOORING AND CLADDING

11.1 General

11.1.1 Description

This section covers the requirements for providing and fixing of granite stone to external walls of
buildings including pins, cramps and filling of joints with mortar.

11.1.2 Applicable Codes and Standards

The codes and standards generally applicable to the work of this section are listed herein after :‐

IS:757 Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys, sheet and stripe (for general engineering
purposes)
IS:4101 Stone Facing – Part‐I

The following clauses are intended to amplify the requirements of the reference documents listed
above and the contractor shall comply with these clauses.

11.2 Materials

11.2.1 Granite Stone Slabs

The slabs shall be of the required colour and shade and of textures as description of the item. The
stone slabs shall be hard, sound, durable and tough, free from cracks, decay and weathering.
Before starting the work the contractor shall get the samples of stone slabs approved by the
Engineer‐in‐Charge.

The stone slabs shall be machine cut to the requisite thickness along planes parallel to the natural
bed of the stone and shall be of uniform size if required. The thickness of the slabs shall be
minimum 35 mm or as specified in the description of the item with a permissible tolerance of +3
percent.

11.2.2 Mortar

Mortar for (fixing and filling of joints hall be as specified.

11.2.3 Pins

Pins shall be of gunmetal 35 mm long and 6 mm diameter or as specified. Their samples shall be got
approved by the Engineer‐in‐Charge and kept at site.

11.2.4 Cramps

The material of cramps shall have high resistance to corrosion under conditions of dampness and
against the chemical action of mortar of concrete. The cramps shall be of the material specified in
the item of work.
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A 10

11.3 Laying

The stone slabs shall be fixed with mortar in position without the use of chips or underpinning of
any sort. Where so desired, the adjoining stones shall be secured by means of pins. Further the
stone shall be secured to the backing by means of cramps. The clamps shall be spaced not more
than 60 mm apart and shall be provided as directed by the Engineer‐in‐Charge.

Cramps shall be attached to the sides and/or top and bottom and/or sides top sand bottom. The
actual number of cramps and their sections shall be as per requirements of design of carry the
loads.

Where cramps are used to hold the unit in position only, the facing shall be provided with a
continuous support on which the stones shall rest at the ground level and other storey levels, the
support being in the form of projection from or recess into the concrete floor slab, or a beam
between the columns of a metal angle attached to the floor slab or beams. These supports shall
preferably be of vertical interval not more than 3.5 apart and also over the heads of all openings.
Such supports shall also be provided where there is transition from thin facing below to thick facing
above.

Alternatively cramps may be used to hold the units in position in addition to supporting the units
thus transferring the weight of the units to the backing. Such cramps shall be properly designed as
per IS:4101 (Part‐1). The pins and cramps shall be laid in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 coarse
sand)

The walls shall be carried up truly plumb. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical
joints truly vertical. The stone shall break joints on the face for atleast half the height of the course,
unless otherwise shown in the drawings. The stone shall be in regular courses as per drawing and
all stones shall be of the same height unless otherwise specified. In case of reinforced cement
concrete backing, the cramps shall be fixed to concrete while laying, at the requisite positions.

11.4 Joints

The joints shall be done with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand). All joints shall be full of
mortar. Special care shall be taken to see that the grounding for cladding work as full of mortar. If
any hollow groundings are detected by tapping the face stones, there shall be taken out and
replayed. The thickness of joints shall be as small as possible, not exceeding 5 mm. For close but
jointed facing, the thickness shall not be exceed 1.5 mm. The fine joint shall be uniform
throughout.

Where joint filler or compound is to be used, the joints shall be raked to a depth of at least 25 mm
after the mortar in the joints has set sufficiently and the filler or compound applied. The joints may
be subsequently finished with mortar suited to the appearance of work. It is preferable to use joint
sealing compounds when the facings are exposed to heavy rainfall and winds and their selections
would depend upon local experience and availability of joints sealing.

11.5 Other Details

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A 11
11.5.1 Pointing

All exposed joints shall be pointed with mortar as specified. The pointing when finished shall be
sunk from face of the stone by 5 mm or as specified. The depth of mortar in pointing work shall not
be less than 15 mm.

11.5.2 Curing

Stone cladding work shall be pointed with mortar as specified. The pointing when finished shall be
sunk from face of the stone by 5 mm or as specified. The depth of mortar in pointing work shall not
be less than 15 mm.

11.5.3 Protection

Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. The work shall also be suitably
protected from damage, mortar dropping and rain during construction.

11.5.4 Scaffolding

Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided. The supports shall be
sound and strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed.

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT A 12
SPECIFICATIONS: ELECTRICAL Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC
Center, Okhla, New Delhi

SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS
SECTION B2

Date: 14‐04‐2017

PMC: NSL
SPECIFICATIONS: ELECTRICAL Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC
INDEX
S.no. TITLE Page no.

1 PREAMBLE TO BILL/ SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES E1‐E3
2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS E4‐E25
3 CONDUIT SYSTEM, CABLE TRAY, CABLE LADDER AND E26‐E34
TRUNKING INSTALLATION
4 EARTHING SYSTEM E35‐E40
5 PANELBOARDS E41‐E56
6 WIRES AND CABLES E57‐67
7 WIRING DEVICES E68‐E76
8 CIRCUIT BREAKER E77‐E84
9 FIRE DETECTION E85‐ E92
10 LAN E93‐ E100
11 UPS E101 ‐ E117
12 WATER LEAKAGE AND RODENT CONTROL E118 – E123
13 ACCESS CONTROL & CCTV E124 – E142
14 AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEM E143 – E150

PMC: NSL
SPECIFICATIONS: PTB Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,
NBCC Center, Okhla, New Delhi
SECTION VI
PREAMBLE TO BILL/ SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES

A. Tender shall be on the basis of item rates which shall include the cost of materials,
labour, all taxes, duties and all other services required for the complete
installation, testing and commissioning in accordance with the relevant NEC/IER
and code in practice including the fees if any and expenditure for factory
inspection together with the liabilities and obligations as detailed in the general
conditions of contract. It will also be the responsibility of the bidder to obtain all
types of sanctions etc like power/light connections and the drawings etc if any,
required by the concerned local authorities.

B. Prices shall remain firm and free from variation due to rise and fall in the cost of
materials and labour or any other price variation whatsoever whether during
extended period of completion, if any.

C. Item rates shall remain valid for any variation in the estimated quantities given in
schedule of quantities.

D. In order to facilitate the technical scrutiny of the various quotations, the bidder
must supply with their quotations detailed technical particulars make catalogues
and erection drawings for various items under different parts specified in the
schedule of quantities.

E. The drawing and specifications lay down minimum standard of equipment and
workmanship and the deviations. In the absence of any deviations, it will be
deemed that the bidder is fully satisfied with the intents of the specifications and
drawings and their compliance with the statutory and fire insurance provisions
including local codes, where the drawings and specifications conflict, the stringiest
shall apply.

F. All equipments and the installations shall be tested as specified and a test
certificate in the prescribed form as required by the local supply authorities shall
be furnished.

G. The entire installation shall be guaranteed against defective materials or
workmanship for a period of 12 months from the date of the installation certified
by the Consultant and taken over by the Client. During the guarantee period all
the defects shall be rectified by the contract free of cost.

H. The successful bidder shall submit the shop drawings to the Consultant for
approval prior to start the work. The approval of these drawings will be general
and will not absolve the contractor of the responsibility of the correctness of these
PMC: NSL E1
drawings. At least 6 copies of the approved drawings shall be supplied to the
Consultant for their distribution to the various agencies at site at no cost to the
Client.

I. The position of distribution boards and switchboards may require some minor
adjustments due to either site requirements or change in structural layout. All
such changes from the position, shown in the drawings, shall be required to be
incorporated without any extra payment or deduction for change in length of
wiring etc.

J. The bidders must see the site conditions and take all the aforesaid and foregoing
factors while quoting the rates, as no extra payment will be allowed on any ground
arising out of or relating to the aforesaid and foregoing.

K. In single phase (230 V) A.C. supply system circuit wires of same phase shall be
drawn in same conduit. For 3 phase, 4 wire wiring system wires of different colour
shall be used and for insulated neutral only black colour wire shall be used.

L. The bidder shall include in his rates for painting with three coats of synthetic
enamel paint to match the surroundings or as directed by the Consultant for all
steel structure used for works at no extra cost.

M. The successful bidder shall supply completion drawings of the entire installation on
tracing cloth as well as three prints of each drawing showing the complete wiring
diagram as executed at site drawn to scale approved by the Consultant after the
completion of work but before completion certificate is given by the Consultant.

N. After laying and jointing the cables shall be subject to necessary tests as stipulated
in IS: 5959 (Part‐I): 1970.

O. As more than one make is mentioned, prior approval of particular make for use
shall be obtained from the Consultant. All samples of all electric fittings and other
accessories shall be approved by the Consultant prior to their installation.

P. No alteration whatsoever is to be made to the text of quantities of this schedule of
quantities, unless such alteration is authorized in writing by the Consultant. Any
such alteration or addition shall, unless authorized in writing, be disregarded when
tender documents are considered.

Q. Any error in description or in quantity or omission of items from the contract shall
not vitiate this contract but shall be corrected and demand to be a variation
required by the Consultants.

PMC: NSL E2
R. All measurements shall be taken in accordance with the Indian Standard Electrical
Installation in buildings method of measurements of IS: 5908:1970, unless
otherwise specified.

S. The contractor shall provide, within one month after completion of the work or
along with the final bill, three sets of manuals properly bound which shall contain
the following information:

1. Description of installation items using main items of equipments.
2. Description of all equipments and system operation with trouble shooting
manuals.
3. Line diagram of each system including main feature of equipments and showing
method of setting controls.
4. Method of fault finding, routine, adjustment and wiring diagram.
5. Description of routine maintenance, oil and greasing points and recommended
lubricants.
6. Manufacturer service manuals for all equipments.
7. Spares reference manuals.

T. The contractor shall provide the following at no extra cost to the Client.

1. Danger Notice Boards
2. Treatment for electric shock giving details of FIRST AID TREATMENT with chart
diagrams (mounted in suitable frame).
3. Line wiring diagrams of the electrical system mounted in suitable frame.

U. The contractor will remove all the debris and surplus earth from work site
(belonging to his work) free of cost.

END OF SECTION

PMC: NSL E3
Electrical: General Provisions Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 WORK DESCRIPTION

A. The scope of works for all electrical works and systems comprises engineering, supply, delivery,
installation, testing and commissioning, handover, training, maintenance and warranty all as described or
reasonably implied in the Contract. The Contractor is obliged to provide fully functioning works and
systems in conformance with the requirements of the Contract. In the event certain items are not fully
described or indicated in the Contract, but deemed essential by the Engineer for the performance of the
works and systems then the provision of such items shall form part of the Contractors scope of works at
no additional cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible to co‐ordinate the equipment and services and shall produce properly
co‐ordinated shop drawings to demonstrate the installation comply with the performance requirement
with shop drawing, calculations and details.

A. Shop drawings shall take into account actual measurement and setting out dimensions/levels
obtained and determined by the Contractor on site, actual equipment/material used, actual routing of
services, co‐ordination with all installation, and site conditions/constraints. This specification is intended
to cover installation, testing and commissioning of LV Panels and associated equipment/ materials, panels,
etc.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK:

A. The Electrical and ELV installation shall generally include the following:
1. Common Services:
a. Liaison with the local supply Authority to obtain and coordinate provision of incoming
electricity supply.
b. Installation, testing & commissioning of MV system including incoming electricity supply,
consumer main MV switchboard, cabling to component MV switchboards, cabling to power
transformer, power transformers and associated accessories to SEB requirement and arrange SEB
acceptance upon completed.
c. Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of telephone system including incoming
telephone lines, component telephone distribution panel at each level, interconnecting cablings
and associated accessories.
d. To provide telephone cabling as specified on the drawings.
e. Complete central earthing systems for connection with component electrical systems.

2. Internal Services
a. Complete LV distribution system including main LV switchboard, automatic power factor
correction devices, sub‐boards and distribution boards, UPS and associated distribution main and
sub‐main cabling and associated accessories.
b. Complete lighting and power installation including all final circuiting work and associated
accessories.
c. Normal and emergency lighting supply and installation and associated accessories.
d. Complete earthing system.
PMC: NSL E4
e. Complete lightning protection system and associated accessories.
f. Complete telephone cabling system and associated accessories.
g. Complete wiring work to external/landscape and public area architectural/special lighting
and dimming systems and associated accessories.
h. Complete cable support system for future structure cabling system and associate works.
i. Miscellaneous works like providing and fixing of rubber mats, fire buckets, first aid box,
fire extinguishers, etc.
j. All associated interfacing power supply work to other mechanical installations.
k. All interfacing works with the Building Management System for remote control and
monitoring.
l. All associated interfacing works with other M&E installations.
m. Other works as shown on the Drawings and described elsewhere in the Contract
documents.

B. The item rate shall remain valid for variation to any extent of the estimated quantities given in the
Schedule of Quantities.

C. All equipment shall be of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified and
shall withstand the atmospheric conditions without deterioration.

D. Minor civil work is included in the contractor’s scope of work. Further, the responsibility of
coordination with the civil and other contracting agencies ensuring completion of turnkey contract rests
with the contractor.

E. Contractor shall co‐ordinate with all other agencies working at site for interconnection and safety
aspects.

F. Also the Contractor shall furnish back up combined guarantee minimum for 1 year from the date
of successful commissioning from the manufacturer. In case there is any defect, the free replacement of
any part or in whole will be made immediately at no extra cost to Owner.

1.03 FEE, PERMITS & TESTS:

A. The contractor shall obtain all sanctions and permits required for the above said works from all
the relevant authorities. All actual fees payable in this regard will be reimbursed against
receipt/documentary proof (evidence). On completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain N.O.C from
concerned authorities including SEB, Chief Electrical Inspectorate, of State. The original of the same shall
be delivered to the Owner through Consultants.

B. The Owner shall have full power regarding the equipments/ materials get tested by authorized/
recognized independent agency at the contractor’s expense in order to prove their soundness and
adequacy. The contractor will rectify the defects/ suggestions pointed out by independent agency through
Owner at contractor’s expense.

C. The installation shall comply in all respects with the requirements of Indian Electricity Act 1910,
Indian Electricity Rules (IER) 1956 and other related Laws and Regulations (for F.F. etc.) as amended up to
date, there under and special requirements, if any, of the State Electricity Boards etc. The contractor shall
be liable to furnish the list of authorized licensed persons/ employed/ deputed to carry out the works/
perform the assigned duties to fulfill the requirement of Rule No.3 of IER 1956 as amended up to date.
PMC: NSL E5

1.04 CODES & STANDARDS:

A. The design, manufacture, inspection, testing and performance shall comply with all the currently
applicable statutes, safety codes, relevant Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), British Standards (BS),
International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) publication, NEMA & VDE Standards amended up to
date.

B. The design engineering, manufacturing and the installation shall be in accordance with established
codes, sound engineering, practices and specifications. Further, the same shall conform to the statutory
regulations applicable in the country. Contractor shall obtain all approvals from statutory authorities, e.g.
Electrical inspector, SEB or any other agency as applicable before commissioning of electrical system if
required.

C. Some of the relevant Indian and British Standards are listed below.

1. Indian Electricity Act.
2. Indian Electricity Rules.
3. Factory Act.

Any other standard may be followed provided it is equivalent or more stringent than the standards
specified above.

In case of any deviation/conflict of this specification with the codes & standards, the following order of
precedence shall govern

1. Engineer’s decision.
2. Local codes of practice
3. Drawings.
4. Specifications
5. International standards & requirements.

1.05 DESIGN:

A. The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices, to ensure
satisfactory performance and service life. The equipment offered by the contractor shall be complete in all
respects. Any materials or accessories, which may not have been specifically mentioned, but which are
usual and necessary for the completion of the system and satisfactory & trouble free operation and
maintenance of the equipment shall be provided without any extra cost to the Owner. This shall also
include spares for commissioning of the equipment.

B. This specification defines the basic guidelines to develop a suitable electrical system as necessary
for the Complex. All data required in this regard shall be taken in to consideration to develop a detailed
engineering for the system. Site conditions as applicable are mentioned elsewhere.

C. Compliance with these specifications and/or approval of any of the Contractor’s documents shall
in no case relieve the Contractor of his contractual obligations.

PMC: NSL E6
D. All work to be performed and supplies to be made as a part of contract shall require specific
approval/review of Owner or his authorized representative

E. The engineering activities shall comprise the submission for approval of the following from
Consultants/Owner

1.06 BIDDER SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR:

1. Detailed co‐ordination with other services, shop drawings for various electrical layouts such as
equipment layout, cabling layouts, earthing layouts, including equipment installation and cable
termination details etc. prior to start of work.
2. Preparation of bill of materials for electrical works.
3. Protection co‐ordination drawings/ tables for complete power system.
4. Shop inspection and testing procedures.
5. Field‐testing and commissioning procedures.
6. Preparation of as built drawings.

Bidder shall also be responsible for:
Any other work/activity which is not listed above, however is necessary for completeness of
electrical system
Bidder shall clearly understand and quote accordingly:
To ensure that all clauses given in this part of the specifications shall also apply to all other electrical
works of other segments. The bidder shall bring to the notice of the Owner the differences, if any,
and get the same clarified failing which the Owner may impose the more stringent of the
specification/ clauses at the sole risk and costs of the contractor.

1.07 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION PERIOD:

A. The contractor shall be allowed admittance to the site on the date of commencement as
described in the General Conditions and he shall thereupon and forthwith begin the works and shall
regularly proceed with and complete the same on or before the date of completion subject, nevertheless
to the provisions for the extension of time. The time being the essence of the contract, the Contractor will
adhere to the time, progress chart and project schedule and will give proportional output/progress in
proportional time

1.08 SCHEDULE AND MANNER OF OPERATIONS:

A. Time being the essence of this Contract, the Contractor will be expected to furnish all labour and
materials in sufficient quantities and at appropriate times, expedite and schedule the work as required
and so manage the operation that the work will be completed within the time stated in the Contract.

1.09 PROJECT SCHEDULE:

A. The contractor will have to submit a detailed project schedule.

1 For various items of works to be carried out by him.

PMC: NSL E7
2 For various associated works to be carried out by other agencies.

so that the work gets completed with in the contractual completion time. This schedule shall be
submitted by the contractor in Microsoft project software format. The contractor shall follow this
schedule meticulously and shall also coordinate/ follow up with other agencies to expedite the works
associated with his own work. Liquidity damages clause will become applicable for any delay in
completion of the work.

B. The contractor will submit within 7 days of the award of work, a detailed schedule of program of
work.

C. No additional payment will be made to the contractor for any multiple shift work or other
incentive methods contemplated by him in his work schedules even though the time schedule is approved
by the Consultant/Engineer‐in‐Charge.

1.010 DESIGN CONDITIONS:

A. Design ambient: 45 Deg. C maximum dry bulb temperature & 2 Deg. C minimum dry bulb
temperature
B. Altitude: 300 m above sea level
C. Relative Humidity: 98% maximum
D. Site Environment: Normal.

1.10 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Contract documents establish scope, materials and quality but are not detailed installation
instruction.

B. Coordinate work with related trades and furnish, in writing, any information necessary to permit
the work of related trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible conflict or delay.

C. The drawings show the general arrangement of equipment and appurtenances. Follow these
drawings as closely as the actual construction and the work of other divisions will permit. Provide off‐sets,
fittings, and accessories which may be required but not shown on the drawings. Investigate the site, and
review drawings of other divisions to determine conditions affecting the work, and provide such work and
accessories as may be required to accommodate such conditions.

D. The locations of thermostats, switches, panels and other equipment indicated on the drawings are
approximately correct. Exercise particular caution with reference to the location of panels, thermostats,
switches, etc., and have the precise and definite locations accepted by the Engineer before proceeding
with the installation.

E. The drawings show only the general run of services and approximate location of
equipment, outlets, panels, etc. Any significant changes in location of equipment, outlets, panels, etc.,
necessary in order to meet field conditions shall be brought to the determine attention of the Engineer for
review before such alterations are made. Modifications shall be made at no additional cost to the
Contract.

PMC: NSL E8
F. Carefully check space requirements with other division works to ensure that equipment

can be installed in the space allotted.

G. Wherever work interconnects with work amongst different installation, coordinate with
other trades to insure that they have the information necessary so that the Contractor may properly
install the necessary connections and equipment. Identify items requiring access in order that the Ceiling
Trade will know where to install access doors and panels.

H. Consult amongst installation so that, wherever possible, motor controls and distribution
equipment are of the same manufacturer.

I. Furnish and set sleeves for passage of risers through structural masonry and concrete
walls and floors and elsewhere as required for the proper protection of each riser passing through
building surfaces.

J. Provide fire stopping around all pipes, conduits, ducts, sleeves, etc, which pass through
fire compartments.

K. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment suitably so as not to exceed
allowable loading of structures.

L. Wherever the work is of sufficient complexity, prepare additional detail drawings to scale
to coordinate the work with the work of other trades. Detailed work shall be clearly identified on the
drawings as to the area to which it applies. Submit these drawings to the Engineer for review. At
completion include a set of these drawings with each set of record drawings.

M. Coordinate with the local utility companies/authorities for their requirements for service
connections and provide all necessary provisions, grounding, materials, equipment, labor, testing, and
appurtenances.

N. Before commencing works, examine adjoining works on which this work is in any way
affected and report conditions which prevent performance of the works. Become thoroughly familiar with
actual existing conditions to which connections must be made or which must be changed or altered.

W. The Contractor is responsible to any modifications required due to service not properly
coordinated.

1.11 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY INTERFACES

A. The Contractor shall provide power supply points/isolators at certain designated locations
within the development for all mechanical and electrical installations as indicated on the drawings. It is
the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate and make connections to these power supply
points/isolators and to provide all the necessary ‘down‐stream’ power supply distribution board/network
to the mechanical system’s control panels, equipment, sensors, field devices, etc.

1.12 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND INTERFACES

PMC: NSL E9
A. The Contractor shall co‐ordinate the mechanical system and equipment to interface with the Building
Management System in accordance with the point schedules specified on the Drawings. All necessary
interfacing works shall be included in the Contract.
1.13 CENTRAL CONTROL ROOM INTERFACES

A. The Contractor shall include the supply and installation of a custom‐built control console of proprietary
make in the Fire Command Centre and each building component’s Security Room to integrate all control
panels, mimic panels, and central equipment of the following systems:
1. Building Management system
2. Security systems, including CCTV, access control, door monitoring, watchman tour, panic alarm
system, etc.
3. Fire Alarm and Detection system
4. Ventilation Control Panel for all emergency operation fans/systems
5. Lift system
6. Escalator system
7. Fireman Intercom system
8. Fire Protection Pumps Control Panel
9. Fireman’s Override Control Panel
10. Public Address and Emergency Evacuation Announcement systems
11. MATV System
12. all other systems to be housed inside the Fire Command Centre/Security Room

1.14 INTERFACING WITH ALL SERVICES AND SYSTEMS

A. General
1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary provisions for interfacing amongst installation, services,
and equipment. All necessary sensors, current/voltage transformers, voltage‐free contacts, relays,
auxiliary contacts, terminals, transducers, etc. for interfacing works shall be provided by the
Contractor.
2. All control/monitoring wiring from sensors, equipment, and components for the interfacing shall
be terminated at a separate interfacing compartment located at the respective equipment/system’s
switchboard or control panel. The interfacing compartment shall be completed with all necessary
connectors, terminals, and with proper identifications to allow interfacing works to be easily carried
out. The compartment shall clearly indicate “Extra Low Voltage Cable Only. No Power Cable
Connection”. Where there is no equipment/system switchboard or control panel involved, the
Contractor shall provide separate interfacing panels with provisions same as the interfacing
compartment as described above. The locations of the switchboard/control panels and the interfacing
panels shall be properly coordinated.
3. For every control panel and each module of the switchboard, at least five (5) spare terminals shall
be provided for future interfacing works.
4. Wiring and cables for interfacing with the fire alarm system and other fire protection and life
safety systems shall be fire rated to comply with Civil Defense’s requirements.
5. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, interfacing wiring from Fire Alarm and
Building Management systems shall be provided and terminated at the terminals of the interfacing
compartments or panels by the Fire Alarm System and Building Management System installation
respectively. The Contractor shall co‐ordinate the current and voltage requirements for the interfacing
works/provisions. The type of provisions for interfacing signals shall be as follows, unless otherwise
specified:
PMC: NSL E 10
6. Digital inputs and outputs : voltage‐free dry contact
7. Analog inputs and outputs : 4 – 20 mA or 0 – 10 mV
8. All the interface provisions shall be DC operated and rated not more than 50 mA.
9. For interfacing works between Fire Alarm System and Building Management System, the
Contractor shall provide the Fire alarm installation with interface wiring and terminate them at the
Building Management System’s interfacing compartments or panels.
10. The Contractor shall provide and make all power cable connections from mechanical equipment,
local control panels, and distribution boards to the electrical isolators or power points (including cable
termination) provided under Division 16 works. Location of power supply isolators and power points
shall be properly coordinated.
11. In addition to the interfacing requirements shown on the Drawings, interfacing provisions as
described below shall also be provided and included in the Contract.

B. Electrical Installation
1. The Electrical Installation shall provide the following:
a. Isolators and power points (fused spur units) for all mechanical equipment and
systems. Where shown on the Drawings, the Electrical installation shall include direct power cable
connections to the mechanical system’s main motor control centres.
b. Earthing terminal in the Fire Command Centre and all other plant rooms for
supplementary equipotential bonding of mechanical equipment and systems.
c. Power failure signal to the Lift System (including wiring terminations into the Lift
interfacing panel in the Lift Motor Room), Fire Alarm System and the Building Management
System.
d. Electrical bonding of all roof equipment and external metal cladding including
provisions and connection of bonding cables.
e. Fuel main storage tank and day tank High/Low level alarm signals to the Building
Management System.
f. Emergency power supplies to Building Management System (including all field
panels), Fire Alarm System, car parking system, and all security systems.
g. Emergency power supplies to all fire shutters, smoke shutters/curtains, and automatic
doors.
h. Power point in each toilet for the plumbing installation (for connection to automatic
sanitary sensors and flush valve under the Plumbing and Sanitary installation).
2. Power supply to variable air volume (VAV) boxes and the ACMV system’s control
components/sensors shall however be provided under the ACMV installation from the corresponding
equipment motor control panel.

1.15 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Prior to the submitting of bids, visit the project site and become familiar with all
conditions affecting the proposed installation and make provisions as to the cost thereof.

B. The Contract Documents do not make representations regarding the character or extent
of the sub‐soils, water levels, existing structural, mechanical and electrical installations, above or below
ground, or other sub‐surface conditions which may be encountered during the work, based on
examination of the site or other information. Failure to examine the drawings or other information does
not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for satisfactorily completion of the work.

1.16 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PMC: NSL E 11

A. Where ever required provide trenches details, duly approved by the consultant with all
relevant section etc. as per IS codes to the Civil contractor, minimum before 1 month of laying the pipes,
etc. Co ordinate with the civil contractor during the excavation, and ensure that the excavation and
backfilling is being properly done as per requirement.

B. Where ever it is asked by the Owner/ consultant for providing trenches in contractor’s
scope. It is deemed that the cost of the pipe is inclusive of trench digging and backfilling. The following
points needs to be taken care of while making the trenches.

C. The trench shall be of widths necessary for the proper execution of the work. Grade
bottom of the trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support the work on undisturbed soil at
every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, do not excavate below the depths
indicated. Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock to a minimum over depth of four inches
below the trench depths indicated on the drawings or required. Backfill over depths in the rock excavation
and unauthorized over depths with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly machine tamped to a
compaction level of at least 95% to standard proctor density or 75% relative density or as specified by the
Engineer. Wherever unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the work is encountered in the
bottom of the trench, remove soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to the proper grade with
coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material.

D. Excavate trenches for utilities that will provide the following minimum depths of cover
from existing grade or from indicated finished grade as required by local authorities.

E. Trenches should not be placed within 3 meters of foundation or soil surfaces which must
be resist horizontal forces.

F. Do not backfill until all required tests have been performed and installation observed by
the Engineer. Comply with the requirements of other sections of the specifications. Backfill shall consist of
non‐expansive soil with limited porosity. Deposit in 15 cm layers and thoroughly and carefully tamp until
the work has a cover of not less than 30 cm. Backfill and tamp remainder of trench at 30 cm intervals until
complete. Uniformly grade the finished surface.

1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All kinds of cutting and repairing of brick Walls or Partitions, etc. for the proper routing of
pipe, shall be in the scope of the contractor. However, cutting and repairing of RCC wall, or ceiling shall be
in the scope of civil contractor.
B. Where cutting, channeling, chasing or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings or other
surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, support or anchorage of conduit or other equipment,
layout the work carefully in advance. Repair any damage to the building, piping, equipment or defaced
finish plaster, woodwork, metalwork, etc., using skilled trade people of the trades required at no
additional cost to the Contract.

C. Provide slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs as
required. Where these openings are not provided, provide cutting and patching to accommodate
penetrations at no additional cost to the Contract.

1.18 SEALING OF PENETRATIONS
PMC: NSL E 12

A. Air Tight Seals

1. All penetrations through the building fabric subject to suction or pressurization shall be sealed
airtight.

B. Holes in Roof

1. Roof penetrations for passage of conduits or circular PVC and PVC Cables shall be sealed
watertight using a flexible polypropylene conical sleeve manufacturer to seal the cable to the roof
structure, regardless of the roof profile.

2. All sharp metal edges, which may come in contact with the cable, shall be suitably bushed.

C. Fire Rated Penetrations

1. Where services penetrate any fire rated barrier, the Contractor shall seal the penetration with the
use of an appropriate material to ensure the integrity of the fire barrier.

2. The Contractor shall seal the cable enclosures through fire rated barriers to ensure the integrity
and rating of the fire barrier.

D. Acoustic Penetrations

1. Where services penetrate acoustic barriers, sealant shall be supplied and installed to maintain the
acoustic separation at least equal to the barrier penetration.

1.19 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Verify exact locations and mounting heights with the Engineer before installation.

1.20 SUPPORTS

A. Support work in accordance with the best industry practice. Provide supports, hangers,
auxiliary structural members and supplemental hardware required for support of the work.

B. Provide supporting frames or racks extending from floor slab to ceiling slab for work
indicated as being supported from walls where the walls are incapable of supporting the weight. In
particular, provide such frames or racks in electric closets and equipment room.

C. Provide supporting frames or racks for equipment which is installed in a free standing
position.

D. Supporting frames or racks shall be of standard angle, standard channel or specialty
support system steel members, rigidly bolted or welded together and adequately braced to form a
substantial structure. Racks shall be of ample size to assure a workmanlike arrangement of all equipment
mounted on them.

PMC: NSL E 13
E. Adequate support of equipment (including outlet, pull and junction boxes and fittings)
shall not depend on ducts, pipe, electric conduits, raceways, or cables for support.

F. Equipment shall not rest on or depend for support on suspended ceiling media (tiles, lath,
plaster, as well as splinters, runners, bars and the like in the plane of the ceiling). Provide independent
support of equipment. Do not attach to supports provided for ductwork, piping or work of other trades.

G. Provide required supports and hangers for equipment so that loading will not exceed
allowable loading of structure. Equipment and supports shall not come in contact with work of other
trades.

1.21 FASTENINGS
A. Fasten equipment to building in accordance with the best industry practice.

B. Where weight applied to the attachment points is 45 kg or less, conform to the following
as a minimum:
1. Wood : Wood screws
2. Concrete and solid masonry : Dash Fastener of appropriate ratings ‐HILTI/FISHER
3. Solid metal : Machine screws in tapped holes or with welded studs

C. Where weight applied to the building attachment points exceeds 45 kg, but is 135 kg or
less, conform to the following as a minimum:

1. At concrete slabs provide 60 cm x 60 cm x 13 cm steel fishplates on top with through bolts. Fishplate
assemblies shall be chased in and grouted flush with the top slabs screed line, where no fill is to
be applied.

2. At steel decking or sub‐floor for all fastenings, provide through bolts and threaded rods. The tops of
bolts and rods shall be set at least one inch below the top fill screed line and grouted in. Suitable
washers shall be used under bolt heads or nuts. In cases where the decking or sub‐floor
manufacturer produces specialty hangers to work with his decking or sub‐floor such hangers shall
be provided.

D. Where weight applied to building attachment points exceeds 135 kg, coordinate with and
obtain the approval of Engineer and conform to the following as a minimum:

1. Provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron bridging between building structural steel
elements to establish fastening points. Bridging members shall suitably weld or clamped to
building steel. Provide threaded rods or bolts to attach to bridging members.
E. For items which are shown as being ceiling mounted at locations where fastening to the
building construction element above is not possible, provide suitable auxiliary channel or angle iron
bridging tying to the building structural elements.

F. Wall mounted equipment may be directly secured to wall by means of steel bolts. Groups
or arrays of equipment may be mounted on adequately sized steel angles, channels, or bars.

1.22 IDENTIFICATION
PMC: NSL E 14

A. Identify equipment with permanently attached black phenolic nameplates with 13 mm
high white engraved lettering. Identification shall include equipment name or load served as appropriate.
Nameplates shall be attached with cadmium plated screws; peel and stick tape or glue on type
nameplates is unacceptable.

B. Services runs shall be properly identified as per the requirements in the Contract.

C. See individual section for additional identification requirements.

1.23 PROHIBITED LABELS AND IDENTIFICATIONS

A. In all public areas, tenant areas, and similar locations within the project, the inclusion or
installation of any equipment or assembly which bears on any surface any name, trademark, or other
insignia which is intended to identify the manufacturer, the vendor, or other source(s) from which such
object has been obtained, is prohibited.

B. Required test lab certification labels shall not be removed nor shall identification
specifically required under the various technical sections of the Specifications be removed.

1.24 EQUIPMENT PADS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Provide all details with proper sections for the equipment pads and anchor. The
equipment pads casting and making provision for anchor fastening shall be as per the final UNALTERED
drawing duly approved by the consultant, shall be in the scope of Civil contractor. However, the
Contractor shall ensure the proper coordination with the civil contractor.

B. All equipment pads for all vibrating equipments shall have cork vibration pads sandwiched
between the finish surface and the bottom surface of required thickness suggested by the civil consultant,
to ensure that the minimum vibration can travel below.

C. Provide galvanized anchor bolts for all equipment placed on concrete equipment pads,
inertia blocks, or on concrete slabs. Provide bolts of the size and number recommended by the
manufacturer of the equipment and locate by means of suitable templates. Equipment installed on
vibration isolators shall be secured to the isolator. Secure the isolator to the floor, pad, or support as
recommended by the vibration isolation manufacturer.

D. Where equipment is mounted on gypsum board partitions, the mounting screws shall
pass through the gypsum board and securely attach to the partition studs. As an attached to 15 cm
square, galvanized metal back plates which are attached to the gypsum board with an approved non‐
flammable adhesive. Toggle bolts installed in gypsum board partitions are not acceptable.
1.25 MISCELLANEOUS:

A. A site order book will be maintained at site, which will be in the custody of the Owner, or his
representative and all instructions given to the contractor will be recorded in the site order book and the
same has to be signed by the contractor to comply with the instructions given therein.

PMC: NSL E 15
B. After completion of the work the whole installation shall be tested by the contractor in the
presence of the Consultant/Engineer‐in‐Charge. The tests shall comply the following I.E.E. Regulations
and shall be submitted along with the final bill:

1. The result of the insulation test shall comply with the I.E.E. Regulations 1101 to 1108A and
1008B as may be applicable.
2. Test shall be carried out to ascertain that all the non‐linked SP switches have been connected
to the phase conductor.
3. The continuity test of the earthing system shall comply with I.E.E. Regulations 1108 to 1109 to
the latest addition.
C. If the result of the above tests does not comply with the I.E.E. Regulations, the contractor shall be
bound to rectify the faults so that the required results are obtained.

D. The contractor shall be responsible to provide all the necessary testing instruments, such as
megger insulation tester, earth tester multi‐meter, AVO meter etc for carrying out the above tests.

E. The work will not be considered as complete and taken over by the Owner till all the components
of the work after being completed at site in all respects have been inspected/ tested by the
Consultant/Owner to his entire satisfaction and a completion certificate issued by the Owner/Consultant
to this effect.

F. Shop drawing for electrical work e.g. equipment, cable earthing and conduit layout for all systems
shall be prepared by the contractor and got approved before starting of the work.

G. At the completion of the work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion, the
contractor shall submit 6 sets of drawing and two tracing of each drawing to Owner of each layout
drawings drawn at approved.

H. Contractor’s Superintendence:
1. The contractor shall provide all necessary superintendence during the execution of the works and
as long thereafter as the engineer may consider necessary. The contractor or his competent and
authorized agent or representative approved of in writing by the owner/ Engineer (which approval
may at any time be withdrawn) is to be constantly on the works and shall give his whole time to
the superintendence of the same. Such authorized agent or representative shall receive on behalf
of the contractor, directions and instructions from the Engineer‐in‐charge or his representative.
2. The contractor shall provide detailed organization of the execution team deployed for the works
with names and CV’s, of all key staff before the commencement of work and get it approved of in
writing by the Owner/ Consultant. Contact telephone or pager numbers for emergency and/or
twenty‐four (24) hour call shall also be included.
3. If in any case of withdrawal of any worker/ technician/Engineer from the execution team, the
replacement of the same shall be done with equivalent qualification, and shall be approved in
writing by the Owner/ Consultant.

PART 2 – PROUCT, TESTING & COMMISIONING

2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Electrical Details for Incoming Supply:

PMC: NSL E 16
1. Supply Voltage: as approved by SEB
2. Fault Level (Sym.) at supply point (Designated): MVA (to be confirmed from State Electricity Board
by Bidder).
3. Neutral: Grounded
4. Voltage Regulations: + 10%
5. Frequency Regulations: + 3%
6. Combined Regulations: + 10%

B. LT Power Distribution System:

1. Voltage: 415 V
2. Frequency: 50 Hz
3. Neutral: Grounded
4. Short Circuit Fault withstand capacity: 20 to 50 KA for 1 sec., as per BOQ and
specifications

C. Control supply for Electrical System:

The various supply voltage to be used in the control panels for the main equipment shall be as under:
1. Spring charge motor: 230 V AC or 24 V DC (Universal Motor)
2. Closing/ Trip Coil: 24 V DC
3. Alarm/ Indication/ Relays: 24 V DC
4. Heaters: 230 V AC

D. Painting of Panels:

Powder coating of approved shade as per Specification. (Refer clause of painting)
E. Painting of Cable Trays and Structural steel:

Powder coating of approved shade as per Specification. (Refer clause of painting)

F. Cable Details:

1. LT Control Cables: Copper conductor armoured PVC insulated 1.1 KV grade.
2. LT Power Cables: Aluminium conductor armoured XLPE insulated.
3. Grounding Conductors: Copper/ G.I. as specifications and BOQ

G. Accuracy Class of Meters:

1. Revenue Meters: Class‐I or as approved by SEB
2. Ammeters, Voltmeters & Other Instruments: Digital Type

2.02 DRAWINGS:

A. The list of drawings is enclosed along with this specification. These drawings are meant to give
general idea to bidder regarding the nature of work covered by these specifications.

PMC: NSL E 17
B. Any information/data shown/not shown in these drawings shall not relieve the contractor of his
responsibility to carry out the work as per the specifications. Additional information required by the
bidder for successfully completing the work shall be obtained by him.

2.03 SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. The contractor shall prepare detailed coordinated electrical shop drawing indicating Panel layout,
with other relevant services and submit to the Consultant for approval or the Engineer‐in‐Charge before
commencing the work. The shop drawings shall indicate all setting out details and physical dimensions of
all components with wiring and cable details including system operating write up in the system i.e. Control
and Relay Panel and fixing details for the above mentioned work. All work shall be carried out on the
approval of these drawings. However, approval of these drawings do not relieve the contractor of his
responsibility for providing maintenance free and full proof system including any missing
component/accessories to meet with the intent of the specifications. Contractor will submit 2 (two) prints
for preliminary approval and finally 6 (six) prints for distribution.

2.04 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Where manufacturers have furnished specific instructions, relating to the material/equipments to
be used on this job, covering points not specifically mentioned in this document, manufacturer’s
instructions should be followed.
2.05 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS AND DRAWINGS:

A. Three copies of operation manuals/catalogues of all standard equipment are to be furnished by
the contractor immediately after commissioning of plant.

B. Three copies of write up on preventive maintenance, trouble shooting and operating instructions
of the system along with as‐built drawings are to be supplied by the Contractor at the time of
commissioning.

C. On completion of the work in all respects, the Contractor shall supply five portfolios
(300x450 mm), each containing complete set of drawings on approved scale, clearly indicating complete
layouts, location; wiring and sequencing of automatic controls, location of all concealed wiring and other
services. Each portfolio shall also contain consolidated control diagrams and technical literature on all
controls. The Contractor shall frame under glass, in the Panel rooms, one set of these consolidated
control diagrams.

2.06 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

All the materials and equipments shall be of the approved make and design. Unless otherwise called for
any approval by Owner’s Engineer‐in‐Charge, only the best quality materials and equipment shall be used.

A. Space Heaters:
Suitable number of adequately rated heaters thermostatically controlled with On‐Off switch and fuse shall
be provided to prevent condensation in any panel compartment. The heaters shall be installed in the
lower portion of the compartment and electrical connections shall be made from below the heaters to
minimize deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be suitable to maintain the
compartment temperature to prevent condensation.

PMC: NSL E 18
B. Fungi static Varnish:
Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall be applied on parts, which
may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of fungi due to the presence or deposit of nutrient
substances. The varnish shall not be applied to any surface of part where the treatment will interfere with
the operation or performance of the equipment. Such surfaces or parts shall be protected against the
application of the varnish.

C. Ventilation Opening:
In order to ensure adequate ventilation, compartments shall have ventilation openings provided with fine
wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of insects and to reduce to a minimum the entry of dirt and dust.
Outdoor compartment openings shall be provided with shutter type blinds.

D. Degree of Protection:
The enclosures of the control cabinet, junction boxes and marshalling boxes, panels. etc to be installed
shall provide degree of protection as detailed her under.
1. Installed indoor : IP‐55
2. Installed indoor in air‐conditioned area : IP‐31
3. Installed in covered area : IP‐42
4. Installed indoor in non air‐conditioned area where possibility of entry of water is limited :IP‐41
5. For LT Switchgear (AC and DC distribution boards) :IP‐42

The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS: 13947 (Part –I) IEC‐947 (Part –I). Type test report
for degree of protection test, on each type of the box shall be submitted for approval.

E. Rating plates, Name plates and Labels:
LV panel and auxiliary items installed in the building is to permanently attach to it in a conspicuous
position. A rating plate of non‐corrosive material with engraved manufacturer’s name, year of
manufacture, equipment name, type or serial number together with details of loading conditions of
equipment in question has been designed to operate and such diagram plates as may require by the
owner. The rating plate of each equipment shall be in accordance to IEC requirement.
All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates shall be bilingual with Hindi inscription first followed
by English. Alternatively two separate plates on with Hindi and another with English inscriptions may be
provided.

F. Design Improvements:
The bidder shall note that the equipment offered to him in the bid only shall be accepted for supply.
If for any reason, contractor wished to deviate from specification, prior permission from owner/
consultant shall be sought.
If any change is agreed upon and that if affects the price and schedule of completion, the parties shall
agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the price and/ or schedule of completion before the
contractor proceeds with the change. Following such arrangements, the provision thereof, shall be
deemed to have been amended accordingly in the specification.

G. Quality Assurance Programme:
To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this Contract whether manufactured or
performed within the Contractor’s works or at his sub‐contractor’s premises or at the Owner’s site or at
any other place of work are in accordance with the specifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable
quality assurance program to control such activities at all points necessary. Such programme shall be
PMC: NSL E 19
outlined by the Contractor and shall be finally accepted by the Owner after discussions before the award
of Contract. A quality assurance programme of the contractor shall generally cover the following:
1. His organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality
assurance programme.

2. Documentation control system.

3. Qualification data for bidder’s key personnel.

4. The procedure for purchases of materials, parts components and selection of sub‐contractor’s
services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw material inspection, verification of
material purchases etc.

5. System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including process controls and fabrication
and assembly control.

6. Control of non‐conforming items and system for corrective actions.

7. Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.

8. Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field activities.

9. System for indication and appraisal of is inspection status.

10. System for authorizing release of manufactured product to the Owner.

11. System for maintenance of records.

12. System for handling storage and delivery and.

The Owner or his duly authorized representative reserves the right to carry out quality audit and quality
surveillance of the system and procedure of the Contractor / his Vendor’s quality management and
control activities.

H. Quality Assurance Documents
The Contractor shall be required to submit the following Quality Assurance Documents within three weeks
after dispatch of the equipment.

1. All Non‐Destructive Examination procedures, stress relief and weld repair procedure actually used
during fabrication and reports including radiography interpretation reports.

2. Welder and welding operator qualification certificates.

3. Welder’s identification list, listing welder’s and welding operator’s qualification procedure and
welding identification symbols.
4. Raw material test reports on components as specified by the specification and / or agreed to in the
quality plan.

5. Stress relief time temperature charts/oil impregnation time temperature charts.
PMC: NSL E 20

6. Factory test results for testing required as per applicable codes/mutually agreed quality
plan/standards referred in the technical specification.

7. The quality plan with verification of various customer inspection points (CIP) as mutually and methods
used to verify the inspection and testing points in the quality plan were performed satisfactory.

2.07 INSPECTION, TESTING AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATES:

A. The Owner and the Consultant or duly authorized representative shall have at all reasonable times
free access to the Contractor’s premises or works and shall have the power at all reasonable times to
inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the works during its manufacture or erection, if
part of the works is being manufactured or assembled at other premises or works, the Contractor shall
obtain permission to inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on the Contractor’s own
premises or works. Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture, dispatch or at site at the option
of the Owner and the equipment if found unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or quality, material is
liable to be rejected.

B. All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests and shall be subject to routine tests in
accordance with requirements stipulated under respective sections. Bidder shall submit the type tests
reports for approval. The Contractor shall intimate the Owner/Consultant the detailed programme about
the tests at least three (3) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies. If for any item type test were
pending payment would be made on successful completion of type/routine test(s) actually carried out as
per Consultant/Owner instructions.

C. The Contractor shall give the Consultant/Owner thirty (30) days written notice of any material
being ready for testing. Such tests shall be to the Contractor’s account. The Consultant/Owner unless
witnessing of the tests is virtually waived will attend such tests within thirty (30) days of the date of which
the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection, failing which the Contractor may proceed
with the test which shall be deemed to have been made in the presence of Owner/Consultant and he shall
forthwith forward to the Consultant duly certified copies of tests in triplicate.

D. The Consultant/Owner shall within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspection as defined shall
inform in writing to the Contractor of any objection to any drawings and all or any equipment and
workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall give due
consideration to such objections and make the necessary modifications accordingly.

E. When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor’s or Sub‐contractor’s works, the
Consultant/Owner shall issue a certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days after completion of tests
but if the tests are not witnessed by the Consultant/Owner, the certificate shall be issued within fifteen
(15) days of receipt of the Contractor’s Test certificate by the Consultant/Owner. Failure of the issue such
a certificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the works. The completion of these
tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the Owner to accept the equipment should, it, on further
tests after erection, is found not to comply with the Specification. The equipment shall be dispatched to
site only after approval of test reports and issuance of MICC by the Owner.

F. For tests whether at the premises or at the works of the Contractor or of any Sub‐Contractor, the
Contractor except where otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labor, materials,
electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be required by Owner/Consultant or this
PMC: NSL E 21
authorized representative to carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance with the
Specification.

G. The inspection by Owner/Consultant and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in no way
limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the agreed quality assurance
programme forming a part of the Contract.

H. The Consultant/Owner will have the right of having at his own expenses any other tests(s) of
reasonable nature carried out at Contractor’s premises or at site or in any other place in addition of
aforesaid type and routine tests to satisfy that the material comply with the specifications.

I. The Owner/Consultant reserves the right for getting any field tests not specified in respective
sections of the technical specification conducted on the completely assembled equipment at site. The
testing equipments for these tests shall be provided by the Contractor.

2.08 TESTS:

A. Charging (Pre‐commissioning tests):

On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item of the equipment shall be
thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by the Owner/Consultant and the Contractor for
correctness and completeness of installation and acceptability for charging, leading to initial pre‐
commissioning tests at Site. The pre‐commissioning tests to be performed as per relevant I.S. / vendor/
bidder submittal and as included in the Contractor’s quality assurance programme.

B. Commissioning Tests:
1. The available instrumentation and control equipment will be used during such tests and the
Contractor will calibrate all such measuring equipment and devices as far as practicable. However,
unmeasurable parameters shall be taken into account in a reasonable manner by the Contractor for
the requirement of these tests. The tests will be conducted at the specified load points and as near
the specified cycle condition as practicable. The Contractor will apply proper corrections in
calculation, to take into account conditions which do not correspond to the specified conditions.

2. All instruments, tools and tackles required for the successful completion of the Commissioning Tests
shall be provided by the Contractor, free of cost.

3. Pre‐commissioning test shall be carried out as per relevant IS and/or as specified in the relevant
clause.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the concerned authorities
for commissioning of the equipment. However necessary fee shall be reimburse by Owner on
production of requisite documents.

2.09 PACKAGING:

A. All the equipments shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated to prevent
damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at Site till the time of erection. While
packing all the materials, the limitation from the point of view of availability of Railway
wagon/truck/trailer sizes in India should be taken account of the Contractor shall be responsible for any
PMC: NSL E 22
loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Any demurrage,
wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the
Contractor. Owner takes no responsibility of the availability of any special packaging/transporting
arrangement.

2.1 PROTECTION:

A. All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discoloration and any other
damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected with either a metallic or a non‐
metallic protecting device. All ends of all valves and piping and conduit equipment connections shall be
properly sealed with suitable devices to protect them from damage. The parts which are likely to get
rusted, due to exposure to weather should also be properly treated and protected in a suitable manner.

2.2 FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES:
A. General:
All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti‐corrosion protection. All ferrous surfaces for
external use unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification or specifically agreed, shall be hot‐dip
galvanized after fabrication. High tensile steel nuts and bolts and spring washers shall be electro
galvanize. All steel conductors used for earthing/grounding (above ground level) shall be galvanized
according to IS: 2629.

B. Painting:
1. All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, and phosphated in accordance with the IS‐6005
“Code of practice for Phosphating iron and sheet”. All surfaces, which will not be easily accessible
after shop assembly, shall beforehand be treated and protected for the life of the equipment. The
surfaces, which are to be finished painted after installation or require corrosion protection until
installation, shall be shop painted with at least two coats of primer. Oil, grease, dirt and swab shall be
thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute
acid followed by washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

2. After Phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final rinsing
with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate coating shall be sealed with
application of two coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be
“flash dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.

3. Powder coating/electrostatic painting of approved shade shall be applied.

4. The exterior color of the paint shall be as per IS‐5 or as approved by Consultant. A small quantity
of finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after installation of the
equipments, if required.

5. In case the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and protection procedures
or any other established painting procedures like electrostatic painting etc. the procedure shall be
submitted along with the Bids for Owner’s review and approval.

2.3 HANDLING, STORAGE AND INSTALLATION:

A. In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on manufacturer’s drawings or
as directed by the Owner or his representative, the Contractor shall unload, store, erect, install, wire, test
PMC: NSL E 23
and place into commercial use all the equipment included in the contract. Equipment shall be installed in
a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is level, plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented.

B. Contractor shall follow the unloading and transporting procedure at site, as well as storing, testing
and commissioning of the various equipment being procured by him separately. Contractor shall unload,
transport, store, erect, test and commission the equipment as per instructions of the manufacturer’s
Engineer(s) and shall extend full co‐operation to them.

C. In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of manufacturer’s
drawings or instructions, necessary clarifications shall be obtained form the Owner/Consultant.
Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to the equipment consequent for not following
manufacturer’s drawings/instructions correctly.

D. Where assemblies are supplied in more than the one section, Contractor shall make all necessary
connections between sections. All components shall be protected against damage during unloading,
transportation, storage, installation, testing and commissioning. Any equipment damaged due to
negligence or carelessness or otherwise shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

E. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner every week, a report detailing all the receipts during the
weeks. However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any shortages or damages in transit,
handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment at Site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other
such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor.

F. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material until the same is handed
over tot he Owner in an operating condition after commissioning. Contractor shall be responsible for the
maintenance of the equipment/material while in storage as well as after erection until taken over by
Owner, as well as protection of the same against theft, element of nature, corrosion, damages etc.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities, to store all
equipment, which require indoor storage.

H. The words ‘erection’ and ‘installation’ used in the specification are synonymous.

I. Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the requirements of
electrical and other statutory safety codes.

J. The minimum phase to earth, phase to phase and section clearance along with other technical
parameters for the various voltage levels shall be maintained as per relevant IS.

2.4 PROTECTIVE GUARDS

A. Suitable guards shall be provided for protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and / or
moving machine parts. All such guards with necessary spares and accessories shall be designed for easy
installation and removal for maintenance purpose.

B. The Contractor shall also conform to the general regulations governing personnel on the site and
must keep to the working space allocated for their use.

PMC: NSL E 24
C. The contractor shall be responsible for any kind of mishap, etc. happened with personnel. The
Owner shall not take the responsibility for any of such kind.

2.5 TOOLS AND TACKLES:

A. The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all special tools and tackles
for the erection, assembly, dismantling and maintenance of the equipments.

END OF SECTION
PMC: NSL E 25
Electrical: Conduit system, cable tray Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC

CONDUIT SYSTEM, CABLE TRAY, CABLE LADDER AND TRUNKING INSTALLATION

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. This section describes the supply and installation of wiring facilities systems include conduits,
cable trays, cable ladder and Trunking system, c/w associated fittings and accessories.

B. All cables run above the suspended false ceiling, concealed in walls, columns, or on surface
shall be supported by conduits, cable tray and Trunking or cable ladder system. No free
slinging cable is allowed.

C. The cable routes as shown in the drawings shall be used as a guide only. Prior to the
installation, the cable routes shall be coordinated with other services. Uncoordinated and
inaccessible routes after other services are installed, shall be relocated at the expense of the
Contractor.

D. All conduits, trunking, cable trays and cable ladders shall be earthed in accordance to IS: 4043.

1.02 STANDARDS

A. The complete wiring facilities system shall be manufactured, supplied, installed and tested in
accordance with the latest revision of the India‐Delhi standards and the appropriate BS/IEC
include:
1. Steel Conduit and Fitting Accessories IS:9537 (Part‐II)/ BS4568 & BS731
2. PVC Conduit and Fitting Accessories IS‐9537/1983 (Part‐III)/BS6099 & BS4607
3. Cable Tray BS729
4. Cable Ladder BS729
5. Cable Trunking BS4678

B. The complete wiring facilities system shall also conform to the requirements of all relevant
local codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in this
Specification and Drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the Engineer.

C. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the following
precedence:
1. Engineer’s decision;
2. Local codes of practice;
3. Drawings;
4. Specification;
PMC: NSL E26
5. International standards and requirements
1.03 SUBMISSIONS

A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of
construction.
Routing of installation
Sample with proprietary factory‐made accessories, elbows, risers, reducers, tees, crosses, etc.

PMC: NSL E27

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES

A. Steel Conduit
1. All conduits shall be of heavy gauge
2. solid drawn ERW welded manufactured out of 16 (1.6mm) gauge MS Sheet up to 32mm
dia and of 14 (2 mm) gauge for sizes higher than this.
3. Both inner and outer surfaces shall be smooth without burrs, dents and kinks.
4. Conduits shall be black stove enameled inside and outside. The cross section of conduit
shall be uniform throughout.
5. The welding shall be uniform such that welded joints do not yield when subjected to
flattening test. Welded joint shall not break when threaded or bent at an angle.
6. Conduit shall conform to specifications of IS: 9537 (Part‐II) and the capacity of conduits
shall be in accordance with the standards and shall never be exceeded.
7. The minimum size of the conduit shall be 19/20mm dia.
8. Care shall be taken to ensure that all conduits are adequately protected while stored at
site prior to erection and no damaged conduit shall be used.

Fittings
1. Samples of conduit fittings shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.
2. Fittings shall be those intended for use with screwed conduits and shall comply with IS
9537. However, bends, elbows and tees shall not be installed.
3. Boxes and cover plates that are installed outdoors shall have fixing lugs exterior to the
box so that fixing screws do not enter the box interior.
4. Adaptors used with flexible conduits shall conform to IS: 9537.

Circular Boxes
1. Circular boxes shall be of malleable cast iron, galvanized and of standard pattern with
spout(s). When used for connecting lengths of conduits, circular boxes shall be provided
with cover plates of similar make that are complete with brass fixing screws.

Rectangular Boxes
1. Rectangular boxes (adaptable boxes) shall be of mild steel not less than 2.4 mm gauge
and galvanized. When used as junction boxes, lids of the same gauge with brass fixing
screws shall be used.

Boxes for Accessories
1. Boxes for accessories shall be suitable for surface mounting or recessed mounting
according to the requirements. Surface mounted boxes and accessories shall be metal
clad pattern. Recessed boxes and accessories shall be complete with insulated moulded
type cover plates conforming to IS: 5133 Part I‐1969.

PMC: NSL E28

Covers
1. All covers for boxes, etc shall be made of galvanized steel of 1.2 mm thickness.

2.02PVC CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES

PVC Conduit
1. All conduits shall be high impact rigid 2mm thickness PVC heavy duty type and shall
comply with I.E.E. regulations for non‐metallic conduit 2mm thick as per IS‐9537/1983
(Part‐III).
2. All sections of conduit and relevant boxes shall be properly cleaned and glued by using
epoxy resin glue and the proper connecting pieces.
3. Inspection type conduit fittings such as inspection boxes, drawn boxes, fan boxes and
outlet boxes shall be M.S. or otherwise mentioned.
4. Conduit shall be terminated with adopter/PVC glands as required.

PVC Conduit Accessories
1. Accessories used for conduit wiring shall be of an approved type complying to IS:
3837‐1966.
2. All accessories used shall be of standard white or black color, identical to conduit
used.
3. Plain conduits should be jointed by slip type of couplers with manufacturer’s
standard sealing cement.
4. All conduit entries to outlet boxes, Trunking and switchgear are to be made with
adaptors female thread and male bushes screwed.
5. PVC‐switch and socket boxes with round knockouts are to be used. The colors of
these boxes and the conduits shall be the same.
6. Standard PVC circular junction boxes are to be used with conduits for intersection,
Tee‐junction, angle‐junction and terminal. For the drawing‐in of cables, standard circular
through boxes shall be used.
7. Samples of accessories shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.
8. All jointing of PVC conduits shall be by means of adhesive jointing. Adequate
expansion joints shall be allowed to take up the expansion of PVC conduits.

2.03CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Layout
1. The conduit layout and conduit routes shall be submitted for approval. Allowance
for adjustments due to site conditions shall be provided with no extra cost.
2. Conduit routes shall be chosen for easy, straight runs with a minimum of bends
and crossings. Generally they shall follow the structure of building, running at right
angles or in parallel to floors and ceilings. Conduits shall be kept within 300 mm of floors
and ceilings when running parallel to them.
3. Outlet boxes for housing accessories shall be used as draw boxes. The total
number of draw boxes shall be kept to a minimum and shall be provided so that conduit
runs do not exceed 12 m or have more than two right angle bends.
PMC: NSL E29

4. All conduits shall be kept clear of gas and water pipes. In particular, conduits shall
be at least 150 mm away from gas pipes. Where proximity to these pipes is unavoidable,
they shall be effectually segregated e.g. using rubber or other insulating material to
prevent appreciable voltage differences at possible points of contact. Segregation from
extra low voltage circuits and telecommunication circuits shall also apply unless these are
wired to the same voltage requirements as lighting and power circuits.
5. Conduits from different distribution boards shall not be connected to the same junction
box. Each run of conduit shall be assembled complete with draw‐in‐wires.

Joints And Terminations
1. Electrical and mechanical continuity shall be maintained throughout all conduit joints and
terminations. Conduit threads shall be thoroughly cleaned and the conduits tightly
screwed. The conduit system shall be watertight after installation.
2. Conduits shall be connected using couples or via boxes. With a coupler, the ends of the
conduit shall butted close together and the running coupler is screwed tightly on and
tightened by a locknut.
3. Conduits terminating into boxes provided with spouts shall be threaded so that there are
no exposed threads. For boxes with no spouts, the termination shall be made using a
brass bush and a coupler. The conduit is pushed through the knockout or drilled entry
and the bush is screwed tightly onto its end. The coupler is screwed to butt firmly against
the exterior wall of the box.
4. Where conduits are not jointed or terminated in boxes, they shall be terminated in a
screwed brass bush.
5. In all joints and terminations, conduit threads shall not be exposed. Where this cannot
be avoided as in a running coupler, the exposed threads shall be coated with red lead
paint to seal against the ingress of water.

Bends
1. Conduits shall only be bent cold with an approved type of bending block or bending
machine, without altering the dimensions of their sections.
2. All conduit bends shall be such as to permit compliance to the requirements for bends in
cables to as stated in the BS 7671.
3. Bends shall be made with as large a radius as the position of the conduit within the
building permits. Where the bend is more than 90 degree, circular or rectangular
junction boxes are to be used for connecting conduits.

Cabling
1. The conduit system must be completely installed and free of obstructions and sharp
corners before any cables are drawn in. Conduits shall be thoroughly swabbed to remove
moisture and dirt immediately prior to the drawing in of cables.
PMC: NSL E30

2. Cables shall be drawn without crossing each other and shall not be pulled against the
walls of the draw boxes. Slack cables shall left in all draw boxes.
3. Cables shall be continuous throughout conduit lengths and no joints are permitted.
There shall be no kink in cables, neither any cut, abrasion or chink in the cable insulation.
4. The same conduit shall carry the lead and return conductors bunched together.
However, the same conduit shall not house cables from different distribution boards.
5. Cables for power and lighting circuits and extra low voltage systems shall not be drawn
into the same conduit. Lighting and power final circuits shall be run in separate conduits
except, where an adaptable box is employed as final distribution point, a number of final
circuits may be grouped together in larger conduits between the distribution board and
the adaptable box provided that all final circuits in one conduit are of the same phase. In
the case of three phase circuits, all three phases including neutral, if any, shall be drawn
into the same conduit.
6. Conduits shall not constitute the earth continuity path for the electrical circuit. A
separate circuit protective conductor shall be installed within the conduit. The whole
conduit system shall be effectively earthed.
7. Flexible conduits shall also have a separate earthing conductor installed within the tubing
and connected at conduit ends. Flexible conduits in general shall not be used for more
than 3m length.
8. Maximum number of PVC insulated 650/1100 V grade/copper conductor cable
conforming to IS:694‐1990

Nominal 20mm 25mm 32mm 38mm 51mm 64mm
Cross‐
Sectional
area of
Conductor
in Sq.mm
S B S B S B S B S B S B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1.50 5 4 10 8 18 12 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
2.50 5 3 8 6 12 10 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
4 3 2 6 5 10 8 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
6 2 ‐ 5 4 8 7 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
10 2 ‐ 4 3 6 5 8 6 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐
16 ‐ ‐ 2 2 3 3 5 5 10 7 12 8
25 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 5 3 8 6 9 7
35 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 3 2 6 5 8 6
50 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 5 3 6 5
70 ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ ‐ 4 3 5 4
Note:

i. The above table shows the maximum capacity of conduits for a simultaneous drawing
in of cables.
PMC: NSL E31

ii. The columns heads ‘S’ apply to runs of conduits which have distance not exceeding
4.25 m between draw in boxes and which do not deflect from the straight by an angle of
more than 15 degrees. The columns heads ‘B’ apply to runs of conduit which deflect from
the straight by an angle of more than 15 degrees.
iii. Conduit sizes are the nominal external diameters.

Access And Drainage
1. The conduit system shall be rewirable, that is, draw boxes must be accessible for the
purpose. Where boxes are concealed, their covers shall be flushed with the finished
surface.
2. The need for accessibility notwithstanding, the conduit system shall be protected against
the ingress of water and impurities. When installed, conduits shall be kept dry and free
of debris with approved pipe plugs or caps. Such plugging is especially essential prior to
pouring concrete for concealed installation. As for boxes, they shall be covered by steel
plates prior to concreting.
3. When installed outdoor, and in situations liable to condensation of moisture, conduits
shall be arranged to be self draining, so that water may drain to low points which are
fitted with a drain plug. Conduits laid under concrete floors shall have watertight floor‐
traps of approved detail for access of these drainage points.
4. Conduits run on surfaces other than structural steel members shall be secured using
galvanized space bar saddles and brass fixing screws. Spacing of saddles shall not exceed
1.2 m for conduit sizes up to and including 25 mm and 1.8 m for sizes 32 mm and above.
5. Conduits run on structural steel shall be secured using girder clips or an approved clamp.
These conduits and those run in the vicinity of structural steel shall be bonded to the
steelwork using an efficient and permanent metallic connection. The conduits shall not in
any way be under mechanical stress.
6. All conduit boxes except loop‐in patterns shall be fixed direct to the building structure in
addition to the support provided by the conduits.
7. Conduits terminating into surface boxes shall be secured by a minimum of 3 saddles at
not less than 32 mm, 150 mm and 300 mm respectively from the box.
8. Conduits shall be painted with an approved paint to blend with visual environment. A
zinc rich undercoat shall be provided before painting the final coat.

2.04CABLE TRAY

A. Cable tray shall be of perforated type and constructed a minimum 2.0 mm hot dipped
galvanized mild steel for outdoor damp condition, and epoxy coated electro‐galvanized mild
steel for indoor installation. All cable trays shall be installed in a straight run parallel to walls
where possible.

B. Cable trays shall be supported by electro‐galvanized ‘U’ channel with galvanized threaded rod
for indoor suspended tray and hot‐dipped galvanized for area subject to weather.

C. All hangers shall be installed at 1 metre intervals and shall be primed and painted to match
with the surrounding building finish approved by the Engineer.
PMC: NSL E32


D. For cable tray that are exposed to the weather, a hot‐dip galvanized covers of 1.5mm gauge
steel, flush fixing type with gasket, shall be installed on top of the tray.

E. Depending on the size of cable trays spare space of 25% shall be maintained for future
expansion.
F. Copper earth link bar shall be fixed at every joint of the cable tray run.

2.05 CABLE LADDER

A. All cable ladders and accessories installed indoors shall be heavy‐duty epoxy coated electro‐
galvanized mild steel type. All cable ladders installed outdoors shall be heavy‐duty hot dipped
galvanized hot rolled mild steel. Thickness of the mild steel shall not be less than 2 mm.

B. Cable ladder shall have a 150 mm high longitudinal side member for ladders width of 800 mm
or above and 120 mm high longitudinal side member for ladder width less than 800 mm.

C. The rugs shall be at least 50 mm wide, with slots of 25 mm x 10 mm at 25 mm intervals
covering the length of the rungs. The rungs shall be space at 300 mm apart along straight
lengths of the ladder.

D. All nuts, bolts and washers for clips and brackets shall be zinc plated. Each cable ladder shall
be in standard manufacturer’s length and supplied complete with coupling sets consisting of
fishplates, spined bolts, nuts and locking washers.

E. The complete cable ladder installation shall be provided with all necessary proprietary
factory‐made elbows, risers, reducers, tees, crosses, drop‐outs, etc. and any site fabricated
items will not be permitted.

F. Separate flexible earth continuity connectors of at least 16mm2 copper jumpers shall be
installed between the ladder sections.

G. All cables ladders shall be supported from the ceiling concrete slab, steel structures or
sidewalls using a frame system, with overhead hangers, support channels, hanger rods or
angle brackets, beam clams and ceiling brackets.

H. Fixings and supports shall be installed at regular intervals not exceeding 1000 mm and 150
mm from all bends, tees, inter‐sections and risers.

I. When cable ladder is refined to install across structure expansion joints, the ladder shall be in
two sections between supports installed on either side of the expansion joint.
PMC: NSL E33


J. The ladder sections shall than be jointed with expansion joint fishplates, bolts, nuts and
washers installed in elongated holes permitting a lengthwise movement of 25 mm from the
initial fastening position.

K. For cable ladder that are exposed to the weather, a hot‐dip galvanized covers of 1.5mm gauge
steel, flush fixing type with gasket, shall be installed on top of the ladder.

L. Copper earth link bar shall be fixed at every joint of the cable ladder run.

2.06CABLES TRUNKING

A. Cable trunking shall be manufactured from 1.6 mm minimum electro‐
galvanized mild sheet steel to BS4678 finished in oven‐baked electrostatically coated epoxy
power coating with color to the Engineer’s choice.

B. All trunking shall have removable lids extending over their entire lengths. Lids
shall be fixed at interval not exceeding 1 metre by means of brass steel screws which and
protected against corrosion by a finish of zinc coating or equivalent to zinc coating.

C. Factory‐made bends, joints, elbow, riser, tee, reducer and accessories with
same material shall be provided throughout the installation for trunking.

D. Trunking space factor shall be in compliance with latest IS standards.

E. Copper earth link bar shall be fixed at every joint of the cable trunking run.

Note: All items mentioned in this section shall be manufactured to comply with the specifications
of National Electrical Code (NEC) and National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

END OF SECTION
PMC: NSL E34

Electrical: Earthing System Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC
EARTHING SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

A. This section specifies the engineering, supply, installation, testing,
commissioning and setting to work of the complete earthing network for individual earthing
systems, circuit protective conductors and bonding conductors. A complete earthing network
comprising cables, copper tapes, electrodes and earth bonding of all relevant necessary non‐
current carrying metal parts of equipments/ apparatus shall have connected as required.

B. The system shall have a common earthing system as described in the
Specification and as shown on the Drawings. Individual earthing systems shall be provided as
follows as per drawing. Earth main MV/LV/Generator Electrical Earthing shall have 2
connection to the earthing system:
1. MV Electrical Earthing
2. LV Electrical Earthing
3. Generator Earthing
4. ELV Earthing
5. Data Communication Earthing

C. Sufficient numbers of electrodes interconnected by Cooper/ GI (as per BOQ) to form
earthing mat so that the overall earth resistance shall be less than 1 ohm for each individual
earthing mat.

D. The number of earth electrodes of the earthing mat are indicated on the drawings as
minimum. The Contractor shall test the resistivity of soil at site. Exact number of earth
electrodes shall be determined by the Contractor to achieve the earth resistance value subject
to Engineer approval. The complete earthing installation include earth plate, earth mat detail
to achieve the earth resistance value shall be included in the Contract.

E. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer or his representative before driving Plate/ pipe
earthing into the ground so that he may supervise the operation. Driving shall be carried out
only in the presence of the Engineer or the representative and all earthing plates/ pipes shall be
submitted for the examination before use.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. Complete earthing system shall be engineering and constructed in
accordance with the latest revision of the following standards and the appropriate BS/IEC:
1. IS: 3043 : Earthing
2. BS6651 : Lightning Protection System
3. IEC 61024‐1‐2 : Lightning Protection System

PMC: NSL E35

B. The detail of the Earthing System shall also conform to the requirements of
all relevant local codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in
this Specification and Drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the
Engineer.

1.3 SUBMISSION

A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the
respective stages of construction.

B. As minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:
1. Shop Drawings and Sample Submission;
2. Builder’s work requirements;
3. Testing procedures and report format for testing of the earth electrodes and/or earth
strips;
4. Soil resisting test report with calculation report for the details of the earthing system
detail including quantity and layout of earth electrodes and/or earth strips to achieve the
required earth resistance. The report shall be endorsed by the Contractor’s Installation
Engineer who supervise and endorse the installation upon completion;
5. Proposed details of earthing system including quantity and layout of the earth
electrodes and/or earth strips according to the calculation result.

PART 2 – PRODUCT

2.1 GENERAL

A. The resistance between earthing system and the general mass of earth shall not be greater
than 1 ohm.

B. The earth loop resistance to any point in the electrical system shall not be in excess of 0.5
ohms in order to ensure satisfactory operation of protective devices.

C. The resistance to earth shall be measured at the following:‐

1. At each electrical system ground or system neutral ground.
2. At one point on each grounding system used to ground electrical equipment
enclosures.
3. At one point on each grounding system used to ground wiring system enclosures such
as metal conduits and cable sheaths or armoured.

D. All earthing conductors shall be of high conductivity copper/ G.I. as per B.O.Q. and shall
protected against mechanical damage. The cross‐sectional area of earth conductors shall not be
smaller than half that of the largest current carrying conductor. However, the contractor shall
use the sizes specified in the bill of quantities of the Tender.Common earth mats of resistivity of
less than one (1) ohm, shall be constructed below the lowest floor structure prior to any ground
PMC: NSL E36

work construction. The earth mats shall comprise the complete earth electrodes, earth
strips/grids, earth inspection chambers, earth leads, main earth terminals, earth test link boxes
at ground level, etc. Each individual earthing system shall have earth leads connecting its main
earth terminal directly to an earth electrode underground as specified.

E. All earthing products/accessories shall be according to IS standards.

F. The mating surface of all tapes at joints etc shall be cleaned before clamping and all joints
shall be riveted, joint with proper connector or exothermic welded. All connections to electrical
apparatus shall be made by a bolted connection in a visible and accessible position

2.2 PIPE EARTH ELECTRODE

A. G.I. pipe shall be of medium class 100mm dia and 3m in length.

B. G.I. Pipe electrode shall be cut tapered at bottom and provided with holes of 12mm dia
drilled not less than 7.5cm from each other upto 2m of length from bottom.

C. The electrode shall be buried in the ground vertically with its top not less than 20cm below
ground level.

D. Clamping of the earth leads to the earth rod shall be made by earth clamp. The clamps
shall be capable of providing a high pressure contact between the earth rod and the earth leads
to achieve a low contact resistance.

E. When two or more electrodes are driven to form a group, the heads of the electrodes in
the group shall be bonded to each other by means of a 25 mm x 3mm GI/ Copper strip, laid at a
depth of at least 600 mm in soil.

F. All earth electrode penetrations through basement water proofing membranes shall be
provided with manufacturer’s recommended water seal insert sleeve approved by Engineer.
The installation of the water seal insert sleeve shall be under the supervision and endorsed by
the manufacturer’s representative to ensure the installation comply with the manufacturer
installation detail.

2.3 PLATE EARTH ELECTRODE

A. The plate earth electrode shall consist of copper plate or G.I. plate as per item of work.
The plate electrode shall be buried in ground with its faces vertical and top not less than 4.5m
below Ground level. The plate shall be filled with charcoal dust and common salt filling,
extending 15cm around it’s on all sides.
B. A watering pipe of 50mm dia of medium class G.I pipe shall be provided.

C. The top of the pipe shall be provided with a funnel and a G.I. mesh screen for watering the
earth. In the case of pipe electrode a removable plug shall be provided.
PMC: NSL E37


D. The earthing lead from electrode onwards shall be suitably protected from mechanical
injury by a suitable dia medium class G.I. pipe in case of wire and size according to strip size.

E. The overlapping of strips at joints shall done in approved manner
a. GI strips shall be riveted with rivets/ bolted and welded.
b. Copper strips shall be riveted with rivets/ bolted brass nuts, bolts and washers and
brazed.

F. The protection pipe within ground shall be buried at least 30 cm deep (to be increased to
60cm in case of road crossing and pavements).

G. The portion within the building shall be recessed in walls and floors to adequate depth.

H. In the case of plate earth electrode the earthing lead shall be securely bolted to the plate
with two bolts, nuts, check nuts and washers.

I. In case of pipe electrode, it shall be connected by means of a through bolt, nuts and
washers and cable socket.

J. Main earthing conductor is taken from the earth electrode with which the connection is to
be made.

K. No earth pit shall be fixed within 1.5 M of a wall of foundation. The location of the earth
electrode will be such where the soil has reasonable chance of remaining moist. Effort shall be
made to locate them in grass lawns or near flower beds or water taps.

2.4 EARTH INSPECTION CHAMBER

A. Earth electrode shall be fitted with a heavy‐duty precast concrete inspection chamber/pit
complete with heavy‐duty cover as specified on drawings.

B. For earth electrodes located outside or on the apron of the building, earth inspection
chambers shall extend to a depth of not less than 300 mm below finished ground level and kept
free of soil. For earth electrodes located inside building, earth electrodes shall be buried not
less than 100 mm below the floor slab structure. Each earth electrode shall be clearly marked
‘SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH CONNECTION – DO NOT REMOVE.

C. The chamber and cover shall be heavy duty detail to consider the traffic load at the
location of installation. The cover shall be recessed cover to receive the Architectural floor
finish at the location of installation.

2.5 EARTH STRIP

A. Earth strips/grids shall be of bare GI/ Copper strips of 25 mm x 3 mm as specified.
PMC: NSL E38


B. Earth strips shall be riveted or joint with proper connector to earth electrodes underground
below the floor slab structure, and shall be buried not less than 300 mm below the floor slab
structure.

C. In order to minimise the mutual inductance between strips, earth strips shall be positioned
at a distance not less than 6m apart unless otherwise specified.

PART 3 – EARTH BONDING
3.1 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR

A. Circuit protective conductor (CPC) is a system of conductors joining together all exposed
conductive parts and connecting them to the main earth terminal.

B. The purpose of circuit protective conductor is to provide a path for earth fault circuit so
that the protective device will operate to remove dangerous potential differences during a fault
condition.

C. The circuit protective conductors shall take the form of separate cable with a sheath in
green/yellow color or copper tape of minimum size 25mm x 3mm.

D. All exposed non‐current carrying metal parts of light fittings, switchgears, motors,
enclosures, etc. shall be effectively earthed by circuit protective conductors for earth continuity
protection.

E. For equipment where an earth terminal is provided, the earth continuity wire shall be
firmly clamped. Where no earth terminal is provided, the exposed metal part shall be cleaned
of paint and surface rust before welding the earth continuity lead.

F. The minimum size of the principal protective conductors shall be in accordance with to the
current edition of IS: 3043/ BS7671 and BS7430.

G. The external earth terminal on the outside of the end panel of any switchboard shall be
connected to the main earth bar provided in two independent points.

H. Circuit protective conductors shall be provided in electrical and mechanical rooms and
along the routes for the bonding of all exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive
parts. A suitably sized earth terminal shall be provided at each zone of the building for this
purpose.
I. All exposed conductive parts shall be effectively connected in an approved manner to the
principal protective conductors. The circuit protective conductors shall be single core copper
PMC: NSL E39

cables or high conductivity annealed copper tapes specified. Unless otherwise specified, the
minimum cross‐sectional area of the circuit protective conductors shall be selected in
accordance with IS:3043/ BS7671:

END OF SECTION
PMC: NSL E40

Electrical: Panel Boards Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC
PANELBOARDS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. This specification covers the ‘General Requirements’ for the design, manufacture, supply
performance, inspection, testing and commissioning including supply of indoor type low
voltage switch boards up to 1000 V including necessary termination, cabling and bus work
required for satisfactory operation .

B. The Panel boards included, distribution boards and control panels shall be built in
accordance with IEC 439 “Factory Built Assemblies for Low Voltage” or BS 5486 “Factory‐
built Assemblies of Switchgear and Control Gear for Voltage up to and including 1000 AC
and 1200V DC.

C. All factory built assemblies subject to rain or wet conditions or located outside electrical
switch room shall be weatherproof constructed to IP 65, able to withstand high impact
strength of 60 KN/m2 (min.), temperature resistant, flame retardant and corrosion
resistant.

D. Specific requirements shall be in accordance with single line diagram/specification & BOQ.

E. The technical parameters of switchgear equipment’s, transformers etc. shall be referred.

1.2 STANDARDS

A. All equipment, material and components shall comply with the requirements of the latest
editions of Indian Standards with updated amendments. Standards and Regulations
applicable in the area where equipment is to be installed shall also be followed.

B. The equipment offered complying with other standards, these standards shall be equal to
or superior to those specified and full details of the differences shall be furnished along
with the tender.

C. The Panel boards shall be engineered and constructed in accordance with the latest
revision of the following Indian and British standards:

1. IS 13947 : A.C. Circuit Breakers
2. IS 3427 : Metal enclosed Switchgear & Control Gear
3. BS 162 : Safety Clearances
4. IS 2705 : Current Transformers
PMC: NSL E41

5. IS 3156 : Voltage Transformers

6. IS 3202 : Code of Practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment
7. IS 375 : Marking & Arrangement for Switchgear Bus Bars, main
connections and auxiliary wiring.
8. ARE 722 : A.C. Electric Meters
9. IS 1248 : Direct acting Electrical Indicating Instruments
10. IS 3231 : Electrical Relays for Power System Protection
11. IS 2544 : Epoxy Cast Resin Insulators
12. IS 5082 : Electrolytic Copper/ Aluminium
13. IS 5792 : High Voltage HRC fuses
14. BS 88 : Cartridge fuses for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and
1500V DC.
15. BS 89 : Direct acting electrical indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments and their accessories.
16. BS 142 : Electrical protective relays
17. BS 159 : Busbar and Busbar connection
18. BS 1433 : Copper for electrical purposes. Rods and bars.
19. BS EN : Circuit‐breakers for over current protection for household and
60898 similar installations.
20. BS 3938 : Current transformers
21. BS EN : Low‐voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 2 circuit‐
60947‐2 breakers.
22. BS 4794 : Control switches (switching devices, Part 1 including contactor
relays, for control and auxiliary circuits, for voltages up to and
including 1000V AC and 1200V DC). General requirements.
23. BS 5419 : Air‐break switches, air‐break disconnectors, and fuse
combination units for voltages up to and including 1000V AC
and 1200V DC.
24. BS 5420 : Degrees of protection of enclosures of switch Part I great Part I
and control gear for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and
1200V DC.
25. BS 5424 : Control gear for voltages up to and including 1000V AC and
1200V DC – Part 1 Contactors.
26. BS 5486 : Low‐voltage switchgear and control gear Part 1 assemblies.
Part I: Requirement for type tested and partially type tested
assemblies.
27. BS 5685 : Electricity meters – Part I: Class 0.5, 1 and 2 single phase and
PMC: NSL E42

poly phase, single‐rate and multi‐rate watt‐hour meters.
28. BS 5992 : Electrical relays
29. BS 6004 : PVC insulated cables, (non‐armoured), for electric power and
lighting.
30. BS 6231 : PVC insulated cables for switchgear and control gear wiring.
31. IS 3043/ : Earthing
BS7430

D. BS/IEC or IS not mentioned above but are applicable to this installation shall
also apply.

1.3 SUBMISSION

A. Detailed co‐ordination with other services, shop drawings for various electrical layouts
such as equipment layout and earthing layouts, including equipment installation and cable
termination details etc. prior to start of work.

B. Such drawings shall show the proposed method of construction of the cubicles, method of
supporting equipment and Busbar, full details of Busbar layout, method of support,
electrical control wiring diagrams, equipment weight, colors, and surface treatment.

C. The drawings shall also incorporate a full list of proposed materials. The construction shall
not commence until the drawings are approved for construction.

D. Factory and site testing procedures and report formats shall also be included.

E. Preparation of bill of materials for Different Items as mentioned in Schedule of Quantities.

F. Lighting/power panel schedule.

G. Interconnection drawing.

H. Protection co‐ordination drawings/tables for complete power system.
I. Shop inspection and testing procedures.

J. Field testing and commissioning procedures.

K. Preparation of as built drawings for the services the contractor is rendering.

Any other work/activity which is not listed above; however is necessary for completeness of
electrical system.

PMC: NSL E43

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PANEL BOARD

A. The switch boards shall be cubicle type, suitable for indoor installation, floor mounting and
free standing. The design shall be totally enclosed, dust ‐ tight, damp‐proof and vermin proof
offering degree of protection not less than IP‐42.

B. Separate segregated compartments shall be provided for circuit breakers, bus bars, cable box,
voltage transformers, wire ways, relays, and instrument and control devices. Switchgear
cubicles/ modules shall be provided with hinged doors in front with facility for padlocking door
handles.

C. Vent openings shall be covered with grills so arranged that hot gases cannot be discharged
through them in a manner that can injure the operating personnel. These vent openings shall
be vermin proof.

D. All panels shall be of same height, width and depth. Panels shall be bolted together to form a
continuous flush front switch board, suitable for front of board operation.

E. The switchgear cubicles shall be rigid and robust in design and construction, fabricated out of
CRCA sheet steel. Cubicles shall be made from rigid welded structural frames made of
structural steel sections or of pressed/formed sheet steel of not less than 3mm thickness. The
frames shall be enclosed by sheet steel of at least 2mm thickness, smoothly finished, leveled
and free from flaws. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever necessary.

F. All doors, panels, removable covers shall be provided with non deteriorating (neoprene)
gaskets all around the perimeter.

G. All doors shall be removable and supported by concealed type hinges. The hinges shall be
strong and braced to ensure freedom from sagging, bending and general distortion of panel or
hinged part.

H. Floor mounted cubicles shall be provided with a 75mm high channel base frame. The total
height of the cubicle shall not exceed 2400mm, keeping in view the operating height of top
switch should not exceed 1750mm from FFL including base channel.

2.2 BUSBARS & BUSBAR CHAMBER

A. Three phase bus bars shall be of high conductivity electrolytic Aluminium as stated in B.O.Q.

B. The bus bars shall be air insulated and housed in a separate compartment, segregated from all
other compartments.

PMC: NSL E44

C. Bus bars & bus bar connections shall be of uniform cross section shall be suitable for carrying
rated current continuously and short circuit current for specified duration without
overheating. The bus bars connections shall be adequately supported on insulators to
withstand dynamic stresses due to short circuit current specified. Normal operating
temperature for bus bars shall be 85 Deg C. Short circuit rating of the bus bars shall be 20 to
50 KA for 1 sec as per BOQ.

D. All bus bar joints and bus tap joints shall be silver or tin plated. Joints shall be bolted type and
shall be insulated. Spring/Lock washers shall be provided to ensure good contact on the joints.

E. Direct access to accidental contact with bus bars and primary connections shall be avoided by
providing shrouds. All apertures and slots shall be protected by barriers to prevent accidental
shorting of bus bars. To provide a tight seal between cubicles, bushings or insulating panels
shall be provided for bus bars crossing from one cubicle into another.

F. All insulating materials used shall be non‐hygroscopic and shall be treated for preventing
fungus growth. Surface of insulators shall be highly glazed and treated with silicone
compounds to minimize accumulation of dust, condensation and tracking.

G. All bus bars shall be color coded as per IS:‐375.

2.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTs)

A. Current transformers shall be of suitable ratio, burden & class/accuracy as specified in Single
Line Diagram.

B. Current transformers shall conform to latest edition to relevant standards. The Current
transformers shall be epoxy resin cast with bar Primary or ring type.

C. The design and construction shall be sufficiently robust to withstand thermal and dynamic
stresses due to the maximum short circuit current of the circuit.

D. The current transformer shall preferably be capable of being left open circuited on the
secondary side with primary carrying rated full load current, without overheating or damage.
Short time current rating and rated withstand time shall be same as corresponding C.B.

E. CT core laminations shall be of high grade silicon steel.

F. Secondary terminals of CT shall be brought out to a terminal block which will be easily
accessible for testing and external connections. Facility shall be provided for short circuiting
and earthing of CT secondary leads through a removable and accessible link with provision for
attaching test link.

G. Rating plate details and terminal markings shall be according to the latest edition of relevant
Indian Standard specification.
PMC: NSL E45


H. Current transformers (core) shall be used for metering and protection.

2.4 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS (PTs)

A. Potential Transformers shall conform to latest edition of relevant standards.

B. Potential transformers shall be dry, cast epoxy resin type. The PTs shall be of single phase
construction.

C. The PTs shall be capable of operating continuously at 110% of the rated voltage without any
damage. When star ‐ star connection is required in non‐effectively or ungrounded system, the
PTs shall be suitable for continuous operation with a persistent phase to ground fault.

D. Maximum temperature rise of the transformer at rated burden and with rated primary voltage
and frequency shall not exceed 40 Dig’s above an ambient of 45 Dig’s.

E. HRC Fuses shall be provided secondary side. It shall be possible to replace PT fuses easily
without having to de‐energies the main bus bars. Prospective interrupting current rating of the
fuses shall be same as the system fault level.

F. Voltage transformer ratio, output and class shall be as specified in the drawing & BOQ. Name
plate as per relevant standards shall be provided on the PT.

2.5 PROTECTIVE RELAYS

A. Relays type and numbers shall be in accordance with the protective scheme specified or as per
drawings and B.O.Q.

B. Relays shall be enclosed in rectangular shaped cases, suitable for flush mounting only, dust
tight covers projecting from the front cover panel. The case shall be dust tight, damp proof and
tropicalised.

C. Relays shall be accessible for setting from the front. Access to setting devices shall be possible
only after removal of front cover.

D. Protective relays shall be draw out type. Where it is not possible to provide protective relays of
the draw out pattern, fixed type relays with facilities for plugging in a portable test plug shall
be provided. Necessary test plugs shall be furnished along with the relays.

E. Relays shall be provided with positive action self reset type with indicator. The indicator/s shall
be visible from the front.

F. Relays conform to relevant standards in all respects.

PMC: NSL E46

G. Relays shall be provided with minimum two pairs of self or hand reset type contacts as
specified. Auxiliary relays shall have the number of NO and NC contacts as specified in data
sheet.

2.6 SAFETY/ PROTECTION & INTERLOCKS/FEATURES

Following interlocks and features shall be incorporated for equipment protection and
personnel safety under mal‐operation. No deviations on these interlocks and safety features
are allowed. These interlocks and safety features shall be fail‐safe, positive and full‐proof.

A. It shall not be possible to plug‐in or isolate a closed circuit breaker. An attempt to do so shall
trip the breaker. (In case of breakers with vertical isolation, this will apply to raising and
lowering). There shall be a positive locking facility to prevent closing of circuit unless it is in
Service or Test position.

B. Closing and opening operations shall be possible only in discrete, well defined Test and Service
positions and not in any position midway. An extension adapter cable with plugs and sockets
shall be preferably be provided so that the closing and opening operation of the circuit breaker
can be done in fully withdrawn position outside the cable.

C. Slow operation of circuit breakers shall be possible only in the circuit breaker in Test or
Isolated position.

D. Isolating switches if provided shall be interlocked with respective circuit breakers to prevent
them making or breaking the current.

E. 1 no. bus earthing truck shall be supplied with each panel to earth the out going cable of the
VCB breaker.

F. Automatic safety shutters for all openings which will lead to access to the live parts of the
switchgear upon withdrawal or any operation the switchgear components/parts shall be
provided, preferably with a padlocking facility.

G. Spring of motor operated spring charged mechanism shall not discharge until they are fully
charged and charging means are fully disconnected.

H. Where key interlocking is employed, tripping of a closed circuit breaker shall not occur if any
attempt is made to remove the trapped key from the mechanism.

I. Any other interlocks which manufacturer may deem to be required for safety and specifically
specified separately required for the system shall be included.

J. All terminals, connections which may be live and exposed for accidental contact shall be
adequately shrouded.

PMC: NSL E47

K. Components within cubicles shall be properly labeled to facilitate testing.

2.7 EARTHING

A. The switch board shall be provided at the bottom throughout its entire length with an earth
bus of copper of adequate size to carry the fault current for the duration same as short time
rating of the circuit breaker. Earth bus shall have two earthing connection facility at its both
ends of earthing conductor.

B. All non‐current carrying metal parts, frames and equipment mounted in the switch board shall
be bonded to earth bus.

C. Earthing of moving carriage of draw out equipment shall be achieved by scraping earthing
device. The earthing device shall maintain positive earth continuity in all Service Test and
Isolated positions.

D. It shall be possible to connect each circuit or set of three phase bus bars to earth either
through earthing trucks or through the circuit breakers.

E. One earthing trolley suitable for earthing of cables & bus bars for all circuit breakers of the
same type/rating shall be provided.

2.8 INSTRUMENT & METERS

A. Electrical indicating instruments shall be digital type with zero adjustment, probe from outside
the cover.

B. Multi function meter of CL 1.0 accuracy with RS 485 port shall be provided.

C. Instruments/meters shall be suitable for flush mounting on the panel with flanges protecting
outside the panel.

D. All meters shall be industrial grade with accuracy of class 1.0 unless specifically indicated.

2.9 CONTROL WIRING

A. All wiring for control, protection, alarm and indicating circuits on all equipment shall be carried
out with at least 650V grade, PVC insulated, stranded, copper, 1.5 Sq.mm conductors.

B. All wiring shall be run on the sides of the panels and shall be neatly bunched and cleared
without affecting access to equipment mounted in the panel. Where wiring enters or passes
through compartments containing HT apparatus then they shall be in earthed metallic
conduits or ducts.

C. All wiring shall be taken to terminal blocks without joints or tees in their run.
PMC: NSL E48


D. All wiring shall be color coded as follows:

 Instrument Transformer AC circuit ‐ Red, Yellow & Blue determined by
the Phase with which the wire is associated.
 AC Phase Wire ‐ White
 AC Neutral ‐ Black
 DC Circuits ‐ Grey
 Earth connections ‐ Green

E. Engraved core identification ferrules, marked to correspond with the wiring diagram shall be
fitted to each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wires, without falling off when wire is
removed. Ferrules shall be of white color with black lettering. Each wire shall be identified by
letter to denote its function followed by a number to denote its identity at both ends.

F. All wiring for external connections shall be brought out to individual terminals on a readily
accessible terminal block.

G. All unused auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker and relays shall be wired up to terminal
block.

2.10 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Indicating Lamps

1. LED type indicating lamps shall be provided everywhere except where low voltage
filament type with series resistor called for.

2. Lamp covers shall be provided with interchangeable colored lenses of Perspex or
equivalent unbreakable material. The lenses shall not discolor in course of time due to
heat of the lamp.

3. Bulbs and lenses shall be interchangeable and replaceable from the front.

4. Following colors shall be used for the function indicated:

Red ‐ Circuit Breaker ‘ON’
Green ‐ Circuit Breaker ‘OFF’
White ‐ Continuous trip supply supervision
Amber ‐ Auto trip
Blue ‐ Spring charged
R.Y.B ‐ Potential indication

B. Push Buttons

PMC: NSL E49
1. All push buttons shall be push to actuate the contact type.

2. Start & Stop push buttons shall be colored green and red respectively. Reset push
buttons shall be yellow in color and test push buttons shall be blue in color. All other push
buttons shall be black in color.

3. Emergency stop push buttons shall be lockable in the operated position, i.e. push to
operate and key to release type. Push buttons for emergency stop shall be
recessed/shrouded type to avoid accidental operation.

C. Control & Selector Switches

1. Control and Selector switches shall be of rotary type, having enclosed contacts
accessible only after removal of cover.

2. All control and selector switches for circuit breakers and instruments shall be mounted
on the front of the panel. Control switches for space heater/s and control supplies shall be
mounted inside the panel.

3. Circuit Breaker control switches shall be provided with pistol grip handles. Selector
switches shall be provided with round, knurled handles. All handles shall be black in color.
Properly designated escutcheon plates clearly marked to show the operating positions shall
be provided on all switches.

4. Circuit breaker control switches shall normally have three position close ‐ Normal ‐ Trip
with spring return to normal position. Switch operating mechanism shall prevent the
switch from being operated twice successively in the same direction. Circuit breaker
control switch shall have one NO‐NC contact along with other contacts as required.

5. All other instruments and selector switches shall have stay put contacts.

6. Contacts of all control and selector switches shall be rated for 10 Amps at 240V AC or
20 Amps at 220V dc (inductive break). Switch for space heater supply and control voltage
supply shall normally be two pole rated for 25A A.C.

D. Control Terminal Blocks

1. Box ‐ clamp type, 650V grade line up terminals of minimum 2.5 Sq.mm size shall be
provided. Connection to terminals shall be from front.

2. Not more than one wire on each side shall be connected on any terminal. Where
duplication of terminals block/s is necessary, suitable solid bonding links shall be
incorporated.

PMC: NSL E50

3. Terminal blocks at different voltage shall be segregated into groups and distinctly
labeled.

4. Current transformer secondary leads shall be brought to terminal blocks having facility
for short circuiting and grounding the secondary.

5. Terminals shall be numbered for identification and grouped according to function.
Engraved back on white PVC labels shall be provided on the terminal blocks describing the
function of the circuit.

6. Separate terminal stems shall be provided for internal and external wiring.

7. Control terminal blocks shall be so located that control cables are fully segregated from
power cables. Suitable insulated or earthed metal race ways shall be provided for control
wiring. Separate unrolled removable gland plate shall be provided for the control cables at
the bottom of each panel.

8. Minimum 10% of total number spare terminals shall be provided for future use.

2.11 NAME PLATES AND LABELS

A. One Name plate giving designation of the MV switchboard shall be affixed prominently
on top of the switch board. Details of designation will be specified.

B. Labels giving following details shall be affixed on each feeder panel:

i. Feeder No.
ii. Equipment reference no. & Description
iii. Rating (HP/KW/KVA/Amp.)

C. All components whether mounted inside or on the door shall be permanently and
clearly labeled with reference number/letter or their function. Rating of fuse shall be part
of fuse designation. Paper labels, stickers or labels fixed with adhesives are not acceptable.
All labels shall be properly fixed by screws with provision to prevent distortion due to
expansion.

D. All labels shall be non‐corroding, preferably laminated plastic or rear engraved Perspex
with white letters on black background.

E. Labels for feeder panel designation fixed on front side shall be fitted with chrome
plated, self tapping, and counter sunk head screws. These labels shall be of identical size
to permit interchange.

2.12 SPACE HEATERS

PMC: NSL E51

A. Adequately rated anti‐condensation space heaters shall be provided in each cubicle.

B. Space heater/s shall be trip type, rated with operation voltage of 240V, 50 Hz. AC supply.

C. Each space heater shall be complete with a 2P MCB, 10KA and a control thermostat.

D. The space heater shall be rated for maintaining the panel inside temperature 10 Deg.C above
outside ambient temperature.

2.13 CUBICLE LIGHTING

A. Each cubicle shall be provided with interior lighting by means of CFL light fixture. An
ON/OFF switch/door switch shall be provided. The lighting fixture shall be suitable for
operation from a 240V single phase, 50 Hz. A.C. supplies.

2.14 AUXILIARY SUPPLY

A. Auxiliary supply for control, indication, space heater etc. shall be made available at one
point on the switch board. Vendor shall provide suitable auxiliary supply in the switch
board.

2.15 FUSES

A. Fuses shall be HRC cartridge link type (Diazed Fuses are not acceptable) and shall be provided
with operation indicator which shall be visible without removal of fuses from service.

B. Fuses shall be pressure fitted type and shall preferably have ribs on the contact blades to
ensure good line contact.

C. It shall be possible to handle fuses during off load conditions with full voltage available on the
terminals. Wherever required fuse pullers shall be provide. The fuse bases shall be so located
in the modules to permit insertion of fuse pullers and removal of fuse links without any
problems.

D. Mounting of fuse fitting shall ensure adequate dissipation of heat generated and shall facilitate
inspection and easy replacement of fuse.

2.16 CONTACTORS

A. The contactors shall be air break type, equipped with three main contacts and minimum 2
NO + 2 NC auxiliary contacts. The main contacts of a particular contactor shall have AC 3
ratings for unidirectional motors & AC 4 for reversible motors.

B. The auxiliary contacts shall be rated for minimum 5 Amps at 240V AC and 1.3 Amps at
110V DC (Inductive load).
PMC: NSL E52


C. Unless specified otherwise, the coil of the contactor shall be suitable for operation on
240V, + 10% and – 15% 1 PH, AC supply. The contactor drop off voltage shall be between
15% to 65% of the rated coil voltage.

2.17 SINGLE PHASING PREVENTOR (SPP)

A. Unless specified otherwise SPPs shall be provided in all motor starter modules with
contactor rating of 200 Amps and above. The SPP shall be of the current operated type and
shall operate on the principle of sensing negative sequence component of current.

B. In case of single phasing, the SPP shall operate after a time delay of 2 to 3 secs. The
relay shall be of the hand reset type and visual indication of the relay operation shall be
available.

C. The SPP shall be suitable for protection of the non‐reversible and reversible motors.
The relay operation shall be independent of the loading and RPM of the motor prior to the
occurrence of single phasing.

2.18 CABLE TERMINATION

A. The switch board panel shall be complete with suitable cable end termination for XLPE
insulated cables. Cable and sealing box shall preferably be mounted inside the panel. For XLPE
cables adequate space and clearances shall be made for heat shrinkable termination e.g.
Raychem or cold flowing stress grading joints.

B. Two earthing terminals shall be provided in each panel in cable box/cabling chamber for
earthing armour/screen.

C. Where more than one core is terminated on each phase, links suitably designed and properly
supported shall be provided to avoid unnecessary bending of cable cores without decreasing
the length of insulated cable tail. Electrical clearances which would normally be required
when using one core per phase shall be maintained.

D. Where core balance type current transformers are provided on switchgear feeder circuit
cable/s for earth fault protection sufficient space, clearance and support, mounting
arrangement shall be provided for the CT.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

PMC: NSL E53

A. All panel boards shall be inspected & tested in the presence of Owner/ Consultant’s
representative and certified by the installation Engineer that it is safe before supply is
energized, and that all the equipment comply with the requirements of the Specification.

B. Generally such tests in the factory and repeated at site are as follows:

1. All routine tests specified in relevant Indian/British Standards shall be carried out on all
circuit breakers.
2. Test for protective relay operation by secondary injection method.
3. Operation of all meters.
4. Secondary wiring continuity test
5. Insulation test with 1000 Volts mugger, before and after voltage test.
6. HV test on secondary wiring and components on which such test is permissible (2 KV
for one minute)
7. Simulating external circuits for remote operation of breaker, remote indicating lights
and other remote operations, if any.
8. Measurement of power required for closing/trip coil of the breaker.
9. Pick up and drop out voltages for shunt trip and closing coils.
10. CT Polarity test.
11. Power frequency voltage withstand test.
12. Earth continuity tests;
13. Check of clearance and creep age distances;
14. Tests to prove correct operation of controls, interlocks, tripping and closing circuits,
indications, etc.;
15. Interfacing test with BMS control function
16. All other tests required by the Engineer to verify compliance with the Specification.

C. Triplicate sets of all principal test records and test certificates are to be supplied for all the
tests carried out in accordance with the Specification to the Engineer for approval before
dispatch from the factory.

D. All costs, materials, equipment, labour, etc. necessary for the execution of the testing shall be
included in this portion of work.

3.2 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION

A. The Vendor shall furnish following drawings/documents in accordance with enclosed
requirements:

1. General Arrangement drawing of the Switchboard, showing front view, plan,
foundation plan, floor cut‐outs/trenches for external cables and elevations, transport
sections and weights.

PMC: NSL E54

2. Sectional drawings of the circuit breaker panels, showing general constructional
features, mounting details of various devices, bus bars, current transformers, cable boxes,
terminal boxes for control cables etc.

3. Schematic and control wiring diagram for circuit breaker and protection including
indicating devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc.

4. Terminal plans showing terminal numbers, ferrules markings, device terminal numbers,
function etc.

5. Relay wiring diagrams.

6. Equipment List.

B. Vendor shall furnish required number of copies of above drawings for Purchaser’s review,
fabrication of switch boards shall start only after Purchaser’s clearance for the same. After
final review, required number of copies and reproducible shall be furnished as final certified
drawings.

C. The information furnished shall include the following:

1. Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.

2. Erection, Operation and Maintenance Manual complete with all relevant information,
drawings and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories, characteristics curves for
relays etc.

3. A comprehensive spare parts catalogue.

3.3 TOOLS

A. One complete set of all special or non‐standard tools required for installation, operation
and maintenance of the switch board shall be provided. The manufacturer shall provide a
list of such tools individually priced with his quotation.

3.4 SPARES

A. The manufacturer/tendered shall also supply a complete list of commissioning spares and
tools. The same shall be included in the bid price. No extra payment shall be made on
account of non‐availability of spares during commissioning.

3.5 TRANSPORTATION

A. Panel boards are not allowed to be delivered to site until the electrical room or switch room is
in a clean and acceptable condition with lockable doors.
PMC: NSL E55


B. Panel boards, transported to site shall be fully covered with weatherproof covers and
transportation eye bolts shall be provided for handling at site.

C. Panel boards, which are poorly packed and result in signs of corrosion, will be rejected.

D. All necessary measures to cover and protect the panel boards at site shall be provided. Such
measures shall include a complete PVC blanket over the whole panel boards.

3.6 REJECTION OF PANELBOARDS

A. Deviation from specification must be stated in writing at the quotation stage.

B. In absence of such statement, it will be assumed that the requirements of the specifications
are met without expectation.

C. If any of the above tests fail to comply with the requirements of this Specification in any
respect whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at site, the
Engineer may reject the item or defective component thereof, whichever is considered
necessary, and after adjustment or modification as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall submit that item for further inspection and/or test. In the event of the defective item
being of such nature that the requirements of this Specification cannot be fulfilled by
adjustment or modification, such item is to be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense,
to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Delivery of panel boards on site without significant
cable connection (Say 80%) shall not entitle progress payment certified for material delivery on
site.

END OF SECTION

PMC: NSL E56

Electrical: Wires & Cables Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC
WIRES AND CABLES

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The design manufacture, testing and supply of single core PVC insulated 1.1 KV grade stranded
twisted wires under this specifications shall comply with latest edition of following standards.

 IS‐3961: Current rating for cables.
 IS‐5831: PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
 IS‐694: PVC insulated cables for working voltage up to and including 1100 volts.
 IEC‐54 (I): PVC insulated cable.

B. Copper/Aluminium stranded twisted conductor PVC insulated wires shall be used in conduit as
per item of work. Aluminium for power cables and copper for control cables shall be used.

C. The wires shall be colour coded R Y B, for phases, Black for neutral and Green for earth.

D. Progressive automatic in line indelible, legible and sequential marking of the length of cable in
meters at every one‐meter shall be provided on the outer sheath of cable.

E. The design, manufacture, testing and supply of the cable under this specifications shall comply
with latest edition of following standards:

 IS: 8130: Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
 IS: 5831: HRPVC/HR PVC insulation and LSZH sheath of electric cables.
 IS: 3975: Mild steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring cables.
 IS: 3961: Current rating of cables.

F. The routing and the minimum rated current carrying capacity of the LV power cables shall be
as indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall consider the manufacturer data and
engineering the cable sizing to ensure it suit the conditions, viz grouping, ambient temperature
etc., and for making any necessary adjustment to the Engineer’s approval.

G. All LV cables for normal power/control circuitries within buildings shall be copper conductor
with XLPE insulated and PVC sheathed, denoted as XLPE/PVC cable or copper conductor with
PVC insulated, denoted as PVC cable as specified.
PMC: NSL E57


H. All LV cables for emergency power circuitries serving emergency lightings, Building
Management System (BMS), Fire Protection System, Security Systems, emergency
communication systems, and sump pump system and fire lifts etc. with back‐up from standby
generator sets or UPS systems or incoming and outgoing from the Emergency Main
Switchboard shall be fire resistant cables as required.

I. Cablings in service ducts, open trenches, direct‐laid underground in soil shall be by means of
armoured cables. Non‐armoured cables shall be laid in conduits, trunkings or tray/ladder for
mechanical protection.

4.02 STANDARDS

A. Complete cabling shall be manufactured and constructed in accordance with the latest revision
of the following standards :

1. IS: 694 : HRPVC/XLPE insulated (heavy duty) electric cables
for working voltage up to and including 1100 volts.
2. IS: 424‐ : Power cable‐flammability test.
1475(F‐3)
3. IS: 7098(I) : Specification for cross‐linked polyethylene insulated
LSZHPVC sheathed cable for working voltage up to
1.1 KV.
4. IS: 1554 : Specification for PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric
cables for working voltages up to and including
1100 volts.
5. ASTM‐D: : Standard method for measuring the minimum
2863 oxygen concentration to support candle‐like
combustion of plastics (Oxygen Index).
6. ASTM‐D: : Standard test method for measuring the density of
2843 smoke from the burning or decomposition.
7. IEEE: 383 : Standard for type of tests Class‐IE, Electric cables,
field splices and connections for power generation
station.
8. ASTME: : Standard test method for specific optical density of
662/ IEC: smoke generated by solid materials
754(x)
9. IS: 10418 : Cable drums.

PMC: NSL E58

10 IS‐10810 : Testing method of cable.

11. IS‐6121 : Cable glands.
12. IS‐9537 : Rigid steel conduit.

B. The manufacturing of the cable shall also conform to the requirements of all relevant local
codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in this Specification
and Drawings, whichever is the more stringent and acceptable to the Engineer.

C. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the following
precedence:
3. Drawings;
4. Specification;
5. International standards and requirements.

4.03 SUBMISSION

A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages of
construction.

B. As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:
1. Equipment submission with manufacturer’s data
2. Sample submission
3. Shop Drawings of the cable routings showing the co‐ordinated routing of cables,
arrangement on cable trays, methods of fixing of cable trays and cables, etc. All conduits
including concealed conduit routing drawings shall also be included
4. Cable test reports and IS Certification
5. Builder’s works requirement
6. Cable schedule indicate the following data include:
a. Cable code and type and installation method
b. Cable feed from and serve to
c. Cable route length and voltage drop
d. Cable capacity and
e. Upstream protection breaker rating
The cable schedule shall be prepare in according to the cable manufacturer’s data..

PART 2 – PRODUCT

PMC: NSL E59

2.01LV CABLES

1. The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches conduits and under‐
ground buried installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of flooding by water.
2. They shall be designed to withstand all mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses
under steady state and transient operating condition.
3. The aluminium/copper wires used for manufacturing the cables shall be true
circular/sector in shape before stranding and shall be of uniformly good quality, free from
defects. The conductor used in manufacture of the cable shall be of H2 grade.
4. The cable should withstand 2.5 KA for 1 Sec. with insulation armour insulated at one
end. Bidder shall furnish calculation in support of capability to withstand the earth fault
currents. The current carrying capacity of armour and screen (as applicable) shall not be
less than the earth fault current values and duration.
5. The fillers and inner sheath shall be of non‐hygroscopic fire retardant materials and
shall be suitable for the operating temperature of the cable. Filler and inner sheath shall
not stick to insulation and outer sheath.
6. Progressive automatic in line indelible, legible and sequential marking of the length of
the cable in metres at every one metres shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables
and at every 5 metre ‘LSZH marking in case of ‘LSZH cables.
7. Strip/Wire armouring following method (b) mentioned in IS: 3975 shall only be
acceptable. For single core cable aluminium wire armouring shall be used.
8. Allowable tolerance on the overall diameter of the cables shall be + 2mm.
9. The normal current rating of all HRPVC/XLPE insulated cables shall be as per IS: 3961.
10. A distinct inner sheath shall be provided by pressure extrusion process for all multicore
armoured and unarmoured cables as per IS: 5831.
11. Outer sheath shall be provided by extrusion process as per IS: 5031.
12. The breaking load of armour joint shall not be less than 95% of that armour wire. Zinc
rich paint shall be applied on armoured joint surface.
13. In plant repairs to the cables shall not be accepted.
14. All the cables shall be supplied in non‐returnable drums as per IS: 10418.
15. In Case of LSZH Cables
 The outer sheath of cables shall have an oxygen index of not less than 29 as per
ASIMD : 2863.
 The maximum acid gas generation by weight as per IEC:754 (i) shall not be more
than 20% for outer sheath material of all cables. Bidder shall also guarantee the
maximum theoretical acid gas generation with 20% by weight of outer sheath.
 The cables outer sheath shall meet the requirement of light transmission of 40%
(minimum and shall be tested as per ISTMD:2843). In case the test for light
transmission is conducted as per ASTME:662. The bidder shall furnish smoke density
values as per this standard and shall co‐relate the anticipated light transmission when
tested as per ASTMD:2843.
 The cable shall pass the fire resistance test as per SS:42, 41, 475 (I) and
flammability test as per EEE:383.

PMC: NSL E60

A. Inspection:
All cables shall be inspected on receipt of the same at site and checked for any damage
during transit.

B. Joints in Cables:
The contractor shall take care that the cables received at site are distributed to various
locations in such a manner as to ensure maximum utilization and avoidance of cable
jointing. Cable shall be rechecked before cutting in lengths, where the joints are
unavoidable, and the location of such joints shall be got approved from the
Owner/Consultant. The joints shall be done by qualified jointer strictly in accordance with
manufacturer’s instruction/drawings.

C. Joint Boxes for Cables:
The cable joint boxes shall be of appropriate size suitable for type of cable of particular
voltage rating.

D. Cable Joints:
1. All cable joints shall be made in suitable, approved cable joints boxes, on the jointing of
cables in the joint box and the filling in of compound shall be done in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions and in an approved manner. All straight through joints shall be
done in epoxy mould boxes with epoxy resins. Straight through joints shall not be
permitted unless the length of run is in excess of cable drum.
2. End terminations of cables more than 1.1 KV grade shall be done with epoxy mould
boxed and epoxy resin. Cable glands shall be 1.1KV grade double compression type and
made to tin plated heavy‐duty brass casting and machine finished. Glands shall be of
robust construction capable of clamping cable and cable armour, firmly without injury of
cable.
3. All washers and hardware shall be made of brass tinned. Rubber components used in
the glands shall be made of neoprene of tested quality.
4. Cable lugs shall be tinned copper/aluminium solder less crimping type conforming to IS:
8309 suitable for aluminium or copper conductor.
5. Crimping of terminals shall be done by using Corrosion inhibitory compound, with
crimping tool.
6. Fire resistant paint has to be applied 1 Meter on either side of cable joint.
7. The contractor shall liaise fully with all other contractors to achieve an efficient and
properly coordinated installation where equipment has to be re‐positioned due to lack of
site liaison; no extra cost shall be incurred by the client.

2.01H.T. CABLE (XLPE) (33 KV)

A. The cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) cable shall be aluminium conductor PVC outer sheath
steel strip armoured over inner sheath construction. XLPE cable shall conform to testing in
accordance with IS:7098 (Part‐I) 1977 and (Part‐II) 1973. The screaning shall be done on
PMC: NSL E61

individual cover. The armouring applied over the common covering shall be flat steel wires.
Each and every length of cable shall be subjected to routine test.

B. The termination and jointing techniques for XLPE cables shall be by using heat shrinkable or
push on cable jointing kits.

C. While laying underground cables in ducts care should be taken so that any underground
structures such as water pipes, sewerage lines etc. are not damaged. Any telephone or other
cable coming in the way shall be properly protected as per instructions of the Engineer‐in‐
charge. The H.T. cable shall be laid at least 1200mm for cable upto 33 KV(E) below the ground
level in a trench 450mm wide.

D. After laying and jointing work is completed a high POT test shall be performed in presence of
Engineer and test results submitted for approval in order to ensure that they have not been
damaged during or after the laying operation. In case, the test results are unsatisfactory, the
cost of all repairs and replacement and all extra work of removal and relaying will be made
good by the contractor without any extra cost.

Note: All other procedure will be followed as per L.T. cables.

PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION OF CABLES
A. Notwithstanding the cable routes indicated on the Drawings the Contractor shall be entirely
responsible for the supply of correct lengths of the cables to be installed and for all allowances
for connecting and terminating the cables to the switchgears and transformers respectively

B. The Contractor shall submit proposed cable routes including details of supports for the cables
for approval before installation. The cable shall not be run in places other than corridor,
passageway, electrical riser or other designated areas subject to the Engineer’s approval. The
cost of support shall be deemed to have included in the Contract.

3.02 CABLE PULLING

A. Winching of cables through ducts/pipes shall only be carried out with the approval of the
Engineer in which event a pulley eye shall be attached to the conductors. Cable shall be run in
neat and orderly manner to allow space for future cabling and maintenance and under no
circumstances and cable shall be run diagonally across a room, cable basement, corridor, etc.

B. A cable sheath stocking may be employed or cables where no undue stress in the sheath is
likely to occur.

PMC: NSL E62

C. Care shall be taken to ensure that the draw strain is applied to the armouring and protected
during drawing against damage.

3.03 CABLE LAYING

A. The cable drum shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. Great care shall be
exercised in laying cables to avoid forming links. At all changes in directions in horizontal &
vertical places, the cable shall be bent with a radius of bend not less than 8 times the diameter
of cable.

B. The cable of 1.1KV grade shall be laid not less than 750mm below ground level in a 375mm
wide trench (throughout), where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench, the
width of the trench shall be increased such that the interaxial spacing between the cables
except where otherwise specified shall at least be 150mm minimum or as per site
requirements or as approved by the Engineer‐in‐charge. Where single core cables are used in
multiphase systems, the cables shall be installed in trefoil where possible.

C. In case the cables are laid in vertical formation due to unavoidable circumstance the depth per
tier shall be increased by 200mm (minimum). Cable shall be laid in reasonably straight line,
where a change in direction takes place a suitable curvature shall be i.e. either 20 times the dia
meter of the cable or the radius of the bend shall not be less than twice the diameter of the
cable drum or whichever is less. Minimum 3 meter long loop shall be provided at both sides of
every straight through joint & 3 meters at each end of cable or as directed at site.

D. Greater care shall be exercised in handling the cable in order to avoid forming ‘Kinks’. The
cable drum shall in‐verbally conveyed on wheels and the cable unrolled in right direction as
indicated on the drum by the manufacturer. The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench
steadily and uniformly without jerks and strains.

E. Cables laid in trenches in single tier formation, 10 cms. allaround sand cushioning be provided
below and above the cable before a protective cover is laid. For every additional vertical tier.
The 30cm of sand cushion be provided over the initial tier. The cable shall be protected by 2nd
class bricks of size not less than 230x115x75mm, stone tiles/RCC curved channel be placed on
top of the sand breadth wise for the full length of the cable and where more than one cable is
to be laid in the same trench the brick shall cover all cables and project at least 8 cms. over the
outer sides of the end cables.

F. Filling of trenches shall be done after the sand cushioning and laying of tilesor bricks are
carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer‐in‐charge (Refer drawing). Back fill for trenches
shall be filled in layer not exceeding 150 mm. Each layer shall be properly rammed &
consolidate before laying the next layer.

G. PVC pipe shall be provided for all road crossing. The size of the pipe shall be according to the
cable and a minimum 100mm dia. pipe shall be provided. The pipe shall be laid in ground with
special arrangement and shall be cement jointed and concreting with 1:5:10 shall be made
PMC: NSL E63

as per relevant IS with latest amendment. Nothing extra shall be paid on this account.
Location of cables laid directly underground shall be indicated by cable marker at an
interval of 30 meters & with change of direction. Aluminium strip cable tag of 20mm wide
with engraved tag no. shall be provided at both ends of cable.

H. Where the cables are to be laid in ducts (pucca trenches) in side the building, they will have to
be laid on MS rack/ on MS cable trays grouted in walls trenches. Cables sizing through floors
shall be protected from mechanical damage by a steel channel to a height of one meter above
the floor where cable pass through wall they shall be sleeved with PVC/steel conduit.

I. Where the cables are laid in open (in building) along walls, ceiling or above false‐ceiling, cable
rack (ladder type) or cable tray shall be provided. The size of the cable tray or rack shall
depend on the number of cables to pass over that rack. Cable tray/rack shall be properly
supported through wall/ceiling according to the site conditions. Cable laid on tray & riser shall
be neatly dressed &clamped at an interval of 1000 mm & 750mm for horizontal & vertical
cable run respectively either side at each bend of cable. All power cables shall be clamped
individually & control cables shall be clamped in groups of three or four cables. Clamps for
multicore cables shall be fabricated of 25x3 GI flats. Single core power cable shall be laid in
trefoil formation & clamped with trefoil clamps made of PVC/fibre glass.

J. Cable openings in wall/floor shall be sealed by the contractor suitably by hession tape &
bitumen compound or by any other proven to prevent ingress of water.

K. After the cables are laid, shall be tested as per IS and the results submitted to
Architects/Engineer and in case the results found unsatisfactory, all the repairing/ replacing of
cables will be done by the contractor free of charge.

3.04 INTERNAL WIRING

A. All the wiring installation shall be as per IS:732 with latest amendment. PVC insulated copper
conductor cables as specified in bills of quantity shall be used for sub‐circuit runs from the
distribution boards to the points and shall be pulled into conduits. They shall be twisted copper
conductors with thermoplastic insulations of 1100 volts grade. Colour Code for wiring shall be
followed.

B. Looping system of wiring shall be used, wires shall not be jointed. Where joints are
unavoidable, they shall be made through approved mechanical connectors with prior
permission of the consultant. No reduction of strands are permitted at terminations. No wire
smaller than 1.5 sq.mm shall be used and shall be as per B.O.Q. Wherever wiring is run through
trunkings or raceways, the wires emerging from individual distributions shall be bunched
together with cable straps at required regular intervals. Identification ferrules indicating the
circuit and DB number shall be used for submains, sub‐circuit wiring. The ferrules shall be
provided at both end of each submain and sub‐circuit.

PMC: NSL E64

C. Where single phase circuits are supplied from a three phase and a neutral distribution board,
no conduit shall contain the wiring fed from more than one phase. In any one room in the
premises where all or part of the electrical load consists of lights, fans and/or other single
phase current consuming devices, all shall be connected to the same phase of the supply.
Circuits fed from distinct sources of supply or from different distribution boards or through
switches or MCBs shall not be bunched in one conduit. In large areas and other situations
where the load is divided between two or three phase, no two single phase switches
connected to different phase shall be mounted within two meters of each other.

D. All splicing shall be done by means of terminal blocks or connectors and no twisting connection
between conductors shall be allowed.

E. Industrial sockets shall be of polycarbonate and deeply recessed contact tubes. Visible scraping
type earth terminal shall be provided. Socket shall have self adjustable spring loaded
protective cap. Socket shall have MCB/ELCB/RCCB as specified in the schedule of work.

3.05 Fire Seal System

A. All the floor/wall opening provided for cable crossing shall be sealed by fire seal system.

B. The fire proof sealing system shall fully comply with the requirements of relevant IS/BS:476
Part‐B. The fire proof seal system shall have minimum one hour fire resistance rating.

C. The fire proof seal system shall be physically, chemically, thermally stable and shall be
mechanically secured to the masonary concrete members. The system shall be completely gas
and smoke tight, antirodent and anti‐termite.

D. The material used in fire proof seal system shall be non‐toxic and harmless to the working
personnel.

E. Type of fire proof seal system shall be foaming type or flamemastic type compound or
approved equivalent.
F. After laying and jointing work is completed, high voltage test should be applied to all cables to
ensure that they have not been damaged during or after the laying operation and that there is
not fault in the jointing.

G. Cables for use on low and medium voltage system (1.1KV grade cables) should withstand for
15 minutes a pressure of 3000V DC applied between conductors and also between each
conductor and sheaths. In the absence of pressure testing facilities it is sufficient to test for
one minute with a 1000V insulation tester In case the test results are unsatisfactory the cost of
repairs and replacements and extra work of removal & laying will be made good by the
contractor.

H. Cable shall be installed so that separations shown in the table below are
observed.
PMC: NSL E65

1. HV Cable (33 KV) ‐ HV Cable (33 KV) 50 mm

2. ELV & LV 230 V/433 V ‐ ELV & LV cable 230 V/433 V 50 mm
3. HV cables (33 KV) ‐ ELV & LV cables 230 V/433 V 300 mm
4. LV cables 433 V ‐ Telephone/Instrument cable 350 mm
5. All cables ‐ All hot pipe work 200 mm

3.05 FACTORY TESTS

A. Each type of cable specified shall be fully type tested according to IEC 502 and the appropriate
British Standards. The types and sizes of cables required are shown on the Drawings.

B. Should the Engineer require it, the Contractor shall submit reports issued by a national or
international testing authority on type test that have been successfully performed on the cable
for his approval.

C. The type test shall include the following test:
1. Partial discharge test;
2. Bending test, plus partial discharge test;
3. Tan measurement as a function of the voltage and capacitance measurement;
4. Tan measurement as a function of the temperature;
5. Heating cycle test plus partial discharge test ;
6. Impulse withstand test, followed by a power frequency voltage test;
7. Medium‐voltage alternating current test;
8. Type test (non‐electrical) as stipulated in IEC 502, Table VI.

D. Cable routine test shall be conducted at factory in accordance with IEC 502 for the following
tests:
Measurement of the electrical resistance of conductors.
Partial discharge test,
4‐hour MV test.

3.06 SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. The Contractor shall supply all necessary testing equipment for site testing. When required,
these testing equipment shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor at a recognized
national laboratory.
B. The Contractor shall engage an Authorised Medium Voltage Testing Engineer who is
recongnised by SEB to perform all site tests.
C. In addition to SEB’s requirements and those recommended by the manufacturer, the following
tests shall be carried out:
1. Continuity test,
2. Earth test,
3. Polarity test,
4. Insulation resistance test,
PMC: NSL E66

5. DC high voltage test. The test voltage shall be in accordance with SEB’s requirements
and Engineer’s approval.

END OF SECTION

PMC: NSL E67

Electrical: Wiring Devices Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,
WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The drawings for the lighting and power points indicate approximate positions of all
lighting fittings, switches, power outlet points, isolating switch points and the like.
The actual positions of all fittings, switches, the wiring details and cable routes shall
be co‐ordinated with other trades on site and submitted for the approval of the
Engineer. All time and cost required adjusting the layout or adjusting the
completed installation to Engineer satisfaction and to suit site co‐ordination is
included in the Contract.

B. During the exact positioning of lighting and power points, due consideration shall
be given to the operational requirements of the installation, the selection of the
most accessible routes for wiring and the convenience of switching.

C. No additional cost will be entertained should the final positions be relocated within
the same room or not more than five (5) metres away from the original locations
due to any requirement.

D. For the purpose of this Specification and related Drawings, each lighting and small
power point circuits shall in general be coded with a prefix to indicate the
corresponding distribution board number; details on the circuit way and phase shall
be submitted for the approval of Engineer.

E. Certain types of electrical equipment or systems involving sudden changes, or low
frequency or of direct electric current such as fluorescent lamps, contactors, etc.
shall be fitted with radio and television interference suppression components
suitable to meet the levels specified in BS 800 “Limits of Radio Interference”.

F. This section included the specification of the following :
1. Distribution boards
2. Miniature circuit breakers
3. Earth leakage circuit breakers
4. 6A Switch Socket Outlet
5. 16A Switch Socket Outlets
6. Shaver Outlets
7. Isolating Switches
8. Conduit Boxes
9. Contactors
10. Dimmers Switch
11. Time Switch
12. Cooler Control Units
13. Water Heater Switches
14. Bell Push Switches
PMC: NSL E 68

1.02 STANDARDS

A. The complete wiring installation shall be engineered according to manufacturer
data and constructed in accordance with the latest revision of the IS and the
appropriate BS/IEC

B. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the
following precedence:
3. Drawings;
4. Specification;
5. International standards and requirements.

1.03 SUBMISSION

A. All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective
stages of construction.

B. As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:
1. Equipment catalogues submission with manufacturer’s data;
2. Sample submission include all wiring accessories;
3. Shop Drawings of the lighting and power positions, circuit numbers, cable routings,
switching arrangement, mounting height, etc. The positions and mounting heights
shall be coordinated with other services. Fixing details of all wiring accessories shall
also be included.
4. Drawings showing the installation details.
5. Labeling system
6. Builder’s works requirement.

PART 2 – PRODUCT

2.01 LIGHTING POINT INSTALLATION

A. The various types of light fittings to be supplied and installed are described in the
drawings and the Schedule of Lighting Fittings on Drawing

B. Surface mounted light fitting shall terminate at a junction box having entries
appropriate to the run of conduit and shall be complete with porcelain/ PVC
connector suitable for the size and number of connections to be made at the point
and the wiring required to connect the specified fitting. Wiring to the light fittings
within the false ceiling spaces shall be by means of heat resistant (butyl or silicon
rubber insulated to BS 6500) cables i.e. between the junction box and the lamp
holder/terminal blocks, in flexible conduits.

C. At every light fitting an approved type earthing terminal shall be provided for
connection of the circuit protective conductor of the final circuit.
PMC: NSL E 69

D. Ferrous metalwork shall be of minimum thickness of 1mm. treated against
corrosion by galvanising after welding or be lead primer or other approved process.
Metalwork shall be painted with one priming coat, one under‐coat and two top
coats finished stove‐enamelled matt white, unless otherwise specified.

E. Cables used for internal wiring of the lighting fittings shall be of appropriate type
and size and number. Conductor shall be of size not less than 1.5 sq.mm. single
core or the equivalent. The insulation of the cables shall be able to withstand
throughout the life of the fitting the maximum temperature to which it will be
subject in normal use without deterioration which could affect the safety of the
fitting.

F. Cables within the lighting fittings shall be neatly bundled by nylon self locking cable
ties; wiring shall be properly routed and secured away from control gear etc.
wherever possible.

G. All cable terminations within the light fittings shall be suitably shrouded to the
approval of the Engineer.

H. All lighting fittings shall be self‐supporting complete with the appropriate fixing
accessories such as clips, supporting brackets, suspension sets, nuts, washers,
screws etc. for the proper installation of the fittings on different types of ceiling
panels. Suspension sets shall be of adjustable type suitable to carry the weight of
the lighting fittings and unless otherwise stated or indicated on Drawings, the
suspension sets shall be generally 900 mm in length; exact lengths required shall
suit site situations.

I. All lamps complete with control gear necessary in operational condition shall be
provided together with the lighting fittings as specified.

2.02 SWITCHES

A. Lighting switches, unless otherwise specified, shall be single pole, quick make and
slow‐break, silent switch action type with solid silver alloy contacts and totally
enclosed switch action for flush or surface mounting as required.

B. Lighting switches shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor service according to
location, housed in standardized purpose manufactured galvanized steel boxes
completed with conduit knockouts made up into single or multi‐gang units
employing a grid switch system of fully interchangeable components at
standardized fixing centres of matching switches of different types and ratings but
of identical dimensions, push buttons, neon indicator lamps, blanking units, grids,
steel boxes and plates all capable of integration into standard composite
assemblies in any combination as required.

C. Grids shall be adjustable for variation in depth of plaster and for squaring errors
and of the same type for surface or flush mounting.
PMC: NSL E 70

D. Switches in mechanical plant rooms and electrical sub‐stations and switch rooms
shall be of the metal clad type approved by the Engineer, mounted in flush or
surface conduit boxes as specified elsewhere.

E. Switches located on brick or concrete walls shall be mounted in horizontal
arrangement in plaster depth steel boxes or in galvanized steel boxes using box
suspension straps and cover plates. Countersunk screws shall be provided for fixing
to the conduit boxes.

F. Switches for external use shall be of weatherproof construction with IP65 rating,
unless otherwise specified.

G. Samples of all switches, conduit boxes and plaster depth boxes shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval prior to installation.

H. Samples shall be rated for 6 Amps (minimum light switch rating 6A), 16 Amps or
20 Amps as determined by circuit load which for inductive lighting circuit shall be
assessed at twice the steady state connected load current, one way or two ways as
indicated on the drawings and fixed generally at a height of 1200 mm from floor
level and where located in rooms the switch shall, where possible be located on the
inside of the room on the handle side of the door as close to the door as is
practicable.

I. An earthing terminal, connected to the earth continuity terminal shall be
provided and connected to the circuit protective conductor at every lighting switch
positions.

J. Single pole switches shall be connected to break the phase wire of the supply; the
neutral wire shall not be routed through switch boxes.

K. Switches which are mounted in the same location shall be of multi‐gang type, of
the maximum number of gangs available.

L. All switches used shall be of approved or prescribed items as required by local
Authorities.

M. Circuit from different phase and circuit from emergency power should have
separate switch plate.

2.03 ISOLATION SWITCH

A. Isolating switches shall be of the current ratings and number of poles (generally
double pole for single phase and 4‐pole three phases) as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Isolating switches shall be of the totally enclosed pattern, metal‐clad or
polycarbonate with positive quick‐make and quick‐break action.

PMC: NSL E 71
C. Switches shall be capable of passing and also interrupting their full rated current
safety and without damage.

D. Ferrous materials shall be galvanised, switch handles shall be interlocked to prevent
opening the cover with the switch "ON".

2.04 6 AMP SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS

A. Switch socket outlets shall be as per BS1363 single pole 6 Amp 3 round pin
shuttered outlets, one or two gang for indoor service except otherwise specified
and either surface or flush mounting according to location.

B. Switches shall be of the quick‐make slow break type with silent, totally enclosed
switch action and solid silver alloy contacts. Switched socket outlets for indoor use
shall be housed in suitable galvanized steel boxes to BS 4662 with conduit
knockouts. Types and finishes of socket plates shall match those for the lighting
switches.

C. Generally switch socket outlets shall be positioned 300 mm above floor level
except in plant rooms, kitchen, etc. where they shall be positioned 1400 mm above
floor level or 150 mm above counters or benches whichever is suitable.

D. Switch socket outlet in all mechanical plant rooms, electrical switch rooms shall
be of the metal clad type, with recessed or protected switch dolly, mounted in flush
or surface conduit boxes as specified elsewhere.

E. All switch socket outlets used shall be of an approved quality.

2.05 16 AMP SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS

A. 16 Amp switch socket outlets shall be 3 pin round type to BS 546 shuttered, of a
finished similar to 6 Amp switch socket outlets and flush mounted in galvanised
steel conduit boxes to BS 4662 requirements.

2.06 WEATHERPROOF ISOLATOR

A. Weatherproof enclosure shall be of the high impact, water resistant to IP65. The
isolator provided shall complete with lockable device. Isolators shall be double‐
pole, 4‐pole as specified.

2.07 LIGHTING DIMMERS SWITCH

A. Lighting dimmer switch shall be the solid state, variable load, Thyristor controlled
type suitable for controlling fluorescent and or incandescent lighting circuits
operating at 230V ± 6% 50Hz single phase AC supply.

B. Dimmer switch shall be manufactured to eliminate TV and radio frequency
interference in compliance with IS.
PMC: NSL E 72

C. The ratings of the dimmer units shall be suitable for lighting circuit specified on
Drawing.
2.08 TIME SWITCHES

A. Time switches shall be self‐contained units suitable for mains operation. All units
shall have a self‐starting synchronous motor with a single‐pole fuse in the motor
circuit, a 3‐way terminal block and a thirty‐six (36) hours spring reserve complete
with an automatic solar dial.

B. When fitted, the solar dial shall be capable of switching ON at sunset and OFF at
sunrise throughout the year by control of a secondary calendar dial with month and
day settings, and the automatic switching time shall be adjustable.

C. Time switches shall be encased in a dust‐tight metal casing have a hinged front
cover with a clear Perspex window. The casing shall be effectively earthed.

D. A manual bypass switch shall be incorporated with the time switch to facilitate
maintenance of the latter.

2.09 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. The MCB shall be suitable for manual closing and opening and automatic tripping
under overload and short circuit. The MCB shall also be trip free type.

B. Single pole/three pole versions shall be furnished as required.

C. The MCB shall be rated for 10 KA fault level.

D. The MCB shall be suitable for its housing in the lighting boards and shall be suitable
for connection at the outgoing side by tinned cable lugs and for bus‐bars
connection on the incoming side.

E. The terminal of the MCBs and the open and close conditions shall be clearly and
indelibly marked.

F. The MCB shall generally conform to IS: 8828.

2.10 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. ELCB shall be 4 pole 415 volts 50Hz, 30‐300mA sensitivity. These shall be of
approved make. The rating of the ELCB shall be as required. These shall be suitable
for manual closing and opening and automatic tripping under earth fault circuit of
30‐300mA as specified in item of work.

B. The enclosure of the ELCB shall be moulded from high quality insulating material.
The material shall be fire retardant, anti tracking, non‐hygroscopic, impact resistant
and shall with stand high temperature.
PMC: NSL E 73

C. All parts of switching mechanism shall be non‐greasing, self lubricating material so
as to provide consistent and trouble free operation.

D. Operation of ELCB shall be independent of mounting position and shall be trip free
type.

2.11 LIGHTING/SMALL POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

A. Distribution boards shall be of standard make with MCBs as per approved make
given. Distribution boards shall be constructed out of steel sheet all weld enclosure
with double door IP42 protection and shall be powder coated.

B. Ample clearance between the conductors of opposite pole, between conductors
and sheet steel body shall be maintained in order to obviate any chance of short
circuit. Removable conduits entry plates shall be provided at top and bottom to
facilitate drilling holes at site to suit individual requirements.

C. Also on additional/separate adopter box of suitable length and size shall be
provided to accommodate wires and cables. No. of conduits etc. and nothing shall
be payable on this account.

D. The MCBs shall be mounted on high grade rigid insulating support and connected
by electrolytic copper bus bars.

E. Each incoming MCB isolator shall be provided with solder‐less cable sockets for
crimping.

F. Phase separation barriers made out of arc resistant materials shall be provided
between the phases. Bus bars shall be colour coded for phase identification.

G. Distribution boards shall be recessed in wall niche or if required mounted on the
surface of the wall with necessary clamp bolts etc.

H. The mounting height shall not exceed 1200mm from finished floor level.
Distribution board shall be provided with proper circuit identification name plate
and danger sticker/plate as per requirements.

I. All the distribution boards shall be provided with engraved name plates with
‘lighting’, ‘power’ or ‘UPS’ with DB Nos., as the case may be.

J. Each DB shall be provided with a circuit list giving details of each circuit. All the
outgoing circuit wiring shall be provided with identification ferrules giving the
circuit number & phase.

K. Each distribution board shall have a separate neutral connection bar and a separate
earth connection bar mounted within the DB each having the same number of
terminals as the total number of outgoing individual circuits from the distribution
PMC: NSL E 74
board. Conduit & cable armouring shall be bonded together & connected to the
distribution board earth bar.

L. Where oversized cables are specified due to voltage drop problems, it shall be
contractors responsibility to ensure that satisfactory terminal arrangements are
provided without an extra cost.

2.12 TELEPHONE OUTLETS

A. Telephone outlets where called for shall be single or twin of the flush mounted
type suitable to receive the plug‐in telephone cable lead to the approval of the
Telecom. The finishes of the telephone outlet plates at various areas shall be as
specified for lighting switches.

2.13 WATER COOLER DRINKING FOUNTAIN SWITCHES

A. Water cooler switches shall be flush‐mounted having double pole AC switch rated
at 20 amps and marked “water cooler”.

B. Associated connector units shall be provided next to the water cooler.

C. The switches and the connector shall be IP65 waterproof rating.

2.14 BELL PUSH SWITCHES

A. Bell push switches shall be flush‐mounted having a single‐pole AC switch rated at
6 amps and marked with bell symbol.
2.15 SHAVER OUTLETS

A. Shaver outlets shall comprise a 20VA continuously rated double wound isolating
transformer to provide an earth‐free AC supply at mains frequency, complete with
self resetting thermal overload device filled in the primary circuit an insulated
voltage selector switch to provide either 115 or 230 volt output, one ON‐OFF switch
and one universal socket outlet suitable for British, American, Continental and
Australian razor plugs, all contained in a recessed sheet steel box with insulated
moulded front plate suitable for flush, mounting and suitably inscribed to give a
clear indication of the voltages available at the outlet and the service of the outlet.

2.16 COOLER CONTROL UNITS

A. Cooler Control Units shall be flush mounted having a double pole AC switch rated
at 30 amps complete with pilot indicating lamps and a self adhesive plastic
identification label mounted on a removable chassis contained within steel box
finished aluminium stoved enamel provided with conduit knockouts and earthing
terminals. The cover plates shall be of the same finish as those specified for the
lighting switches.

PMC: NSL E 75
B. Associated connector units shall be provided adjacent to the cooler units.

C. Wirings between the cooler control units and associated connector units shall be
provided in concealed conduits.

2.17 WATER HEATER SWITCHES

A. Water heater switches shall be flush mounted having double pole AC switch rated
at 20 amps fitted with pilot lamp and marked “water heater”. The cover plates
shall be of the same finish as those specified for the other switches. Associated
connector units shall be provided next to the water heater units.

2.18 POWER SUPPLY FOR LIGHTING AT WET CONDITION

A. Residual Current Circuit Breakers shall be provided individually for each circuits
serving lighting subject to wet condition.

END OF SECTION

PMC: NSL E 76
Electrical Circuit Breakers Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Circuit breaker including Air-circuit breaker (ACB), Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB), Miniature
Circuit Breakers (MCB) and Residual Current Circuit Breakers (RCCB / RCD) shall be provided according to the
specification.
B. All breakers shall be capable of withstanding the electrical, mechanical and thermal stress of the
prospective fault level experience. The prospective fault levels of the various breakers shall be verified according to
result in short circuit/co-ordination study.
C. The drawings, specification and BOQ compliment each other and which is shown or called for one shall be
interpreted as being called for on both. Material, if any, which may not have been specified but fairly required to
make a complete assembly of switch gear as shown on the drawing, specifications shall be construed as being
required and no extra charges shall be payable on this account.
1.2 STANDARDS
A. All equipment, material and components shall comply with the requirements of the latest
editions of Indian Standards with updated amendments. Standards and Regulations applicable in the
area where equipment is to be installed shall also be followed.
B. The equipment offered complying with other standards, these standards shall be equal
to or superior to those specified and full details of the differences shall be furnished along with the
tender.
C. The Panel boards shall be engineered and constructed in accordance with the latest
revision of the following Indian and British standards:
1. IS:13947 : Air circuit breaker/molded case circuit breaker.

1993/
IEC 947-
1989
2. IS: 3156 : Voltage transformers.
3. IS: 2705 : Current transformers for metering and protection with classification
Part-I, II & III burden and insulation.
1964
4. IS: 9224 : Low voltage fuse and protection.
5. IS: 3231 : Specification for electrical relays for power system protection.
6. IS:8623 : Specification for factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear
for voltage unto and including 1000-V AC/1200 V-DC.
7. IS: 4237 : General requirements for switch gear and control gear for voltage not
exceeding gear.
8. IS: 2147 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switch gear
and control gear.
9. IS: 1018 : Switchgear and control gear selection/installation and maintenance.
10. IS: 1248 : Direct acting electrical indicating instruments.
11. IS: 375 : Arrangement for switchgear, bus bars, main connections, auxiliary
wiring and marking.
12. IS: 2959 : AC contactors for voltage not exceeding 1000V.
13. IS: 5578 : Guide for marking of insulated conductors.
PMC: NSL E 77
14. IS: 11050 : Guide for forming system of marking and identification of conductors &
apparatus terminal.
15. IS: 1248 : Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and
testing accessories.
16. IS: 6005 : Code of practice for phosphating of iron & steel.
1. BS EN 60898 : Circuit breakers for over current protection for household and similar
IEC 898 installations.
2. BS EN : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 2 circuit breakers.
60947-2 IEC
947-2
3. BS 5419 : Air-break switches, air-break disconnectors, and fuse combination units
for voltage up to and including 1000V AC and 1200 VDC.
4. BS 5486 : Low-voltage switchgear and control gear Part 1 assemblies. Part 1
requirement for type tested and partially type tested assemblies.
5. BS 4293 : Residual Current Circuit Breaker
D. BS/IEC or other National standards not mentioned above but are applicable to this
installation shall also apply.
1.3 SUBMISSION
A. A component list and catalogues.
B. Preparation of bill of materials for Different Items as mentioned in Schedule of

Quantities.
C. Factory and site testing procedures and report formats shall also be included.
D. Protection co-ordination drawings/tables for complete power system.
E. Shop inspection and testing procedures.
F. Field testing and commissioning procedures.
G. General Arrangement drawing of the Switchboard, showing front view, plan, foundation
plan, floor cutouts/trenches for external cables and elevations, transport sections and weights.
H. Sectional drawings of the circuit breaker panels, showing general constructional

features, mounting details of various devices, bus bars, current transformers, cable boxes, terminal
boxes for control cables etc.
I. Schematic and control wiring diagram for circuit breaker and protection including
indicating devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc.
J. Terminal plans showing terminal numbers, ferrules markings, device terminal numbers,
function etc.
K. Relay wiring diagrams.
L. Equipment List.
M. Vendor shall furnish required number of copies of above drawings for Purchaser’s
review, fabrication of switch boards shall start only after Purchaser’s clearance for the same. After final
review, required number of copies and reproducible shall be furnished as final certified drawings.
N. The information furnished shall include the following:
PMC: NSL E 78
a. Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.
b. Erection, Operation and Maintenance Manual complete with all relevant information, drawings
and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories, characteristics curves for relays etc.
c. A comprehensive spare parts catalogue.
Any other work/activity which is not listed above; however is necessary for completeness of electrical
system.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Air circuit breakers shall be metal clad, flush mounted, horizontal draw out isolation, air break type
complying to IEC 60947-2: 1995/ IS:13947-1993. Air circuit breakers shall have a rupturing capacity of not less
than short circuit current experienced at location of installation for 3 seconds certified by ASTA or other recognized
testing authorities.
B. The breaker shall be provided with variable microprocessor based releases for over load, short circuit and
earth fault protection (and shall be compatible with PC) and shall be in conformance with this specifications.
C. All air circuit breakers (ACBs) shall be of draw-out type encased in metal clad housings. The manufacturing
of the breaker shall be such that there is no compulsory safety clearance imposed around the breakers, in order to
optimise the switchboard space requirement.
D. The ACBs shall be so manufactured that they comprise of main and arcing contacts of adequate ratings
and housed in reinforced polyester casings, offering double insulation from the front face and ensuring no possibility
of “Flashover” between phases. The main contacts shall have double-actions in each pole and all contacts shall be
silver-plated and replaceable.
E. Arc chutes with stainless steel filters shall be provided on each pole of the breaker as an efficient means of
arc control. The filters must be effective to minimize the diffusion of ionized gas outside the breaker when the
contacts open on short circuits. This manufacturing detail must be effective at all levels of current for which the
breaker is manufacture to operate. Any arc created as a result of the opening of the breaker’s contacts during fault
conditions shall be completely contained in the chute without any possibility of a “Flashover” between poles or to
adjacent earthed metallic parts.
F. The draw out version of ACBs shall have three indicated positions as follows:
1. Connected : The breaker is fully racked-in with all the main & auxiliaries engaged.
2. Tested : The breaker is racked out and with the main disconnected, but all auxiliaries are still
connected.
3. Disconnected : The breaker is fully withdrawn and all circuits disconnected.
G. A clear means of Positive Contact Indication (PCI) shall be provided by a mechanical flag marked “ON” or
“OFF” to indicate the circuit breaker’s contact positions. The stored energy mechanism shall also have clear
indications marked “CHARGE” or “DISCHARGE” to reflect its status.
H. Safety shutters shall be provided to all drawout breakers in order to inhibit inadvertent access (degree of
protection IP20) to the “live” clusters when the breakers are in the “Test” or “Disconnected” positions. It must be
possible to padlock the safety shutters in the SHUT position.
PMC: NSL E 79
I. Auxiliary switches shall be equipped for each breaker for indication, alarm and control purposes. Auxiliary
switches shall be robust, with double break-action, easily accessible for maintenance and having adequate current
ratings to carry the connected load. Each breaker shall have provision for extending the number of auxiliary
switches to cover future alarm or signalling circuit requirements. All auxiliary circuitry wiring shall be connected on
the front face of the breaker on a set of disconnecting terminals to facilitate the automatic disconnection of auxiliary
circuits when the breaker is in the “Disconnected” position.
J. Circuit breakers shall be manufactured for optimum performance with minimum maintenance. The
mechanical endurance (C-O cycles) without maintenance shall be at least 12500 cycles for breakers up to 1600A,
10000 cycles for breakers from 2000A to 4000A and 5000 cycles for 5000A and 6300A breakers. The electrical
endurance (C-O cycles) at 440V without maintenance shall be 10000 cycles for breakers up to 1600A, 8000 cycles
for breakers of 2000A, 5000 cycles for breakers of 2500A to 4000A and 1500 cycles for 5000A and 6300A
breakers.
K. The circuit breakers shall be equipped with electrical motor operating mechanisms for automatic charging
of the stored energy spring mechanism. However, this shall not prohibit the breakers to be operated manually, if
required. Closing operations can be initiated either from the local push button on the front face of the circuit breaker
or by remote control. The closing coils shall be rated at 23OVac. After closing, the stored energy spring mechanism
shall immediately be recharged automatically by the motor, so as to be ready for next closing operation when the
breaker trips.
L. Normal manual opening of the circuit breaker shall be accomplished either from the local push button on
the front face of the circuit breaker or by means of a trip coil. The trip coil must be capable of carrying continuous
rated current, i.e. being permanently energized, for electrical interlocking purposes. The tripping mechanism shall
be robustly built and stable without possibility of being inadvertently operated by shock or jerk. The trip coil shall be
manufactured such that the plunger operates immediately when activated, without having undue delay for the
building up of the coil’s magnetic field. Regardless of all circumstances, the speed of closing and opening shall be
independent of the operator.
M. The operating mechanism, carriage and hinged panel shall be so interlocked that it is not possible to
withdraw the circuit breaker while it is in the closed position. Closing of circuit breaker in between service and
disconnected position is also not possible and vice versa.
N. Provision shall be made so that it is possible to operate the circuit breaker mechanism when it is in the
disconnected position.
O. The main circuit breakers for the incoming supply and the bus-tie (couple) breaker shall be mechanically
and electrically interlocked such that only two of the three circuit breakers can be closed at any one time. The
mechanical interlock shall be achieved be means of Ronis keys and electrical interlock by means of a permanently
energized coil. The system shall be so arranged that the withdrawal of any one circuit breaker shall in no way effect
the operation of the others.
P. Pad locking facilities shall be provided for each breaker so that breaker operation can be locked in a
particular position if so indicated.
Q. The tests to verify the characteristics of circuit breaker shall include type tests, routine tests and special
tests.
1. Type test shall include:
a. Verification of temperature rise unit
b. Verification of dielectric properties
c. Verification of rated short-circuit making and breaker current
d. Verification of mechanical operation and endurance
2. Routine test shall include:
a. Mechanical operation tests
b. Calibration of releases
PMC: NSL E 80
c. Dielectric tests
R. Other tests, which are to be carried out on request of the relevant authorities, shall be done on the Vendor’s
account. Vendors must submit type test certificates issued by ASEFA, ASTA or other recognized testing authorities
together with the Technical documents or upon request.
2.02 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)
A. The MCCB shall comply with IS13947-1993/ IEC 947-2:1995. The MCCB shall be provided with over
current protection by means of thermal and magnetic tripping element.
B. All MCCB tripping mechanism shall be ambient temperature compensated. MCCB of frame sizes greater
than 150 amps shall be equipped with continuously adjustable magnetic pick up setting. MCCBs used for incoming
main feeders shall in addition be provided with continuously adjustable rated current settings in the range of 60 to
100% rated current.
C. The MCCBs shall have quick make and quick break mechanism independent of the operating speed. The
tripping mechanism shall be mechanically “trip free” from the handle so that the handle cannot be closed against
fault conditions.
D. The MCCB shall be provided with door interlock handles. All handles shall be large and robust to carry out
the switching operation with ease. The handle shall clearly indicate the “ON”, “OFF” and “TRIP” positions. The
handle shall be able to be locked in the “ON” or “OFF” positions. When locked in the “ON” position it shall still be
possible for the handle to indicate “TRIP” when the MCCB has tripped. An interlock release mechanism shall be
provided to enable the door to be opened when the MCCB is locked in the “ON” position.
E. Multi-pole MCCB shall have a common-trip bar so that a fault condition on any one pole of the MCCB will
cause all poles to trip simultaneously.
F. The MCCB interrupting capacity shall be not less than that indicated on the drawings unless alternative
scheme using cascading protection or other schemes are utilised.
G. MCCBs of ratings 200A and above shall be of Busbar termination type, adaptable for use with bolts and
cable lugs.
H. Automatic change over MCCBs shall be of the motorised type, fully withdrawable, with both mechanical and
electrical interlock. The transfer operation shall be controllable by an adjustable time delay of between 0.1 to 30
sec. The actual transfer time of the MCCBs shall not exceed 2 sec. The motor mechanism shall utilise universal
motor with electro magnetic clutch and shall be equipped with full handles to allow manual operation of the MCCB.
All automatic change over MCCBs shall have a minimum mechanical life of 10,000 operations.
I. MCCB when used for motor protection shall have characteristics suitable for the motor starting. Standard
range MCCB shall not be substituted for motor protection circuits.
J. All fully withdrawable MCCB shall have interlocks to prevent withdrawal when the MCCB is “ON”.
K. All main moulded case circuit breaker shall be provided with at least 2 pairs N/O and N/C auxiliary contact.
L. Indicating lamps shall be of the panel mounting, LED type and shall have execution plates marked with its
function wherever necessary. The colour of the lamp cover shall be red for ‘ON’ and green for ‘OFF’ indicating
lamps shall be provided with series resistor.
2.03 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)
PMC: NSL E 81
A. MCBs shall comply with IEC 898:1995. They shall be of the current limiting type having a sealed ambient
temperature independent thermal magnetic tripping mechanism providing overload and short circuit
protection. All MCBs shall be of 35mm D/N symmetrical rail mounted type.
B. The breaking capacity of MCBs shall be at least equal to the prospective fault level at the point installation,
unless back-up by a current limiting upstream breaker of the same make.
C. The MCB operating mechanism shall be mechanically trip free from the operating handle so as to prevent
the contacts from being held closed against short circuit and overload conditions. It shall be of the
automatic resetting type.
D. The individual operating mechanism of each pole of a multi-pole MCB shall be directly linked within the
MCB casing and not with the operating handles.
E. The operating handle shall be of the toggle type with possibility for mounting of padlocking facility.
F. Each pole shall be provided with bi-metallic thermal element for overload protection and magnetic element
for short circuit protection.
G. It shall be possible to fit on site auxiliaries like shunt-trip coil, under-voltage release, ON/OFF switch or
alarm switch.
2.04 RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB)
A. RCCB shall comply with BS 4293 and shall be of the current operated type.
B. The RCCBs shall be manufactured to trip within 0.1 second for 30 mA.
C. The RCCBs shall be of 2-pole construction for single phase and 4-pole construction for 3 phases.
D. All RCCBs shall be complete with test buttons.
E. All RCCBs shall be batch tested and bear the appropriate test label of approval to SEB requirement.
F. All RCCBs shall be of high sensibility type as appropriate and as specified in the drawing. They shall be of
surge proof manufacture to prevent nuisance tripping due to transient over voltage.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. All Switch gears shall be inspected & tested in the presence of Owner/ Consultant’s
representative and certified by the installation Engineer that it is safe before supply is energized, and
that all the equipment comply with the requirements of the Specification.
B. All routine tests specified in relevant Indian/British Standards shall be carried out on all
circuit breakers.
1. Test for protective relay operation by primary or secondary injection method.
2. Operation of all meters.
3. Secondary wiring continuity test
4. Insulation test with 1000 Volts megger, before and after voltage test.
PMC: NSL E 82
5. HV test on secondary wiring and components on which such test is permissible (2 KV for one
minute)
6. Simulating external circuits for remote operation of breaker, remote indicating lights and other
remote operations, if any.
7. Measurement of power required for closing/trip coil of the breaker.
8. Pick up and drop out voltages for shunt trip and closing coils.
9. CT Polarity test.
10. Tests to prove correct operation of controls, interlocks, tripping and closing circuits, indications, etc.;
11. Interfacing test with BMS control function.
12. All other tests required by the Engineer to verify compliance with the Specification.
C. Vendor shall provide all facilities such as power supply, testing instruments and
apparatus required for carrying out the tests.
D. Required copies of test certificates for all the tests carried out along with copies of type
test certificates and certificates from Sub-Vendor for the components procured from them are to be
submitted before dispatch of switch boards.
3.2 TOOLS
A. One complete set of all special or non-standard tools required for installation, operation
and maintenance of the switch board shall be provided. The manufacturer shall provide a list of such
tools with his quotation.
3.3 SPARES
A. The manufacturer/tenderer shall also supply a complete list of commissioning spares

and tools. The same shall be included in the bid price. No extra payment shall be made on account of
non-availability of spares during commissioning.
3.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Assurance shall follow the requirements of Owner/ Consultant as applicable.
B. Quality Assurance involvement will commence at enquiry and follow through to

completion and acceptance thus ensuring total conformity to Purchaser’s requirements.
3.5 DEVIATIONS
A. Deviation from specification must be stated in writing at the quotation stage.
B. In absence of such a statement, it will be assumed that the requirements of the

specifications are met without exception.
C. If any of the above tests fail to comply with the requirements of this Specification in any
respect whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at site, the Engineer
may reject the item or defective component thereof, whichever is considered necessary, and after
PMC: NSL E 83
adjustment or modification as directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit that item for further
inspection and/or test. In the event of the defective item being of such nature that the requirements of
this Specification cannot be fulfilled by adjustment or modification, such item is to be replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
PMC: NSL E 84
Electrical: Fire Alarm Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,

FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

7 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM :‐

7.1 SCOPE

The scope of this section covers design, manufacturers, supply, installation, connecting, testing and
commissioning of conventional type fire detection and alarm system.

The work include supply, installation, testing and commissioning of:

a. M S conduit work with all accessories.
b. Complete wiring in existing concealed/surface conduits
c. Photoelectric type smoke detectors.
d. Rate of rise cum fixed temperature heat detectors.
e. Manual alarm stations.
f. Response indicators.
g. Main control and indicating panel/zonal panel.

A high degree of operational safety, high quality and well designed detectors, signal panels and
auxiliary equipment shall be accepted. Supplier shall confirm that the electronic components used in
alarm and indicating panels are of standard manufacturers and are approved type, also the name of
the manufacturer shall be indicated.

The Contractor shall obtain clearance and approval form the Local Fire Authorities, the insurance
company insuring the building or any other agencies whom approval is required.

7.2 STANDARDS

For Spacing of detectors BS : Code of Practice
CP 1019, Section 2.7
For sensitivity of smoke detector BS : 5446 ‐ 1977
For control and indicating panel IS : 2189 – 1988

For smoke Detector IS : 11360 ‐ 1985

For Heat Detector IS : 2175 – 1988

7.3 OPERATING VOLTAGE

220 volts AC + 10% 50 cycles (single phase) and 24 volts DC +‐ 10%

PMC: NSL E 85

7.4 DETECTORS IN GENERAL

7.4.1 COMPATIBILITY

All automatic fire detectors shall be inter changeable without requiring different mounting bases nor
alternations in the signal panel.

7.4.2 RESPONSE SPECTRUM

Combustion gas detectors shall respond to both visible and invisible aerosols, size and colour of the
aerosols shall not have a decisive influence on the response of the detector.

7.4.3 SENSITIVITY

On average, 30 mgr of burned material per cu.m (as measured in a 1 cu.m chamber) shall release an
alarm.

POWER CONSUMPTION

Each detector shall use the minimum of power, for economic circuits, so that it shall be possible to
connect atleast 20 detectors per zone. Distance upto 1000 meters from detector to signal panel shall
not influence the number of detectors per zone.

BUILT‐IN‐RESPONSE INDICATOR

Each detector shall incorporate indicator “LED” at the base of the detector which shall light up on
actuation of the detector to located the detector which is operated. The detector shall not be affected
by failure of the response indicator lamp.

RESPONSE INDICATORS

It shall be possible to provide a secondary response indicator for the detector outside the closed room.

MAINTEANCE

All detectors shall be fitted either with plug‐in system or bayonet type connections only, from the
maintenance and compatibility point of view.

CONSTRUCTION

The detector shall be vibration and shock proof. When disassembling for cleaning purpose, its
components must not be damaged by static over voltage.

PMC: NSL E 86
ATMOSPHERIC AND THERMAL DISTURBANCES

The detector shall also be designed as to be practically immune to environmental criteria such as air
currents, humidity, temperature fluctuations, pressure and shall not release false alarm.

CONTINUOUS OPERATION

An alarm release shall not effect a detector’s good functioning. After resetting the alarm the detector
shall resume operation without re‐adjustment of any kind.

DAPTABILITY TO AMBIENT CONDITIONS

Detectors shall be designed for adaptability to humid and explosion endangered locations.

18 PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTORS

Smoke detectors shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Panel Loops. The detectors
shall use the photoelectric (light‐scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on
command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog value for smoke
density. The detectors shall be ceiling mounted type and shall include a twist‐lock base.

The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions,
indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Both
LEDs may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel; indicating that an alarm condition
has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external
remote alarm LED.

The area covered by each smoke detector shall be as per IS‐2189.

Detectors shall be suitable for an operating temperature 0 degree C to 55 degree C and
Relative humidity of 0% to 95%.

Detectors shall be suitable for a supply voltage of 17 to 28 V DC without affecting the sensitivity.

The detector shall have the approval of UL/FM/VDS/LPC only.

19. THERMAL DETECTORS

Thermal detectors shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Panel loops. The detectors
shall use an electronic detector to measure thermal conditions caused by a fire and shall, on command
from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the level of such thermal measurements.
The detectors shall be ceiling‐mounted type and shall include a twist‐lock base.

The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions.
Both LEDs may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm
condition has been detected.

PMC: NSL E 87
Detectors shall be suitable for an operating temperature 0 degree C to 22 degree C and relative
humidity of 0% to 95%.

Detectors shall be suitable for a supply voltage of 17 to 28 V DC without affecting the sensitivity.

The detector shall have the approval of UL/FM/VDS/LPC only.

7.6 MANUAL CALL STATIONS
Manual Call stations shall be provided to connect to the Fire Alarm Panel loops.

Manual stations shall be constructed of high impact LEXAN sheet with clearly visible operating
instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised
letters. Press/back stations with reset table capacity shall be acceptable.

Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting as shown on the plans, or semi‐flush mounting, and
shall be installed not less than 42 inches, nor more than 48 inches above the finished floor unless
otherwise specified by applicable building codes.

7.7 RESPONSE INDICATOR

Response indicator shall be LED (light emetting diode) type, and shall indicate when a detector senses
the fire.

7.8 REPEATER PANEL
Repeater panels are to be provided at remote location for monitoring the health of FAS. It should have
2 line 40 inches character display along with CEO status indicator. Battery backup shall be provided as
an in‐built feature and all information will be presented in clear English language. It shall be suitable
for operation from 0 degree C to 49 degree C and shall be flush mounted.

7.9 ELECTRONIC HOOTERS

All Hooters should be able to provide at least a minimum of 3 different tones, which should be user
configurable. The minimum decibel level of each hooter should be 90db at 1 mtr. All hooters should
be UL/FM listed.

The Electronic Hooters shall be housed in MS enclosure of 1.5 mm sheet metal.

The Hooters shall be with built on oscillator & amplifier.

The Hooters shall give wailing sound whenever it received 24 V supply from panel on receipt of Fire
signal.

The MS box shall be painted with Fire Red ( Power Coated)

7.10 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

PMC: NSL E 88
Control Panel

The control cabinet shall be dust proof and shall be provided with a glass door with lock and key to
prevent tempering by unauthorized persons.

The control circuit shall consists of glass epoxy (PCB) printed circuit board, silver plated and treated
with protective layer of special lacquer for protection against corrosion.
The alarm circuitry shall be 100% solid state without the use of any relays anywhere in zone card.

The zone cards shall be modular and interchangeable.

Every zone shall have individual control for test acknowledge and any zone shall be isolated without
effecting the working of the other zones in the panel.

Sounder silencing control shall be provided which shall remain in visual indication at the same time
making the panel from to receive alarm from any other zone without the need for resetting the entire
panel.

Silencing switches/push buttons – the system shall be so designed that once an alarm has been given it
shall continue till the alarm sounder is switched off. The silencing switches/push buttons in their ‘OFF’
position shall give and indication of this fact on the main control panel or transfer the alarm signal to
supervisory sounders under the supervision of the responsible person so that they may put use of the
smallest number of call points. Operation of silencing switch shall not prevent sounding of alarm from
any other zone simultaneously.

Central control and indicating panel shll be suitable for conventional Fire Detection and Alarm System and shall
comply with IS:2189‐1988.
Control panel shall support the following Fire‐Detection components.

Smoke Detectors
Detectors (Both fixed & rate of temperature rise type)
Manual Call Stations

System shall be completely backed up against Mains failure for atleast 8 hours and shall be suitable for
the following types of batteries.

Lead acid Maintenance free.
Lead acid non‐maintenance free
Lead acid semi‐maintenance free
Nickel Cadmium.

System shall be self diagnostic and shall cover the following:
Components/Modules of the fire panel.
Faulty detectors
Missing detectors
Open circuit short circuit conditions of the detector cable.
Suitable indication shall be given on the panel.
PMC: NSL E 89

Zone wise annunciation of alarm by using:
Buzzer Sounders

7.11. BATTERY

Suitable rating ampere Hours 24 Volts DC sealed maintenance free batteries shall be provided for Fire
Detection and Alarm System. The battery rating is indicative only. It shall be sized by bidder to cater to
all momentary and short time loads in addition to supplying the continuously rated loads for a duration
of 8 hours. However minimum size shall be 65 AH.

Battery Charger

Bidder shall furnish the battery charging system complete with all necessary accessories such as
transformer, rectifier, switches, fuses, starters, contactors, ammeter, voltmeter, protections and other,
devices for trouble free operation.

Construction features

Housing of battery charger shall be 2 mm thick CRCA steel sheet cabinet for indoor installation and
shall be floor mounted type. The cabinet shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid
support for all components. Louvers shall be provided in the cabinet for ventilation. PVC sheets of 3
mm thick shall be provided on the selves on which the batteries are to be placed.

Input

240 volts AC 50 cycles, single phase with tappings of 0‐200‐220‐240‐260 volts on the primary side of
the transformer.
Output

DC output shall be 24 volts. DC bridge rectifier shall be of silicon type, having full wave rectification.
Suitable contactor, relay, reset shall be provided as required.

7.12 CABLES

All PVC insulated FRLS copper conductor stranded cables shall be 650 volts grade and shall generally
conform to IS‐1554‐1988 and meet the signal cabling requirement of the system manufacturer.

Strands of cables shall not be cut to accommodate & connect to the terminals. Terminals shall have
sufficient cross‐sectional area to take all the strands.
PMC: NSL E 90

Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen using adequate rollers to minimize stretching
of the cable. The cable drums shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. Great care shall be
exercised in laying cables to avoid forming kinks. At all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical
planes, the cable shall be bent smooth with a radius as recommended by the manufacturer’s. All
cables shall be laid with minimum one diameter gap and shall be clamped at every metre and shall be
tagged for identification with aluminium tag and clamped properly. Tags shall be provided at both
ends and all changes in directions both sides of wall and floor crossings. All cable shall be identified by
embossing on the tag the size of the cable, place of origin and termination.

These shall be measured on linear basis including the fittings required like, end termination junction
box.

8.3 PUBLIC ADDRESS DEVICES

8.3.1 Speakers:

All speakers shall operate on 25 VRMS or with field selectable output taps from 0.5 to 2.0
Watts.

Speaker in corridors and public spaces shall produce a nominal sound output of 84 dBA at 3
meter.
Frequency response shall be a minimum of 400 HZ to 4000 HZ.

The back of each speaker shall be sealed to protect the speaker cone from damage and dust.

8.3.2 Fixed Emergency Telephone Handset

The telephone cabinet shall be painted red and clearly labeled as “Emergency Telephone”. The
cabinets shall be located where shown on drawings.

The handset cradle shall have a switch connection so that lifting the handset off of the cradle shall send
a signal to the fire command center which shall audibly and visually indicate its on‐line (off‐hook)
condition.

On activating the remote phone, the phone earpiece shall sound a telephone ring signal until the
master handset is lifted.

The two‐way emergency telephone system shall support a minimum of seven (7) handsets on line
without degradation of the signal.

END OF SECTION
PMC: NSL E 91

PMC: NSL E 92
Electrical: LAN Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,
LAN CABLING SYSTEM

Cabling Installation Guidelines
Guidelines for establishing the LAN
 The vendor will carry out the site survey for LAN creation. The survey shall
include the routes, distance between the offices, hindrances and all other
activities that are required to be carried out for the site survey before LAN
creation.
 After the field survey, the vendor shall calculate the number of different type
of interface components required for establishing FOC links.
LAN cable laying specifications

ISO 11801 cabling standards and local construction and tele‐communication regulations
Provide a user friendly environment with adequate technical support for maintenance
Enable easy performance upgrade

The following standards are to be compiled with unless otherwise specified:

 ISO/IEC 11801:2002 –International standard for generic cabling for customer
premises
 EIA/TIA 568B – Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
(2002)
 EIA/TIA 568B.2‐1‐ Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
(2002)

Cabling to be done in a structured way using RJ 45 connectors, RJ I/O boxes in concealed
conduits
All passive components and cable should be from same OEM and should accomplish
complete end to end channel warranty (20 years), Certification from OEM

UTP Cabling Installation Specifications

1. Cables shall be coiled in the surface‐mount boxes if adequate space is present to
house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturer’s bend radius. No more
than 12” of slack shall be stored.
2. In addition, each cable type shall be terminated as indicated below:
a. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the
recommendations made in the ANSI/TIA/EIA‐568‐B.2.1 document.
b. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed one‐half an inch for Category
6 connecting hardware. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall
not be less than 4 times the outside diameter of the cable.
c. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination
point.
PMC: NSL E 93
d. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or
blocks. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and
dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame.
e. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel
at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties.
Cables labeled within the bundle, where the label is obscured from view shall
not be acceptable.

1. Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and
best industry practices.
2. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no
splices). The cable’s minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not
be exceeded.
3. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled into groups of not greater than 40
cables. Cable bundle quantities in excess of 40 cables may cause deformation of the
bottom cables within the bundle.
4. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting support wires. Any cable
damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation
should be replaced by the contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost.
5. A self‐adhesive label or PVC marker ferules shall identify the Cables. A cable label
shall be applied to the cable behind the faceplate on a section of cable that can be
accessed by removing the cover plate. Similar label or marker ferrules shall also be
placed on a section of the cable near to the patch panel termination.
6. Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be installed so that there are no bends less than
four times the cables outside diameter (4 X cable outside diameter) at any point in
the run.
7. Pulling tension on 4‐pair UTP cables shall not exceed 25‐pounds for a single cable or
cable bundle. The pathway shall be adequately sized so as not to exceed the 80%
cross‐section fill of cables. The pathway shall be securely installed in the facility.

 Proper tagging for identification of cables to be done
 The vendor shall do the cabling from the cross connect at the floor distributor
(FD) administration sub system using CAT 6 and RJ 45 Jacks
 Each run of the cable from the cross connect at the FD to the information
outlets should be continuous without any joints / splices
 The vendor should ensure that the cabling is done in such a way that error
free transmission is done
 The cross connect module should be fire retardant
 Necessary electrical connections to be provided for all the equipments /
devices to be installed by the vendor
 Cabling provision to include connection with UPS and earthing
 Where ever required patch chords to be used with the given specifications

PMC: NSL E 94
Horizontal distribution cable & installation

 Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations
and best industry practices.
 Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the manufacturer
recommended guidelines. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from
origin to destination (no splices). The cable’s minimum bend radius and
maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded.
 Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting support wires. Any cable
damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during
installation should be replaced by the vendor prior to final acceptance at no
cost to CVENT.
 A self‐adhesive label or PVC marker ferules shall identify the Cables. A cable
label shall be applied to the cable behind the faceplate on a section of cable
that can be accessed by removing the cover plate. Similar label or marker
ferrules shall also be placed on a section of the cable near to the patch panel
termination.
 Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be installed so that there are no bends less
than four times the cables outside diameter (4 X cable outside diameter) at
any point in the run.
 Pulling tension on 4‐pair UTP cables shall not exceed 25‐pounds for a single
cable or cable bundle. The pathway shall be adequately sized so as not to
exceed the 80% cross‐section fill of cables. The pathway shall be securely
installed in the facility.

UTP Cabling System Specifications
Description CAT 6 UTP Cabling System
Type Unshielded twisted pair cabling system,
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568‐B.2.1 Category 6 cabling system
Networks 10 / 100 Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, 1000 Mbps IEEE
Supported 802.3ab Ethernet
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568‐ UL Listed/ETL Verified
B.2.1
IEEE 802.3ab Zero‐bit Error
Warranty 20‐year systems warranty; Warranty to cover
Bandwidth of the specified and installed cabling
System, and the installation costs
Performance Attenuation, Pair‐to‐pair and PS NEXT, ELFEXT
characteristics to and PSELFEXT, Return Loss, ACR and PS ACR for
be provided along 4‐connector channel
with bid

PMC: NSL E 95
Material
Material
Conductors 24 AWG solid bare copper
Insulation Polyethylene/Polyolefin
Jacket LSZH (Low smoke zero halogen)
Approvals UL Listed
ETL verified to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568‐B.2.1 Cat 6
Operating ‐20 Deg. C up to +60 Deg. C
temperature
Frequency tested 250 MHz
Up to
Delay Skew 25ns‐45ns / 100m MAX.
Impedance 100 Ohms + / ‐ 6 ohms
Performance Attenuation, Pair‐to‐pair and PS NEXT, ELFEXT
characteristics to and PSELFEXT, Return Loss, ACR and PS
be provided along
with bid

1. PVC Channel
Flexible white /ivory, Double Locking, Suitable size, ISI mark

2. UTP Patch Panel
UTP Patch Panels
Type 24‐port, Modular, PCB based, Unshielded Twisted
Pair, Category 6, ANSI/TIA/EIA 568‐B.2.1
Category Category 6
Circuit Port Labeling for port identification on each of 24‐
Identification Ports
Scheme
Port Identification Labels on each of 24/48‐ports (to be included in
Supply)
Height 1 U (1.75 inches)
Modular Jack 750 mating cycles
Wire terminal (110 200 termination cycles
block)
Accessories Strain relief and bend‐limiting boot for cable or rear
cable manager for cable support/ Cable Support
accessories
Jack contacts Phosphorous bronze, plated with gold
Panel Black, powder coated steel
Approvals UL listed/ETL Verified
Termination ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 A and B
Pattern
PMC: NSL E 96
Performance Attenuation, NEXT, PS NEXT, FEXT and Return Loss

3. UTP Jacks

UTP Jacks
Type PCB based, Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6,
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568‐B.2.1
Modular Jack 750 mating cycles
Wire terminal 200 termination cycles
Accessories Strain relief and bend‐limiting boot for cable or
conductor management piece to maintain pair
untwist
Integrated hinged/spring dust cover
Jack contacts Phosphorous bronze, plated with gold
Approvals UL listed/ETL Verified
Performance Attenuation, NEXT, PS NEXT, FEXT and Return
Characteristics to Loss
be provided with
bid

4. SMB
Surface Mount Box / Faceplates
Type 1‐port, Shuttered, White, with surface box for
surface mount applications
Material ABS/Polycarbonate
No. of ports One
Protection Shutters
Identification To be supplied with label for port identification

5. Patch chords
Workstation / Equipment mounting Cords
Type Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6,
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568‐B.2.1
Conductor 24 AWG 7 / 32, stranded copper
Length 3 / 7 feet
Plug Protection Matching colored boot to maintain bend radius
PMC: NSL E 97
Warranty 20‐year component warranty
Category Category 6
Terminals Phosphor Bronze with gold plating
Jacket LSZH (Low Smoke Zero Halogen)
Insulation Flame Retardant

6. 24 Port switch

General  24‐port 10/100Mbps + 2 Nos. 1000 mbps base T
requirements:  All ports can auto‐negotiate between
10Mbps/100Mbps, half‐duplex or full duplex
and flow control for half‐duplex ports.
 Support 8K MAC address
 6.0 Gbps Switching fabric capacity for 24port
switch.
 Packet Forwarding Rate should be 6.5 Mpps
 Redundant power supply support (if required)
 Support IGMP V3 Snooping.
 Automatic medium‐dependent interface
crossover (Auto‐MDIX) to automatically adjust
transmit and receive pairs if an incorrect cable
type (crossover or straight‐through) is installed
on a copper port.
 Should support IPv6
 Should support a protocol that enables devices
connected through fiber‐optic or twisted‐pair
Ethernet cables to monitor the physical
configuration of the cables and detect when a
unidirectional link exists
 Should support enforcement of access privileges
when an endpoint attempts to connect to a
network example anti virus version.
 Should be able to discover devices that are
neighbors of already known devices.

Performance  Multi‐layer ACL and QoS control
 At least 8MB packet buffer per device.
PMC: NSL E 98
 Should support Per‐port broad cast, multi cast &
uni cast storm control.
 The switch must support Port Mirroring, Port
Trunking and 802.3ad LACP Link Aggregation
port trunks
 Support IEEE 802.3x flow control for full‐duplex
mode ports.
 Support 802.1D Spanning Tree and IEEE802.1W
RSTP, multiple Spanning Tree (V2)
 Unidirectional Link Detection Protocol for loop
avoidance in case of Unidirectional fiber.
 The Switch should be capable of detecting and
disabling the port to avoid the STP loop caused
due to single connectivity on the physical layer
on fiber ports.
 It should be possible to configure STP on a per
VLAN basis.
 Support 802.1Q VLAN, IGMP snooping,
 802.1p Priority Queues, port mirroring
 Support based on 802.1p priority bits with at
least 4 priority queues

Access control  Support port security
 Support Advanced Access Control Lists (ACL),
enhanced TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication
 Support 802.1x port‐based and MAC‐based
access control and authentication
 SSHv2 and SNMPv3 support
 DHCP snooping
 500 Access Control entries Supported.
 IGMPv3 snooping
 Unicast MAC filtering
 Unknown unicast and multicast port blocking
 IGMP filtering
 BPDU guard
VLAN  Support 802.1Q Tagged VLAN and port based
 The switch must support dynamic VLAN
Registration .
 Dynamic Trunking Protocol or equivalent.
 VLAN Trunking Protocol or equivalent
 802.1s, 802.1w, Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree
protocol
PMC: NSL E 99

Protocol and Traffic  Simple Network Time Protocol support
 Multicast filtering per port should be supported
 Switch should support traffic segmentation
 Traffic classification should be based on user‐
definable application types: TOS, DSCP, Port
based, Mac address, IP address, TCP/UDP port
number

Management  Switch needs to have RS‐232 console port for
management via a console terminal or PC
 Must have support SNMP upto ver.3
 Support Web‐based management, Web GUI
traffic monitoring
 Web management should enable management
for a minimum of 15 geographically distributed
switches through a common browser window.
 CLI management support. and IP filtering on the
management interface
 Must have have TFTP support
 Layer 2 trace route
 Switch should CPU utilization monitoring and
Port description

PMC: NSL E 100

Electrical: UPS Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC

Three‐Phase Uninterruptible Power System

Configuration Details:

UPS System, connected in parallel redundant configuration in load sharing mode, shall be provided to supply
uninterrupted power for the Server/ Network loads. Battery banks to give total 15 minutes back up on the
above mentioned UPS system shall be provided for the units feeding to Server/Network loads.

1.0 General
1.1 Summary
The units will have state‐of‐the‐art technology with high degree of reliability in operation for continuous
operation, i.e. 24 hrs, 365 days an year. This specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics
and requirements for a continuous duty, highly reliable stand alone type true on‐line double conversion UPS
system using PWM IGBT technology i.e. the Rectifier of the UPS system converts the input AC power to DC and
then the inverter converts the DC into clean AC power. The UPS must use the most advanced Microprocessor
technology. The UPS shall provide high quality AC power for sensitive electronic equipment loads. It should
also supply clean power automatically without any break in the supply in the absence of raw power. Under no
conditions will the protected system get direct supply from the raw mains unless there is fault in the protected
system. The Block diagram of the UPS system should be as shown in Block Schematic Fig. 1.
Mains ~ - output
- ~

Fig‐1
The major items constituting of the blocks of the above schematic Fig.‐1 are shown as below in Fig‐1(A).

Incoming

mains 415 V,
3 Phase

Fig.‐1(A)

PMC: NSL E101


The main circuit and the bypass can use the same or different sources as per the discretion of customer. The
details of the above schematic are as given below:
Q1: Connects rectifier to Utility source
Q2: Connects bypass to Utility source

Q5: Connects UPS output to the Load

Q3BP: Connects bypass input source to the load switch

KM: Battery Circuit Breaker

TR2: Galvanic Output Isolation Transformer (Delta‐ Zigzag)

REC: Rectifier Module

INV: Inverter Module

System Configuration and operation in normal conditions:

The utility source should be input at Q1 and should pass through the fuse, and inductor and into the high
frequency rectifier, which will convert the AC power into DC power. The rectifier should have PFC and charger
function and should make use of soft start and microprocessor based control to improve the system immunity
against surge, improve the stability of the DC bus voltage, reduce the charging current ripple and prolongs the
battery life.

The output should be isolated from the load by Delta‐Zigzag transformer, static switch, fuse and isolators.
The bypass source should be input at Q2 and output through the bypass static switch as mentioned in above
Fig‐1(A).

The main elements of the configurations are:
- Fully Microprocessor Controlled SCR Based, 6 pulse Rectifier
- Fully Microprocessor Controlled PWM IGBT Based Inverter
- Delta / Zig Zag Isolation Transformer at the O/P of the Inverter to provide Galvanic isolation and
separating the I/P and O/P Neutral.
- Full Capacity Static Switch at the O/P of the Inverter
- Full Capacity Static Switch in the Bypass path
- Full Capacity Manual Bypass Switch

Please note that all the above mentioned elements should form a part of the UPS system and are to be in
the same sequence as mentioned in the Fig.‐1 (A) along with all the Isolators etc. within a Single Cabinet.
2.0 Modes of Operation

The UPS shall be able to operate as an on‐line reverse transfer system in the following modes:

PMC: NSL E102

2.1. Normal mode
When the utility is normal, the UPS powers the load through the rectifier and inverter and charges the batteries
at the same time, as shown in Bold Lines in Fig‐2 (A).
Bypass
Mains ~ - output
- ~

Fig‐2 (A)
2.2. Emergency/ Battery Mode ‐ When the utility fails, the UPS system shall switch to battery mode without
interruption and the battery will power the load through the inverter.
The UPS shall return to normal mode automatically when the utility returns to normal, shown in Bold Lines in
Fig‐2(B).
Bypass
Mains ~ - output
- ~

Fig.‐2(B)

2.3. Recharge ‐ Upon restoration of AC input power, during the ‘Emergency’ mode of operation, the
rectifier/charger shall automatically restart, walk‐in, and gradually assume the inverter and battery recharge
loads.

2.4. Bypass ‐ In the event of an inverter overload which last longer than the typical time, an output short circuit
or a fault on the inverter, the UPS will transfer the load to bypass. There should be two kinds of bypass modes.
In the first kind, the UPS can be set to return to normal mode automatically when the fault is cleared. In the
second kind, the UPS is set to return to normal mode only with a manual transfer.
When the main UPS circuit fails, the battery is depleted or a severe fault occurs, the inverter shall be shut
down and the system will remain in the bypass mode. The system can return to normal mode only with a
manual reset after the fault is cleared, shown in Bold Lines in Fig‐2(C).
Bypass
Mains ~ - output
- ~

Fig.‐2(C)

PMC: NSL E103


2.5. Maintenance Mode

When the UPS has to undergo routine maintenance, the UPS shall be set to maintenance mode by switching on
the maintenance bypass circuit breaker. The load will be powered from the maintenance bypass supply
without interruption.
During maintenance, the circuit breakers Q1, Q2, QF1 and Q5 should be switched off to ensure the safety of
maintenance personnel. As shown in Bold Lines in Fig‐2 (D).
Q3BP
Bypass Q2
Mains Q1 ~ - Q5 Output
- ~
QF1

Fig. –2(D)

2.6 Basic Functions

Battery Management Function ‐ The UPS has advanced battery management functions including battery fault
detection and backup time forecast.

Soft Start Function ‐ Complete delay soft start function can reduce the surge to the UPS unit and utility source.

Alarm and Protection Function ‐ The UPS can generate audible and visual alarm through LCD, input/output
contacts and network transmission. It can help maintenance personnel to locate and clear the faults that are
sent out in time, accurately and in detail.

Automatic Re‐start when Utility returns – On failure of the input mains supply the UPS goes to battery mode.
After the batteries are completely discharged the UPS system shuts down. It must automatically restart on the
resumption of the input supply.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 Design Requirements ‐ UPS Module

A. Voltage.

Input/Out voltage specifications of the UPS shall be:

PMC: NSL E104

Rectifier Input: (380) (400) (415) volts, three‐phase 4‐wire‐plus‐ground.
Bypass Input (if used): (380) (400) (415) volts, three‐phase, 4‐wire‐plus‐ground.
Output: (380) (400) (415) volts, three phase, 4‐wire‐plus‐ground.

B. OUTPUT LOAD CAPACITY

Specified output load capacity of the UPS shall be rated kVA at 0.8 lagging power factor.

1.2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. AC Input to UPS

A. Voltage Configuration: three‐phase, 4‐wire plus ground.
B. Voltage: (380) (400) (415) V
C. Voltage Range: +/‐15% of nominal.
D. Frequency: Field selectable 50Hz or 60 Hz
E. Frequency: Nominal frequency + 5%
F. Voltage distortion The harmonic content introduced into the mains supply shall comply with IEC 61000‐3‐4 /
AS2279 Part 2 for harmonic voltage distortion at the Point of Common Coupling (PCC) with other loads. Where
higher impedance Mains or Generator supplies are present, the manufacturer shall offer reduced current
distortion options to ensure IEC 61000‐3‐4 / AS2279 Part 2 requirements are complied to when interfaced with
the proposed UPS system.

2. AC Output, UPS Inverter

A. To isolate the input disturbances from the output side a Galvanic Isolation Transformer is mandatory
to be included in the design at the output of the Inverter.

B. Voltage: (380) (400) (415) V

C. Voltage Configuration: three‐phase, 4‐wire plus ground.

C. Voltage Regulation: ± 1% steady state.

D. Frequency: Field selectable 50 Hz or 60Hz, (+ 0.5 or 2Hz adjustable).

E. Frequency Slew Rate: 0.1 to 1Hz /sec adjustable

F. Phase Displacement: ± 1 degree for balanced load.

± 1 degree for 100% unbalanced load.

PMC: NSL E105

G. Voltage Distortion: 1% Typical 2% maximum for liner loads

<5% total harmonic distortion (THD) for 100% non‐linear loads with 3:1 crest factor.

H. Output Power Rating: Rated kVA at 0.8 lagging power factor.

I. Overload Capability: 110% for 60 minutes
125% for 10 minutes
150% for 1 minute
200% single phase for 30 secs

J. VOLTAGE TRANSIENT RESPONSE: ±5%

K. Transient Recovery Time: to within ±1% of output voltage within 20 milli secs

L. Voltage Unbalance: Balanced load 1%

100% unbalanced load 2%

M. Inverter Short Circuit Current Limit:
150% full load current for 5 seconds
220% single phase for 5 seconds

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION

1.3.1 The UPS shall be able to withstand the following environmental conditions without damage or
degradation of operating characteristics:

A. Operating Ambient temperature
UPS Module: 0ºC to 40ºC
Battery: 25 ± 5ºC

B. Storage/Transport Ambient Temperature
‐25ºC to 70ºC

C. Relative Humidity: <90% at 20ºC

D. Altitude Operating: to 1000 meters above mean Sea Level de‐rated for higher altitude applications. 1% per
100m between 1000 & 2000

E. Audible Noise
Noise generated by the UPS under any condition or normal operation shall not exceed 60 dbA measured 1.5
meters from surface of the UPS.

1.3.2 Design Requirements ‐ Matching Battery

PMC: NSL E106

A. Battery Cells: Sealed, lead‐acid, valve‐regulated.

B. Reserve Time: 15 minutes at full load, 0.8 power factor, with ambient temperature between 20 and 30ºC.

1.4 UPS Delivery Submittals

Submittal upon UPS delivery shall include:

One instruction manual: Manual shall include a functional description of the equipment with block diagrams,
safety precautions, instructions, step‐by‐step operating procedures and routine maintenance guidelines,
including illustrations.

1.5 Quality Assurance

1.5.1 Manufacturer Qualifications
A minimum of five year’s experience in the design, manufacture, and testing of solid‐state UPS systems is
required. Standards ISO90001, CE certified to level A of EN55022.

1.5.2 Factory Acceptance Test
Before shipment, the Contractor shall fully and completely test the system to assure compliance with the
specification. He will give a factory inspection call for acceptance of the ordered material by NBCC at his
manufacturer’s works. The manufacturer shall fully coordinate with NBCC as required by the inspecting team.
All expenditure towards conducting any test, to and fro airfare, lodging, boarding shall be borne by the
contractor within at his quoted rates.

2.0 PRODUCT

2.1 Fabrication

2.1.1 Materials
All materials of the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, high grade and free from all defects and shall not
have been in prior service except as required during factory testing.

2.1.2 Construction and Mounting
The UPS unit, comprised of input isolator, rectifier/charger, inverter, static transfer switch, maintenance
bypass switch, and static bypass input switch should be housed in a freestanding steel enclosure with key‐
lockable doors. Front access only shall be required for expedient servicing, adjustments, and installation. The
enclosure will be built to comply with IP20 when the doors are open. The UPS cabinet shall be cleaned, primed,
and painted with the manufacturer’s standard color. The UPS shall be constructed of replaceable
subassemblies. Printed circuit assemblies shall be plug‐in. Like assemblies and like components shall be
interchangeable.

2.1.3 Cooling
Cooling of the UPS shall be forced‐air. Low velocity fans shall be used to minimize audible noise output. Fan
power shall be provided by the UPS output. Temperature will be monitored by thermal sensors.

2.2 Components
PMC: NSL E107


2.2.1 Rectifier/Charger

A. General
The term rectifier/charger shall denote the solid‐state equipment and controls necessary to convert incoming
AC power to regulated DC power for input to the inverter and for battery charging. The rectifier/charger shall
be 12 Pulse three phase‐controlled thyristor bridge type with constant voltage/current limiting control
circuitry. Input Current harmonic has to be < 10 %

B. Input Current Walk‐In
The rectifier/charger shall contain a timed walk‐in circuit that causes the unit to gradually assume the load over
a 10‐second time interval after input voltage is applied.

C. Fuse Failure Protection
Power semiconductors in the rectifier/charger shall be fused with fast‐acting fuses, so that loss of any one‐
power semiconductor shall not cause cascading failures.

D. DC Filter
The rectifier/charger shall have an output filter to minimize ripple voltage into the battery. Under no
conditions shall ripple voltage into the battery exceed 1% RMS. The filter shall be adequate to insure that the
DC output of the rectifier/charger will meet the input requirements of the inverter. The inverter shall be able
to operate from the rectifier/charger with the battery disconnected.

E. Battery Recharge
In addition to supplying power for the inverter load, the rectifier/charger shall be capable of producing battery‐
charging current to recharge the battery. After the battery is recharged the rectifier/charger shall maintain the
battery at full charge until the next emergency operation. The charging shall be an automatic cycle per DIN
41772 characteristic I ‐U (boost to floating charge switching, with current measuring criteria and control during
recharge). Both float and recharge voltages shall be adjustable. The charge voltage can also be manually
controlled. The use of the inverter is inhibited during manual charging.

2.2.2 Inverter

A. General
The term inverter shall denote the solid‐state equipment and controls to convert DC power from the
rectifier/charger or battery to regulated AC power for supporting the critical load. The inverter shall be an
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor, phase‐controlled, pulse width modulated (PWM) design capable of proving
the specified AC output.

B. Overload Capability
The inverter shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads exceeding 100% and up to 150% of
full load current. A status indicator and audible alarm shall indicate overload operation. The UPS shall transfer
the load to bypass when overload capacity is exceeded.

C. Fault Clearing and Current Limit
Without bypass supply available to the inverter shall be capable of supplying an overload current of 200% of its
full‐load rating in excess of Thirty Seconds. For greater currents or longer time duration, the inverter shall
PMC: NSL E108

have electronic greater currents or longer time duration, the inverter shall have electronic current‐limiting
protection to prevent damage to components. The inverter shall be self‐protecting against any magnitude of
connected output overload (Vce Trip). Inverter control logic shall sense and disconnect the inverter from the
critical AC load without the requirement to clear protective fuses.

D. Output Frequency
The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled by an oscillator. The oscillator shall hold the inverter
output frequency to + .01% for steady state and transient conditions.

E. Isolation Transformer: To isolate the input disturbances from the output side a double wound delta‐zigzag
transformer to galvanically isolate the input from output is mandatory to be included in the design at the
output of the inverter as shown the Figure 3 below. The isolation transformer will be connected as shown in
the Fig 1(a). The combination of the inverter and Output isolation transformer shall form a separately derived
source wherein the Input neutral and the three Phases are completely isolated from the output neutral and the
three phases.

Dc Bus +500 V dc

R
Inverter Section

Y

B

N
DC Bus –500V dc

Isolation Transformer
(Delta Zigzag Type)

Fig. ‐ 3

2.2.3 Display and Controls

A. Monitoring and Control
The UPS shall be provided with a microprocessor based unit status display and controls section designed for
convenient and reliable user operation. A system controls section designed for convenient and reliable user
operation. A system power flow diagram, a percentage load and battery time remaining display shall be
provided as part of the monitoring and controls sections, which depicts a single‐line diagram of the UPS.
Illuminated visual indicators shall be of the long‐life light‐emitting diode (LED) type. All of the operator controls
and monitors shall be located on the front of the UPS cabinet. The monitoring functions such as metering, and
alarms shall be displayed on an alphanumeric LCD display. Additional features of the monitoring system shall
include:
Menu‐driven display with test format selectable in five (5) languages (English,
PMC: NSL E109

German, French, Spanish, or Italian).

B. Metering

The following parameters shall be displayed:
Battery voltage
Battery charge/discharge current
Input voltage and frequency
Output AC voltage line‐to‐line and line to neutral and % load used of nominal capacity for each phase.
Output AC current for each phase and neutral
Output frequency
Active Power (kW) Apparent Power (kVA)
Temperature ‐ Ambient, battery, inverter assembly module

C. Warning and Alarm Messages
Normal Operation Input breaker open
Output breaker open Rect. breaker open
Battery breaker open On Manual bypass
Bypass absent Bypass over limits
Bypass under limits Bypass freq. over limit
Bypass Phase Rotation Bypass SCR fail
Bypass inhibit Local Bypass inhibit remote
Load on bypass on bypass due to over temperature
Rectifier off Local Rect. off remotely
Rectifier Block Rectifier overload
Rectifier over temp Rectifier Fuse fail
Inverter off local. Inverter off remotely
Inverter block Inverter overload
Inverter over temperature. Inverter out of sync
Inverter over voltage Inverter under voltage
Inverter fuse fail D.C Volts High
D.C Volts low Inverter no voltage
Inverter Peak Volts low Battery under test
Battery test fail Discharge battery
Battery E.O.D. Boost Charge
DC Bus over volt Battery Low
Battery Fuse Fail Bat. Fast over volt
Bypass overuse Cut‐off overload
Cut‐off overtemp Cut‐off emergency stop
Overload Cut‐off max overload
Software Warnings
Bad EPROM program Err. LRC param. Pag 1
Err. LRC Param Pag 2 Err. LRC Param Pag 3
Err. LRC Alarm Hist Err. LRC Even Hist
Back‐up battery low Error LRC table
Error LRC Panel Modem Wrong Config
Modem no response Modem false command
PMC: NSL E110

Modem time‐out trasm Can bus no response
Autonomy XXXX min

D. Controls
Four pushbuttons shall be located on the operator control panel.
Enter
Escape
Up
Down
The push buttons shall permit the operator either to select options from a menu for display on the LCD winder
or to change the value of some parameters. One push‐button and alarm silence switch.

E. Power Status Diagram
A mimic panel shall be provided to depict a single line diagram of the UPS.
Indicating lights shall be integrated within the single line diagram to illustrate the status of the UPS. The three
LEDs shall indicate the following status.
Bypass voltage OK
Load on bypass
Load on inverter
Included in the power status diagram shall be an LED bar graph indicating % load with amber overload
indication. Also an LED bar graph indicating % battery time remaining shall be included.
Ethernet Connectivity Interface Port
An Ethernet Connectivity based interface port shall be provided for remote display of UPS status information
on a computer terminal (by others).

2.2.4 Static Transfer Switch

A. General
Static transfers switch and bypass circuit shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS. The static switch shall
be naturally commutated high‐speed static (SCR‐type) device rated to conduct full load current continuously
and shall have a contactor in the output of the inverter circuit to enable the critical load to be connected to the
inverter output or bypass power source. the static transfer switch control logic shall contain and automatic
transfer control circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals, and operating and alarm conditions.
This control circuit shall provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to an alternate bypass source, without
exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when an overload or malfunction occurs within the UPS, or for
bypassing the UPS for maintenance.

B. Uninterrupted Transfer

The transfer control logic shall automatically turn on the static transfer switch, transferring the critical AC load
to the bypass source, after the transfer logic senses any of the following conditions:
Inverter overload capacity exceeded
PMC: NSL E111

Critical AC load over voltage or under‐voltage
UPS fault condition.
The transfer control logic shall inhibit and automatic transfer of the critical load to the bypass source if any of
the following conditions are present:
Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding pre‐set limits
Bypass frequency out of limits
Bypass out‐of‐synchronization range with inverter output.

C. Uninterrupted Retransfer
Retransfer of the critical AC load from the bypass source to the invert output shall be automatically initiated
unless inhibited by manual control. The transfer control logic shall inhibit an automatic retransfer of the critical
load to the inverter if one of the following conditions exists:
Bypass out of synchronization range with inverter output
Inverter/bypass voltage difference exceeding pre‐set limits
Overload condition exists in excess of inverter full load rating
UPS fault condition present.

2.2.5 Maintenance Bypass Isolator

A. General
A manually operated maintenance bypass isolator shall be incorporated into the UPS cabinet to directly
connect the critical load to the input AC power source, bypassing the rectifier/charger, inverter, and static
transfer switch.

B. Maintenance Capability
With the critical load powered from the maintenance bypass circuit, it shall be possible to check out the
operation of the rectifier/charger, invert, battery, and static transfer switch.

C. Wall Mounted Battery Circuit Breaker (BCB)
A battery circuit breaker shall be provided to isolate the battery from the UPS. This breaker together with
battery circuit breaker controller board shall be in a separate wall mounted enclosure. The battery breaker
provides a manual disconnecting means, short circuit protection, and over‐current protection for the battery
system. When opened, there shall be no battery voltage in the UPS enclosure.

D. Split Bypass standard feature
UPS shall have both a rectifier input and bypass input. Two separate input sources must be provided. An
internal bypass circuit breaker shall be provided for connection to the bypass source.

3.0 FIELD ENGINEERING SUPPORT
The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a national field service network staffed by factory trained field
service engineers to provide start up, maintenance and repair of the UPS equipment.

PMC: NSL E112

UPS TOPOLOGY True on‐line double conversion PWM IGBT
based.
A INPUT
1 Input voltage 415V, 3 phase, 4 wires
2 Input voltage tolerance +10 % , ‐15%
3 Input frequency 50 Hz
4 Input frequency tolerance +/‐ 5 %
5 Input current limit 115% (Adjustable between 100 ‐ 125%)
6 Power walk ‐ in period 30 seconds
7 Input circuit IGBT rectifier. Input current harmonics
<10%.
8 Inbuilt Input & Bypass Isolator with SFU Required, Isolator with fuse unit.

PMC: NSL E113

B OUTPUT
1 Module full load rating KVA/ KW 40 kVA/ 32 kW
2 Rated voltage 415 V 3 PH, N
3 Rated current Vendor to specify
4 Phase Voltage asymmetry (For Three Phase
output UPS only )
a] Balance load 1%
b] 100% unbalanced load 2%
5 Voltage Phase shift ( In case of three phase
Output UPS )
‐ with balanced load 120 +/‐ 1 deg
‐ With Unbalanced laod 120 +/‐ 1 deg
6 Output voltage adjustment range +/‐ 5%
7 Phase displacement ( In case of three phase
Output UPS )

a] Balance load 120 deg. +/‐ 1 deg
b] 100% unbalanced load 120 deg. +/‐ 1 deg
8 Output power factor range 0.7 to unity
9 Internal oscillator stability +/‐ 0.2 %
10 Mains synchronization tracking +/‐ 1 Hz (settable to +/‐2)
11 Max. rate of change of frequency 1 Hz. Per second
12 Output voltage harmonics
a] Linear load < 1%
b] Non‐linear load ( Crest factor of 3:1) < 5 %
13 Crest Factor 3 : 1
14 Overload rating 110% for 60 minutes
125% for 10 minutes
150% for 60 seconds
15 Overload trip 10 min at 125% reducing to 60 seconds at
150%
16 Inverter Efficiency > 92 %
17 Current limit short Set at 150% of the output power
18 Transient Response
a] 100% load change < +/‐ 5%
b) Manual transfer of load from UPS to 0 msecs. when in sync
bypass and vice‐versa
C] Automatic transfer of load form UPS 0 msecs. in sync
to bypass
19 Transient recovery time Recovery to +/‐ 3 % in < 4 msec.
20 Manual Bypass Isolator One with each UPS Module
PMC: NSL E114

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 2X 40 KVA UPS SYSTEM

C DC CHARACTERISTICS
1 Nominal DC bus voltage 408 V
2 Battery isolation Manually closed circuit breaker with under
voltage release and over current trip
3 Battery fully discharge voltage 326V
4 Allowable voltage drop in battery cables 3 volts at end of discharge voltage.
5 Battery float voltage 459 V
6 Battery end voltage 340 V
7 DC Bus voltage ripple < 1 RMS
8 Battery recharge current limit Amps, Vendor to specify
9 No. of cells Vendor to specify

D CONTROLS
1 Charger input Isolator
2 Battery circuit breaker (mounted separately in its own enclosure)
3 Inverter output Isolator
4 Bypass line Isolator
5 Maintenance Bypass Isolator
6 Alarm acknowledge / Reset button
7 Inverter On‐Off Pushbutton for Manually switching of the Inverter
8 Emergency off push button
E MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
1 LCD panel for Measuring Input Voltage, Output voltages, Output currents and Frequency,
Battery Voltage and Charging / Discharging current.
2 LCD panel should display status of the Battery capacity and backup Time in minutes.

E PROTECTIONS
1 RC surge suppressor.
2 Sustained under voltage on input side
3 Phase loss on input side.
4 Negative sequence on input side
5 Semiconductor fuses in the lines for thyristor
6 Snubber circuit for device dv/ dt protection
7 Charger input current limit
8 HRC fuses for filter capacitors
9 Battery current limit
10 DC over voltage
PMC: NSL E115

11 Low battery
12 Semiconductor fuses at inverter output
13 Overload
14 Over temperature for the inverter
15 HRC fuses in the control circuit

F INDICATIONS (ALARMS)
1 Inverter Failure
2 Overload (if load exceeds 100%)
3 Overload shutdown
4 Emergency shutdown
5 Equipment over temperature
6 Maintenance Bypass ON
7 DC over voltage
8 Low battery
9 Battery circuit breaker open
10 Battery on load
11 Mains failure
12 Rectifier Failed or Off
13 Inverter Unsynchronized
14 Load on bypass
15 Output voltage error

G. DC link characteristic for total 15 Min.
battery run on 2 x 40 KVA KVA UPS System
No. of SMF lead acid batteries Vendor to Specify rating and no.
AH rating of one 15 Mins. Bank Vendor to Specify rating and no.
Model / Make G & Y/ Panasonic/ Rocket
Float voltage 459 V
Final discharge voltage 340 V
Voltage tolerance +/‐ 1 %
DC ripple < 1 %
Charging current limit 10 %
Battery Isolation With U/V release type Battery Circuit Breaker

PMC: NSL E116


Mechanical Dimensions:

Weight of UPS – Kg Vendor to specify
Dimension of UPS ( L x D x H ) in mm Vendor to specify
Ventilation Forced air cooled with internal fans
Protection Level :
* with enclosure closed IP 20
* with front doors open IP 20

Environmental:

Operating temperature 0 – 40 deg.C.
Relative humidity < 90 % (20 deg. C.)
Altitude 1000 m
Storage temp. from ‐25 to + 70 deg. C.

PMC: NSL E117

Electrical: CCTV,& Access Control Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CCTV & ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS:
Max. Ambient Temperature : 45 degree C and 50 degree C ( designed)
Min. Ambient Temperature : 4 degree C
Max. R H : 97%
Min. R H : 30%
Altitude : 1000 meters

INSPECTION OF SITE:
The bidder should inspect and examine the site and its surrounding and shall satisfy as to the nature of the
ground and sub soil, the quantities and nature of work, materials necessary for completion of the work
and their availability, means of access to site and in general to obtain all necessary information as to risks,
contingencies and other circumstances which may influence or affect his offer. No extra claim consequent
on any misunderstanding or otherwise shall be allowed.

DESIGN CONCEPT & SCOPE OF WORK :

1) IP CCTV SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

(i) DESIGN CONCEPT:
• The entire IP surveillance system is designed to control and monitor the facility.
• There are two types of cameras shall be installed to monitor the movement of the people as follows:
‐ IP fixed dome camera indoor type
‐ IP fixed dome camera indoor type with Day & Night Capability.
• IP fixed dome camera shall be installed at the entrances and connecting corridors of the main entrance,
hub room, server room, lobbies service areas, and fire exits
• All cameras shall be true IP camera.
•All outdoor cameras shall be in vandalproof housing.
•All the Cameras should be UL, CE and FCC Certified.
•All outdoor items for cameras like JBs, power supply, media convertor etc. shall be in water poof
and dust proof housing.
• Purchaser’s LAN network being laid by third party would be utilized to extend the IP CCTV connectivity to
central server
•All CCTV cameras shall have connectivity to PoE port of purchaser’s networking switches on LAN.
• UPS Power supply for each camera.
• Tentative locations of cameras are indicated in the IP CCTV layout drawing enclosed with this tender
•All the cameras and Software should be of the same make. Combination of different make for software
and cameras will not be considered.

(ii) SCOPE OF WORK:

•Supply, installation, testing and commissioning high quality fast‐acting IP CCTV surveillance system long
with power supply, power distribution and required accessories in the facility as indicated in BOQ.
• The entire system shall be as per BOQ, drawings and technical specifications enclosed with tender
documents.
• The price coated by the vendor should include all the expenses incurred in commissioning of all
cameras with power supply, accessories and other devices complete with software.
PMC: NSL E 118

• The CCTV surveillance system should consist of IP Fixed dome cameras (indoor type), IP fixed box type
cameras, software, server, power supply and cables.
• Video management software shall offer both video stream management and video stream
Storage management. Recording frame rate and resolution in respect of individual channel shall
be programmable.
• The system is presently designed for 35 cameras whereas not limited to the same and scalable
upto unlimited cameras if required in the future.
• Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job to assist in all phases of system installation,
start up and commissioning.
• Cat 6cable/fiber cable connectivity with all required hardware upto purchaser’s networking switches of
LAN, locations of networking switches in
• 230 volts AC Power supply distribution from UPS to each location of cameras along with DBs ,JBs, cabling
work etc. with required accessories.
• Power supply unit as required for cameras.
• Integrated testing and commissioning of CCTV system on LAN being provided by the third party
in faility.
• Training & handing over of all materials, equipment and appliances.
• Any other items/accessories required for installation, testing and commissioning of CCTV system.
• No extra cost shall be paid for miscellaneous items if required to complete the work as per the
design concept.
• The contractor shall submit the technical specifications and GA drawing for approval before commencing
the work at site.
Detailed Technical Specifications:
1). Fixed Dome Type IP Colour Cameras:

Description
1 IP Fixed Dome Day/Night Very High Resolution HD1080P (2.1MP) WDR Indoor Camera
1/2.8" or bigger Progressive CMOS Sensor
Wide dynamic range support
Minimum Illumination : Day 0.5 lux / Night 0.05 lux
3mm‐9mm varifocal, Auto Iris lens
Adjustable Horizontal coverage between 40° to 110°
Manual pan/tilt adjustment up to 350°/+‐90°
Automatic Gain Control, BLC, White balance: On/Off
3D Noise reduction: ON/Off
Tamper Detection: On/Off
Compression : Dual H.264 streams
Resolution & FPS Maximum Performance: Stream 1: 1920 x 1080 @ 25FPS and Stream 2:
720 x 576 @ 25FPS on two streams respectively at the same time
Bandwidth : 64Kbps to 8Mbps
Built‐in Multi‐zone motion detection
Unicast, Multicast, RTP, TCP, UDP, HTTP, IGMP, ICMP, DHCP, DNS, ONVIF
10/100 Base‐T Auto sensing, Half/Full Duplex (RJ45)
PMC: NSL E 119

S/N Ratio: >50db
Built in SD card slot to support up to 32GB storage for local recording with configurable
support for Continuous, Motion triggered, Network failure triggered, Input triggered.
Power : 802.3af class 3 PoE and 12VDC/24VAC auto sensing
Vandal resistant clear bubble surface mount enclosure.
Operating Temp: 0° C to 50° C
Humidity : 90% (Non‐condensing)
UL,CE and FCC certified
Warranty: Minimum 4 year Manufacturer warranty

2). Fixed Box Type IP Color Cameras:

Description
IP Fixed Box Day/Night Very High Resolution HD1080P 1920x1080, WDR Indoor Camera
1/2.8" or bigger Progressive CMOS Sensor
Wide dynamic range support
Minimum Illumination : Day 0.5 lux / Night 0.05 lux
3.1‐8mm varifocal, Auto Iris, Full HD, D/N lens
IR sensitivity between 680 to 1100nm IR cut filter
Manual pan/tilt adjustment up to 350°/+‐90°
Automatic Gain Control, BLC, White balance: On/Off
3D Noise reduction: ON/Off
Tamper Detection: On/Off
Compression : Dual H.264 streams
Resolution & FPS Maximum Performance: Stream 1: 1920 x 1080 @ 25FPS and Stream 2:
720 x 576 @ 25FPS on two streams respectively at the same time
Bandwidth : 64Kbps to 8Mbps
Built‐in Multi‐zone motion detection
Unicast, Multicast, RTP, TCP, UDP, HTTP, IGMP, ICMP, DHCP, DNS, ONVIF
10/100 Base‐T Auto sensing, Half/Full Duplex (RJ45)
S/N Ratio: >50db
Built in SD card slot to support up to 32GB storage for local recording with configurable
support for Continuous, Motion triggered, Network failure triggered, Input triggered.
Audio IN and Audio out for two way audio communication using suitable microphones
and speakers
At least one potential free Alarm IN and one Alarm out
Power : 802.3af class 3 PoE and 12VDC/24VAC auto sensing
Vandal resistant enclosure with IP66 rated, built in Heater and Blower, Sun shield.
Operating Temp: 0° C to 50° C
Humidity : 90% (Non‐condensing)
UL,CE and FCC certified
Warranty: Minimum 4 year Manufacturer warranty
PMC: NSL E 120

3). Network Video Management Software
A NVMS SERVER SOFTWARE
1 The NVMS software shall consist of an MS‐SQL 2005 or better based Main Directory
Database, Failover directory, Recording Server licenses, Failover recording, Digital Virtual
Matrix, Incident Reports and Alarm Management. All the related software licenses should
be the part of the offered system.
2 Vendor should consider additional server for maintaining system administration database
if required by their offered system configuration apart from two (minimum) recording
servers.
3 The NVMS system should be accessible from at least 25 computers from the network for
system administration and video monitoring with minimum 5 simultaneous users. System
administration and monitoring can be distributed depending on the sub division of the
surveillance areas/zones. Even though system should allow to create unlimited user ID’s in
the system.
4 The NVMS shall support up to 70 camera connections in single directory.
5 The NVMS Archive Server, for video, shall be capable to support and manage 65 cameras
@ 1920x1080 @ 25FPS or 150 camera @ 1280x720 @ 25FPS or 230 cameras @ 704x576
@ 25FPS. But considering the future intention to zonalise the recording not more than
120 cameras be loaded on any server during initial design of the system.
6 The NVMS shall support web based clients connecting to the NVMS system via the
Internet.
7 The NVMS shall be based on a true open architecture that allow for use of non‐proprietary
PC and storage hardware that shall not limit the storage capacity and shall allow for
gradual upgrades of recording capacity
8 The NVMS should allow to configure automatic scheduled backup of videos from user
selected cameras to specified network drive. It should also allow to configure specific
timings of the day whose video need to be backed up.
9 The NVMS shall provide module to allow access of system through iPAD, iPHONE, Android
phones. At least one license for the same shall be supplied.
10 The NVMS shall provide the facility so as any Android OS smart phone can capture the
video using its in‐built camera and stream it to the NVMS server through 3G, 4G, LTE or
wi‐fi network. NVMS shll have the capability to automatically popup this video and also
indicate the GPS location of the smart phone. At least one license for this facility shall be
supplied.
11 The NVMS shall provide alarm management module without the need of any additional
license.
a) The alarm management shall be able to set any monitor or groups of monitors to
automatically display cameras in response to alarm inputs.
b) The alarm management shall be able to reset automatically or manually alarmed
video.
c) The alarm management shall allow for multiple modes of alarm handling capability,
these modes to be programmed within the same system.

B NVMS CLIENT
1 The NVMS client shall perform the following applications simultaneously without
interfering with any of the Archive Server operations (Recording, Alarms, etc.):
a) Live display of cameras
b) Play Live audio
c) Broadcast audio to remote locations
PMC: NSL E 121

d) Live display of camera sequences
e) Live display of panoramic camera views
f) Control of PTZ cameras
g) Playback of archived video and audio
h) Playback of panoramic camera clips
i) Retrieval of archived video and audio
j) Instant Replay of live video and audio
k) Instant Replay of panoramic camera clips
l) Use of graphical controls (maps)
m) Configuration of system settings
2 The NVMS client applications shall support any form of IP network connectivity, including:
LAN, WAN, VPN, Internet, and Wireless
3 The NVMS client applications shall support IP Multicast (UDP) and Unicast (UDP) video
streaming.
4 NVMS Client MONITOR Application
a) The Client Monitor application shall allow for live monitoring of video and audio.
i The Monitor shall enable view of up to 25 video tiles simultaneously on a
single monitor.
ii The IP Based NVMS Shall provide more than 15 tile layouts on each of the VGA
monitors independently including below formats
1) Full screen, Quad, 3x3, 4x4, 5x5, 1 + 9 (One large and 9 small view),
1+11 (One large and 11 small view), 1+12 (One large center tile and 12
small view), 1+15 (One large and 15 small view), And more
b) The NVMS Monitor application shall allow operators to view an instant replay of
any camera or audio input (microphone).
i The operator shall be able to define the amount of time he wishes to go back
from a predefine list or through a custom setup period.
ii The operator shall be able to control the playback with play, pause, forward,
and speed buttons.
c) The NVMS Monitor application shall allow operators to add bookmarks to recorded
clips of video or audio
d) The NVMS Monitor application shall display all camera sequences created in the
system.
e) The NVMS Monitor application shall allow for unlimited cameras sequences, which
can be run independently of each other on either digital monitor tiles or analog
CCTV monitors.
f) The NVMS Monitor application shall allow operators to control (Pause/Play, skip
forwards, skip backwards) Camera Sequences, without affecting other operators’
ability to view and control the same sequence.
5 The NVMS should provide the application which should be integrated to the offered
NVMS and provide the below mentioned Incident Reporting and backup mechanism.
Offered prices should include the price of this application.
a) This application should provide the facility to create the incident reports for specific
incidents.
b) It should be possible to access recorded video within the NVMS system for playback
and export from this application.
c) It should also allow the operator to write the text, attach the snapshots, video clip,
audio clip or any other type of attachment which can be used in connection with
this incident and form the entire incident report.
d) Entire report should be archived on specific portion on the storage and should be
accessible from the web browser.
e) It should create the library of all the reports and options should be available to
search the required report by time frame, subject, report number etc.
PMC: NSL E 122

f) It should be possible to send these reports by email or archived on offline media.
6 Software shall have the facility to monitor the desktop of any networked computer in
camera tiles. We intend to use this facility to create the central monitoring display of all
the systems (BMS, FAS, ACS, PIDS etc.) on same monitor simultaneously.

C ALARM MANAGEMENT
1 The IP based NVMS shall provide alarm management module
2 The IP based NVMS shall notify a user on any alarm set in the system
3 The NVMS user shall be able to support multiple alarms
4 The NVMS system administrator shall be able to set for each user the maximum alarms to
be viewed at one time
5 It should be possible to populate the alarm on the maps indicating there actual location
and current status.
6 It should be possible to drag the alarm related video on tile directly from the map.
7 It should also be configurable to popup the procedural URL/standard operating procedure
for alarm handling specific to the active alarm.
8 Alarms should be prioritized and displayed in different color for easy understanding of
operators.
9 The NVMS user shall be able to forward alarms to other users
10 The NVMS alarm database shall provide multi time schedule support and shall be able to
save the alarm database for different period of time as the recorded video schedule.

PMC: NSL E 123

Electrical: AV System Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC Center,
Okhla, New Delhi
AUDIO VIDEO SYTEM

1. Professional display monitor 75” Class (75" diagonal) with d‐LED technology, with a contrast
ratio of up to 4,000:1 with local dimming set to high, Full 1920 x 1080 (1080p) Resolution, High
Brightness (320 cd/m²). Extensive Interface Capability includes as standard interfaces HDMI input
x1, D‐Sub 15‐pin RGB input, RS‐232C input/output, DVI‐D input, Component/Composite, stereo
audio (1/8”) input x 1, stereo audio (1/8”) output.

a. Scheduling of LFD. Max. Resolution 1,920 x 1,080 pixels, Max. Display Colors’ (approx.) 1,064
million colors, Pixel Pitch (H x V) 0.2865 x 0.8595 mm, Max. Brightness 320 cd/m2, Contrast
Ratio 4000: 1.
b. Viewing Angle (H/V) 178°/178° , Response Time 4 ms (gray to gray, avg.), Computer Input
Video Analogue RGB (0.7 Up‐p) [75], Digital (conforms to DVI 1.0 standards) Synchronization
Horizontal/vertical separation (TTL positive/negative), Sync on green.
c. RS‐232C D‐sub 9‐pin (input x 1, output x 1), Mounting VESA 400 mm x 400 mm, Power
Supply AC 100 ‐ 240 V~ (+/‐ 10 %), 50/60 Hz, Power Consumption 247W. Operating
Temperature 0°C to 40°C.
d. Built in Speaker (10W + 10W), PIP/PBP, Narrow Bezel, Light Weight, RS232 In/Out, 1 D‐Sub &
1 HDMI.
e. Standby Power Consumption 1.0W (standby mode in Standard), 0.5W (standby mode in Low
Power). Operating Humidity 10% to 80% RH.

Ratio 5000: 1.
1 HDMI.

PMC:NSL E 124

Okhla, New Delhi

Ratio 5000: 1.
1 HDMI.

4. Professional display monitor 55” Class (55" diagonal) with d‐LED BLU technology, with a contrast
ratio of up to 5,000:1 with local dimming set to high, for 24/7 Commercial Use, Full 1920 x 1080
(1080p) Resolution, High Brightness (450 cd/m²). Extensive Interface Capability includes as
standard interfaces D‐Sub, Component, Composite, HDMI, DVI, USB, SD, RS232C In/Out, IR In/Out
and more. Easy media sharing and screen control with built‐in Wi‐Fi.

a. Max. Resolution 1,920 x 1,080 pixels, Max. Display Colors’ (approx.), Max. Brightness 450
cd/m2, Contrast Ratio 5000: 1 Wi‐Fi and All Share Cast.
d. Video: VGA (D‐Sub 15 Pin), DVI‐D, Display Port 1.2 Component/Composite, HDMI, Audio:
Stereo Mini Jack. Output Video: Display Port 1.2 (Loop‐Out), Audio: Stereo Mini Jack, external
control RS232C (In/Out) thru Stereo Jack, RJ45

5. Projection & Video Display System: 4000 or above ANSI Lumens Brightness, 3 D ready , DLP Chip
x 1 with Brilliant Color Technology with 6 segment color wheel, support 1080p, 1080i, 720p,
576i, 540p, 480p, 480i; NTSC, PAL, SECAM Multi Media Projector, True XGA, Auto Keystone, LAN
(RJ‐45) Port etc with Standard Lens, Lamps with Wireless e‐Projector gateway, Uniformity min.
PMC:NSL E 125

Okhla, New Delhi
85%, Contrast Ratio > 2200:1, Zoom, Auto focus with minimum 10 watt speaker minimum 20,000
hrs lamp life .

a. Brightness 4000 ANSI Lumens, Contrast Ratio 1400:1.

b. Light source LED Hybrid

c. Keystone correction manual

d. Color Reproduction Full color (16.77 Million colors)

e. Power consumption Operating power: 350W (with Eco Mode “Eco 1” selected), 430W (with
Eco Mode Off “Bright” selected) stand by 0.4 w (LAN OFF), 4.8 w (LAN ON).

f. Operating Temperature 41~95°F, Operating humidity 20~80% (non condensation).

g. Mini D‐Sub 15 pin x 2 Also use as Ycbcr/YPbPr input— commercially available adapter required,
Native Resolution 786,432 pixels , HDMI Type A x 1, Mini D sub 15 pin x 1 RCA (R/L) x1, Stereo
mini x 2.

6. Projection & Video Display System 100" Optical Motorized Projection Screen Glass Beaded Dust‐
Resident, Flame retardant, Mildew resistant, Projection Surface, built in tubular synchronous
motor system with IR receiver, high gain (> 2) & viewing angle, Noise less Up/Down operation,
Image Size 2420x1830.

a. Glass Beaded Screen surface can be cleaned, flame retardant, and Mildew
resistant, viewing angle is 35°and Gain is 2.8.

b. Matte White Screen surface can be cleaned, flame retardant, Mildew resistant,
viewing angle is 55°and Gain is 1.2.

c. Product Specification peaceful and smooth tubular motor, heat protection
system, which prolongs motor's life. It's our most economical and popular
motorized screen.

d. High quality screen, offers clear and vivid image.

e. IR and RF are available, changing the traditional control ways, which make it easy
to operate.

f. Furnished with junction box and 3‐position wall switch for recessed wall
mounting .Available with 110V and 220V motors.

g. Be suit for using in different places, such as schools, business affairs, home
cinemas, casino places and other entertainment sites, 120" 2430*1820 2620
2640 2640*95*140 2965*140*140.
PMC:NSL E 126

Okhla, New Delhi

7. Projection & Video Display System ‐ Retractable Motorized Micro Ceiling Lift Voltage: 220V 50Hx
or 110V 60H. Dimension: 350×280×130mm (L×W×H), Bottom Panel Dimension: 50cmx50cm,
Loading Capacity: 20KG, Travel Length: 100cm, Open cut in ceiling: 480x480mm.

8. Multimedia wooden podium with Dimension (mm) 590(w) x 600(h) x 1200(d)
And one key and all the equipments are locked and safe inside. It consists of an Interactive Tablet
Monitor, Built‐in goose neck microphone for ease of use. Sliding Shelf for placement of extra lap
top & For Documents. Inputs Built‐in RGB, USB, LAN Port. Audio in, Audio Out, AC Power etc.

9. Full swing wall mount kit tilt mechanism adjusts to provide fingertip tilt with most flat panels.
Cable Trac System provides built‐in cable management channels inside the arms for a clean
installation.

10. Table connectivity box with Power socket, VGA receptacle, Video 3.5MM stereo socket, HDMI,
VGA, C‐Video, Audio, Network, Telephone, Power etc. with Control Switch built‐in , Neat &
elegant topside, Input voltage: 110V‐220V/50‐60Hz, Surface Mountable Enclosure for Cables
AAPs. Dual‐Net socketLocking Device, Smooth Pneumatic Support Structure, Desktop Hidden
Connection Box, Mechanical .

11. Desktop Motorised Hidden Connection Box, l Locking Device, Smooth Motorised Support
Structure, VGA with Audio through cable and wirelessly both, HDMI, C‐Video, Audio, Network,
Telephone, Power etc. with Control Port built‐in, Neat & elegant topside, Input voltage: 110V‐
220V / 50‐60Hx, RCA, 3.5 mm Audio Jack, USB, Surface Mountable Enclosure for Cables with
cables & connectors as required

12. Professional display systems requiring a true 4x8 computer graphics and audio matrix operation.
Multimedia and presentation source, and acceptor selection.

a. 4 UXGA with loop on 15−pin HD connectors, 4 unbalanced stereo audio 3.5mm mini
jacks. 8 UXGA on 15−pin HD connectors, 8 balanced stereo audio terminal block
connectors.
b. Bandwidth (3dB) Video: 360MHz, Audio: 22kHz. Difference gain 0.05%.
c. Flexible Control Options front panel, RS−232 (K−Router Windows−based so ware is
included), RS−485, Ethernet and IR remote (included), embedded Web page.
d. Delayed Switching Mode Glitch−free switching of non−gen locked sources by se ng
the transition time of a switch from 0 to 3.5sec.
e. S/N ratio Video: 66dB @5MHz, Audio: 82dB, crosstalk Video: −52dB @5MHz, Audio:
Bal: <−70dB @20kHz. Input/output selector buttons, all, off, video, audio, AFV, store,
recall, take audio level, and lock buttons; RS −232, RS−485, and Ethernet control;
input and output level control, infrared.
f. Power consumption 100−240V AC, 19VA. Coupling Video: DC, Audio: AC.

13. Professional display systems requiring a true 8x4 computer graphics and audio matrix operation.
Multimedia and presentation source, and acceptor selection.
PMC:NSL E 127

Okhla, New Delhi

a. 8 UXGA with loop on 15−pin HD connectors, 8 unbalanced stereo audio 3.5mm mini
jacks. 4 UXGA on 15−pin HD connectors, 4 balanced stereo audio terminal block
connectors.
b. Bandwidth (3dB) Video: 360MHz, Audio: 22kHz. Difference gain 0.05%.
c. Flexible Control Options front panel, RS−232 (K−Router Windows−based so ware is
included), RS−485, Ethernet and IR remote (included), embedded Web page.
d. Delayed Switching Mode Glitch−free switching of non−gen locked sources by se ng
the transition time of a switch from 0 to 3.5sec.
e. S/N ratio Video: 66dB @5MHz, Audio: 82dB, crosstalk Video: −52dB @5MHz, Audio:
Bal: <−70dB @20kHz. Input/output selector buttons, all, off, video, audio, AFV, store,
recall, take audio level, and lock buttons; RS −232, RS−485, and Ethernet control;
input and output level control, infrared.
f. Power consumption 100−240V AC, 19VA. Coupling Video: DC, Audio: AC.

14. Automatic computer and presentation UXGA routing, Presentation systems with wall plates.

a. 2 computer graphics video with loop on 15−pin HD connectors, 2 unbalanced stereo
audio on 3.5mm mini jacks. 1 computer graphics video on a 15−pin HD connector, 1
unbalanced stereo audio on a 3.5mm mini jack.
b. BANDWIDTH (‐3dB) Video: 300MHz; Audio: >100 kHz, Difference gain 0.03%.
c. Automatic Standby Switching Switches from secondary input to primary input when a
signal is detected.
d. CROSSTALK Video: –59dB @5MHz; Audio: <–66dB @1kHz, S/N ratio video: 71dB;
Audio: 71dB weighted.
e. Maximum output level Video: 1.6Vpp; Audio: >10.5Vpp.

15. High−performance matrix switcher for HDMI signals It must relocks and equalizes the signal and
can route any input to any or all outputs simultaneously.

a. 4 HDMI input connectors and 8 HDMI output connectors.
b. Bandwidth 6.75Gbps (2.25Gbps per graphic channel), must support HDMI, EDID and
HDCP, resolution Up to UXGA; 1080p
c. Control Options Front panel, IR remote, RS−232, Ethernet, Support: 3D, Deep Color,
x.v.Color.

16. High−performance matrix switcher for HDMI signals It must relocks and equalizes the signal and
can route any input to any or all outputs simultaneously.

a. 8 HDMI input connectors and 4 HDMI output connectors.
c. Control Options Front panel, IR remote, RS−232, Ethernet, and Support: 3D, Deep
Color, x.v.Color.

17. High−performance matrix switcher for HDMI signals, unit automatically switches to the
secondary input whenever the primary video signal is interrupted.

PMC:NSL E 128

Okhla, New Delhi
a. 2HDMI input connectors and 1 HDMI output connectors.
c. HDMI Support Deep Color, x.v.Color, Lip Sync, up to 7.1 Uncompressed Audio
Channels, CEC.

18. High performance HDMI audio de−embedded unit can de−embed audio from the HDMI input or
from the HDMI output Audio Return channel to S/PDIF, TOSLINK and analog audio outputs
simultaneously.

a. Bandwidth 6.75Gbps (2.25Gbps per graphic channel), must support HDMI, EDID and
HDCP, resolution Up to UXGA; 1080p.
b. HDMI Support ARC and HDMI Uncompressed Audio Channels.

19. Touch Panel Control System Control Pack with Dual Bus Architecture 3‐Series Centralized
Control processor ‐ Built in 4x2 AV Switcher, 2 RS‐232 port, Eight IR, 4 Relays, 4 I/O Port and
Ethernet port, Power Supply, E‐Control and Isis 8.4" or more Active Matrix Touch Control panel
with accessibility, 4 Sets of IR Emitting Probes.

20. Control Pack with Dual Bus Architecture 3‐Series Centralized Control processor ‐ Built in 2 RS‐232
port, 5 IR, 2, 1USB ,1 Relays, 1 Input Port and Ethernet port, Power Supply, E‐Control or with
accessibility.

21. Touch Panel Control System: Wireless Access Point between Touch Panel & Control System.
a. Touch Panel Control System Wireless Access Point between Touch Panel & Control
System.

b. Processor CPU 32‐bit free scale Cold Fire Microprocessor.

c. Memory SDRAM 64 MB, NVRAM 256 kobo, Flash 4 MB, Compact Flash expandable
up to 2 GB (not included), Operating System, Real‐time, preemptive multi‐
threaded/multitasking kernel; FAT32 file system with long names; supports SIMPL
Windows and SIMPL+.

d. Ethernet With C2ENET‐1 10/100BaseT, auto‐negotiating, full/half duplex, static IP or
DHCP/DNS, SSL, TCP/IP, UDP/IP, CIP, SMTP, SNMP, built‐in Web server and e‐mail client;
supports e‐Control 2 Panel and Room View applications, With All above features plus
built‐in firewall, router, and network address translator (NAT).

e. Y‐Bus Connectors & Expansion Slots 40 Mb/s parallel communications; Internal
backplane for integrated control ports and Y‐Bus expansion slots, (6) DB9 male,
bidirectional RS‐232/422/485 ports, Up to 115.2k baud; Hardware and software
handshaking support; Ports C‐F support C2N‐NPA8 Network Poll Accelerator.

f. INFRARED‐SERIAL OUTPUT A ‐ H, (8) 2‐pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks, IR/Serial
output ports; IR output up to 1.2 MHz, 1‐way serial TTL/RS‐232 (0‐5 Volts) up to 115.2k
PMC:NSL E 129

Okhla, New Delhi
baud; Individual signal generator per port, allowing simultaneous firing of all ports/O
Versiports 1 ‐ 8, (1) 9‐pin 3.5mm detachable terminal block comprising (8) digital
input/output or analog input ports (referenced to GND);Digital Input Rated for 0‐24
Volts DC, input impedance 20k ohms, logic threshold 1.24 Volts DC;Digital Output
250mA sink from maximum 24 Volts DC, catch diodes for use with “real world” loads;
Analog Input Rated for 0‐10 Volts DC, protected to 24 Volts DC maximum, input
impedance 20k ohms; Programmable 5 Volts, 2k ohms pull‐up resistor per pin.

g. RELAY OUTPUT 1 ‐ 8, (2) 8‐pin 3.5mm detachable terminal blocks comprising (8) normally
open, isolated relays; Rated 1 Amp, 30 Volts AC/DC;MOV arc suppression across contacts,
Expansion Slots,(3) Y‐Bus expansion slots (Requires CAGE2 accessory, sold
separately);Accept all Y‐Bus control cards.

h. Z‐Bus Expansion Slots 300 Mb/s parallel communications; Backplane for Z‐Bus expansion
slots, Expansion Slot, (1) Z‐Bus expansion slot; Accepts all Z‐Bus control cards, Additional
Connectors, COMPUTER (2) DB9 female; Front and rear panel RS‐232 computer console
ports, (1) 4‐pin 5mm detachable terminal block; port, Master/Slave selectable;
Expandable via C2N‐NPA8 Network Poll Accelerator.

i. 50/60 Hamates with removable power cord, included, Ground (1) 6‐32 screw, chassis
ground lug, Reset Buttons, HW‐R Hardware reset (reboots the control system), SW‐R
Software reset (restarts the SIMPL program), LED Indicators, PWR (1 green) Indicated AC
power supplied to unit, NET (1 yellow) Indicates bus activity, MSG (1 red) Indicates
control system has generated an error message, LNK A (1 red) Indicates a valid
connection on LAN port A, LNK B (1 red) Indicates a valid connection on LAN port B, ACT
B (1 red) Indicates activity on LAN port B.

j. Power Requirements Main Power 2.3 Amps, 100‐250 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz, Available
Power 50 Watts (shared with control card expansion slots), Environmental Temperature
41° to 113°F (5° to 45°C), Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non‐condensing), Enclosure, Chassis
Steel, black matte powder coat finish, Faceplate Extruded aluminum, black matte powder
coat finish with polycarbonate label overlay, Mounting Freestanding or 2U 19‐inch rack‐
mountable (adhesive feet and rack ears included), Dimensions.

k. Height 3.56 in (9.04 cm);3.47 (8.81 cm) without feet, Width 17.03 in (43.26 cm); 19.0 in
(48.26 cm) with ears, Depth 10.31 in (26.19 cm),Weight 7.1 lb (3.22 kg) – with line cord.

22. Touch Panel Control System Programmable 8 Port Relay Module & 4 digital / analogue input
module 0‐24 Volts DC, low‐voltage relay, 6 Watts Power @ 12Volts / 240 V, 44k Input Impedance.
a. Connectors RELAY OUTPUT 1 ‐ 8, (1) 16‐pin 5mm detachable terminal block comprising
(8) normally open, isolated (form ‘C’) relays;, Rated 1 Amp, 30 Volts AC/DC;MOV arc
suppression across contacts.

b. Power Requirements Power Usage 3 Watts (0.125 Amps @ 24 Volts DC).

c. Environmental Temperature 41° to 113°F (5° to 45°C), Humidity 10% to 90% RH (non‐
condensing).
PMC:NSL E 130

Okhla, New Delhi

d. Construction Y‐bus expansion card, occupies (1) Y‐bus card slot in a 2‐Series control
system.

e. Dimensions Height 0.98 in (2.49 cm), Width 5.00 in (12.70 cm), and Depth 6.78 in (17.21
cm).

23. Programmable Lighting Control System 4 Preset Scene Zones, 2300 Watts Load capacity (800
Watts per Zone), Dimming of Incandescent/CFL / Halogen/Tungsten/T5 (with optional
ballast/interface), Fade time setting between 0‐59 Sec. or 1‐60 min. Channels, Control Port built‐
in Infrared Port serial with Front Panel, Lockout options to avoid accidental changes.

a. Multi‐Scene Preset Lighting Control System, Set up and Recall, Create lighting
scenes for common activities all at the touch of a button. Smooth Transitions,
Fade between lighting scenes – from instantly to one hour. Expand the System.

b. Accessory controls allow one‐touch control from any location, Integration,
Integrates easily with touch screens and other AV equipment. RTISSTM
Technology Included, Compensates for incoming line voltage variations,
frequency shifts, harmonics, and line noise. One Control, Just one model provides
control of all modern light sources. Reliability, Control is able to withstand short
between load hot and either load neutral or earth without damage. Provides
pushbutton recall of four preset lighting scenes, plus off. Allows setup of lighting
scenes using buttons on the Control Unit., Controls many light source types
directly, and others using power interfaces. Provides lockout options to prevent
accidental changes. Includes built‐in infrared receiver for operation with an
optional remote control, Specifications.

c. Input Power 120 V, 220‐240 V (non‐CE), 230 V (CE) or 100 V, 50/60Hz., Lightning
Strike Protection Meets ANSI/IEEE standard 62.41‐1980. Can withstand voltage
surges of up to 6000 V and current surges of up to 3000 A.

d. Lighting Sources/Load Types Controls the following lighting sources with a

smooth, continuous Square Law dimming curve or on a full conduction non‐dim
basis Incandescent, Tungsten, Magnetic Low Voltage Transformer, To‐Wire
Electronic Fluorescent Dimming Ballast, Neon and Cold Cathode, Controls the
following lighting sources with a smooth continuous Square Law dimming curve
through separate power interfaces, Electronic Low Voltage Transformer,
Electronic Fluorescent Dimming Ballast.

PMC:NSL E 131

Okhla, New Delhi
e. Preset Control 4 preset lighting scenes and off are accessible from the Control
Unit front panel.12 additional scenes are stored in the Control Unit. These scenes
are accessible via Wall stations and/or Control Interfaces., Light levels fade
smoothly between scenes. Fade time can be set differently for each scene,
between 0‐59 sec. and 1‐60 min. Fade time from Off is capped at 5 sec.

f. Design Features Meets IEC 801‐2. Tested to withstand 15kV electrostatic
discharge without damage or memory loss. Compensates in real time for
incoming line voltage variations No visible flicker with +/‐2% change in RMS
voltage/cycle and +/‐2% Hz change in frequency/second.10‐year power failure
memory automatically restores lighting to levels prior to power interruption.
Faceplate snaps on with no visible means of attachment.

g. System Communications and Capacities Low‐voltage type Class 2 (PELV) wiring
connects Control Units, Wall stations, and Control Interfaces, Up to 8 Control
Units may be linked to control up to 48 zones., Up to 16 total Wall stations and
Control Interfaces may be added for a total of 24 control points .Environment 32‐
104 °F (0‐40 °C). Relative humidity less than 90% non‐condensing.

24. Touch Panel Control System interfacing device to controlling all the equipment. Wi‐Fi , 9.7‐inch
(diagonal) LED‐backlit Multi‐Touch display with IPS technology, 2048x1536 resolution at 264
pixels per inch, Built‐in 32.4‐watt‐hour rechargeable lithium‐polymer battery.

25. Video collaboration The End Point should be a codec based hardware. No software based
solution is accepted here. It should be from the same OEM.

a. Package Should Include Full HD 1080p camera, codec, Microphone Array, cables, and
remote control, Following Video Standards and Protocols should be supported: H.261,
H.263, and H.264. H.239 H.263 & H.264 Video error concealment.

b. Video Input It should have 2 x HD camera Interface It should have another 3 x HDMI port.
c. It should have 1 x VGA port. Video out It should have at least 3 x HDMI port to connect
displays.

d. Following People Video Resolution should be supported:
1080p, 60 fps from 1740 Kbps
PMC:NSL E 132

Okhla, New Delhi
4SIF/4CIF, 60 fps from 512 Kbps
SIF (352 x 240), CIF (352 x 288) from 64 kbps
QSIF (176 x 120), QCIF (176 x 144) from 64 kbps
W 288p from 128 kbps
W 448 from 384 kbps
W 576p from 512 Kbps
The same codec should also support 1080p, 60 fps from 1740 Kbps via a software
upgrade in future
e. Following Input and Output Content Video Resolution should be supported:
Input: WUXGA (1920 x 1200), HD (1920 x 1080i), HD (1920 x 1080p), WSXGA+ (1680 x
1050), UXGA (1600 x 1200), SXGA (1280 x 1024), WXGA (1280 x 768), HD (1280x720p),
XGA (1024 x 768), SVGA (800 x 600).
Output: WUXGA (1920 x 1200), HD (1920 x 1080), WSXGA+ (1680 x 1050), SXGA+ (1400 x
1050), SXGA (1280 x 1024), HD (1280 x 720), XGA (1024 x 768), VGA (640 x 480).
The Content Frame Rate of 5 ‐ 30 fps (up to 1080p resolution at 30 fps) should be
supported; The Content Frame Rate of 60 fps (up to 1080p resolution at 60 fps) should
also be supported on the same codec via a software upgrade. it should be possible to do
Content Sharing during a VC call.
f. Following Camera specifications should be met: Full HD, 1280 x 1080p CCD imager,
Optical Zoom ‐ 12X or more, Field of View 72 Degree.
g. Following Audio Input ports should be available on the codec: It should support 1 x
Microphone Array (supporting a total of 2 microphones), It should have 1 x HDCI ( for
camera), It should have another 1 x HDMI port, It should also have 1 x 3.5mm Stereo
Line‐in port. It should have at least 2 x USB 2.0, It should have at least 1 x RS‐232 Mini‐
DIN 8‐Pin port.
h. Following Audio Standards and Protocols should be met: Siren 22,AAC‐LD, 20 kHz
bandwidth with G.719, 14 kHz bandwidth with Siren 14, G.722.1 Annex C, 7 kHz
bandwidth with G.722, G.722.1, 3.4 kHz bandwidth with G.711,G.728, G.729A OR
Equivalent OR Better, It should support Automatic gain control, It should support
Automatic noise suppression, It should support Keyboard noise reduction, It should
support Live music mode, It should support Instant adaptation echo cancellation, It
PMC:NSL E 133

Okhla, New Delhi
should have Audio error concealment, It should support Lost Packet Recovery or
equivalent technology, It should support Stereo Surround technology.
i. Following Security specifications should be supported: Algorithms: SHA‐1, SHA‐256, AES
(256‐ bit, CBC/OFB/counter), PRNG, Authenticated access to admin menus, web interface
and telnet API, FIPS 140‐2 Validated Cryptography (Validation Certificate #918), PKI &
certificate management (TLS 1.0 and SSL 3.0).
j. It should also support Internal Multipoint license for up to 8 sites via software upgrade.
User will decide on how many units is this feature required. It should be possible to
integrate a conference phone (Optional).

26. Video collaboration digital microphone array is the only audio pickup device for video
Conferencing system which must have s consistent, reliable, 360‐degree
Voice pickup and Stereo Surround audio. 360‐degree directional pickup, three cardioids elements
per microphone Elements spaced 120 degrees apart, Each Ceiling Microphone Array should at
least covers a 24’ diameter. Dynamic microphone steering, Full‐duplex digital audio & Instant
Adaptation Echo Cancellation.

27. Video collaboration installed audio solution deliver clear, immersive sound for more productive
voice and video conferences.

a. Connectors RS‐232: DB9F, OBAM In/Out: IEEE 1394B, CLINK2 : RJ45, LAN: RJ45, Control
/Status: DB25F, Audio: Mini (3.5mm) quick connect terminal blocks, IR Receive: Mini
(3.5mm) quick connect terminal block.
b. Power should be Input voltage of 90‐250 VAC; 50‐60 Hz; line power requirements
(including 0.6 PF): 95VA, 0 to 40°C operating temperature.
c. Input Phantom power: 48 V DC through 6.8kOhm series resistor per leg, 7.5mA per
channel, software selectable, Analog input Gain: ‐20 to 64 dB on all inputs in 0.5 dB steps,
software adjustable, Maximum input amplitude: +20.4 dBu, 1% THD + N, Nominal level: 0
dBu (0.775V rms), Equivalent input noise: <‐122 dBu, 20 ‐ 20,000 Hz, Rs=150 Ohms (1%).
d. Output Output Gain: ‐100 to 20 dBu in 1 dB steps, software Maximum output amplitude:
+23 dBu, 1% THD + N, Nominal output level: 0 dBu (0.775 V rms), Output impedance: 50
Ohm, each leg to ground, designed to drive loads > 600 Ohms.
PMC:NSL E 134

Okhla, New Delhi
e. System at least has Frequency response: 20‐22,000 Hz, + 0.1 /‐ 0.3 dB, Idle channel noise:
<‐109 dB FS no weighting, 20‐ 20,000 Hz, ‐60dB FS, 0.997 kHz input signal, 0 dB gain.
Dynamic range: >109 dB FS no weighting, 20 ‐ 20,000 Hz, ‐60 dB FS, 0.997 kHz input
signal, 0 dB gain, Linearity: 0 dB FS to ‐122 dB FS +/‐ 1 dB.
28. Video collaboration 1080p60 video and content collaboration heightens realism and speeds
adoption.
a. Package includes camera, codec, cables, remote control, Microphone Array. Video
standards and protocols H.261, H.263, H.264 AVC, H.264 High Profile, H.264 SVC, RTV
H.239/ P+c H.263 & H.264 video error concealment
b. Video input 1 x HD camera (HDCI) , 1 x HDMI 1.3 & 1 x VGA. Video Output 2 x HDMI

c. Following People Video Resolution should be supported:
W 448 from 384 kbps

d. Following Input and Output Content Video Resolution should be supported:
XGA (1024 x 768), SVGA (800 x 600).
PMC:NSL E 135

Okhla, New Delhi
e. Following Camera specifications should be met: Full HD, 1280 x 1080p CCD imager,
f. Following Audio Input ports should be available on the codec: It should support 1 x
DIN 8‐Pin port.
g. Following Audio Standards and Protocols should be met: Siren 22,AAC‐LD, 20 kHz
h. Following Security specifications should be supported: Algorithms: SHA‐1, SHA‐256, AES
i. It should also support Internal Multipoint license for up to 6 sites via software upgrade.
User will decide on how many units is this feature required. It should be possible to
integrate a conference phone (Optional).
29. Video collaboration 1080p60 video and content collaboration heightens realism and speeds
adoption.

a. Package includes camera, codec, cables, remote control, Microphone Array. Video
standards and protocols H.261, H.263, H.264 AVC, H.264 High Profile, H.264 SVC, RTV
H.239/ P+C H.263 & H.264 video error concealment
b. Video input 1 x HD camera (HDCI) , 1 x HDMI 1.3 & 1 x VGA. Video Output 2 x HDMI
c. Following People Video Resolution should be supported:
PMC:NSL E 136

Okhla, New Delhi
W 448 from 384 kbps

d. Following Input and Output Content Video Resolution should be supported:
XGA (1024 x 768), SVGA (800 x 600).
e. Following Camera specifications should be met: Full HD, 1280 x 1080p CCD imager,
f. Following Audio Input ports should be available on the codec: It should support 1 x
DIN 8‐Pin port.
g. Following Audio Standards and Protocols should be met: Siren 22,AAC‐LD, 20 kHz
PMC:NSL E 137

Okhla, New Delhi
h. Following Security specifications should be supported: Algorithms: SHA‐1, SHA‐256, AES
30. Audio System speaker system with rated output 30 w (high impedance) two‐way speaker systems
designed for high efficiency, wide range, and high power input handling capability.

a. Power handling capacity Continuous pink noise: 60 W (8 Ω), 30 W (16 Ω) & Continuous
program: 120 W (8 Ω), 60 W (16 Ω)
b. Rated Impedance 100 V line: 330 Ω (30 W), 1 kΩ (10 W), 3.3 kΩ (3 W), 10 kΩ (1 W)
70 V line: 170 Ω (30 W), 330 Ω (15 W), 1 kΩ (5 W), 3.3 kΩ (1.5 W), 10 kΩ (0.5 W)
25 V line: 170 Ω (3.7 W), 330 Ω (1.9 W), 1 kΩ (0.6 W), 3.3 kΩ (0.2 W), 10 kΩ (0.06 W)
16 Ω, 8 Ω
c. Sensitivity 90 dB (1 W, 1 m), Frequency Response 70 Hz ‐ 20 kHz (‐10 dB), 50 Hz ‐ 20 kHz
(‐20 dB).
31. Audio System power amplification with rated output 240 W power amplifier featuring high
performance amplification.

a. Power consumption 238 W (EN60065), 520 W (AC operation at rated output), 15 A (DC
operation at rated output).
b. Frequency response 50 Hz ‐ 20 kHz (±3 dB), Distortion 1 % or less at 1 kHz, 1/3 rated
Power.Input Line in: 0 dB, 10 kΩ, balanced, screw terminal, distance between barriers:
8.3 mm (0.33") Speaker line in: 40 dB, 330 kΩ, Unbalance, screw terminal, distance
between barriers: 8.3 mm (0.33"). Output Loop out: 0 dB, 10 kΩ, balanced, screw
PMC:NSL E 138

Okhla, New Delhi
terminal, distance between barriers: 8.3 mm (0.33") Speaker out: Balanced (floating)
High impedance: 42 Ω (100 V), 21 Ω (70 V) Low impedance: 4 Ω (31 V).
c. S/N Ratio 60 dB or more Tone Control Bass: ±10 dB at 100 Hz Treble: ±10 dB at 10 kHz.

32. CENTRAL UNIT: ‐ Power Source 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption Max. 60 W Rated Output
35 V DC, 650 mA × 2 Input MIC: ‐60 dB*, 600 Ω, unbalanced, phone jack AUX: ‐20 dB*, 10 kΩ,
unbalanced, phone jack Output Recording: ‐20 dB*, 10 kΩ, unbalanced, phone jack, pin jack × 2
Equalizer Insertion Input Control Priority speech chime: Operation, priority button activates a
single‐tone chime.

a. Rated Output should be 35 V DC, 650 mA × 2.
b. Power Source should be 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
c. Device should have input of MIC: ‐60 dB, 600 Ω, unbalanced, phone jack and AUX: ‐20 dB, 10 kΩ,
unbalanced, phone jack.
d. Device should have output of Recording: ‐20 dB*, 10 kΩ, unbalanced, phone jack, pin jack × 2.
e. Equalizer Insertion Input Terminal ‐ Input: ‐20 dB*, 10 kΩ, pin jack, Output: ‐20 dB*, 10 kΩ, pin
jack.
f. Expansion Input and Output Terminal ‐ Input: ‐20 dB*, 10 kΩ, pin jack × 2, Output: ‐20 dB*, 10
kΩ, pin jack × 2, Control: 10 kΩ or more, voltage output, pin jack × 2.
g. 70 (Max. 35 units per line), Max 210 (when 3 expansion amplifiers).

33. CHAIRMAN UNIT:‐ compact and lightweight design Power Source 35 V DC, under 30 mA (supplied
from Central Unit) Output Headphone/Recording: 32 Ω (headphone)/10 kΩ, ‐20 dB* (recording),
unbalanced, mini jack (with VR) Internal speaker: 130 Ω, 200 mW Contact output: 24 V DC, max.
50 mA Control Speech button: Microphone, speaker on‐off control by speech switch Priority
button: Microphone, speaker on‐off, other microphone cutoff, and single‐tone chime activation.
a. Output should be a Headphone/Recording of32 Ω (headphone)/10 kΩ, ‐20 dB* (recording)
unbalanced, mini jack (with VR).
b. Internal speaker: 130 Ω, 200 mW
c. Contact output: 24 V DC, max. 50 mA
d. Control ‐ Speech button: Microphone, speaker on‐off control by speech switch, Priority button:
Microphone, speaker on‐off, other microphone cut‐off, and single‐tone chime activation.

34. DELEGATE UNIT:‐ Power Source 35 V DC, under 30 mA (supplied from Central Unit) Output
Headphone/Recording: 32 Ω headphone)/10 kΩ, ‐20 dB* (recording),unbalanced, mini jack (with
VR) Internal speaker: 130 Ω, 200 mW Contact output: 24 V DC, max. 50 mA Control Microphone,
speaker on‐off control by speech switch Operating Temperature 0Ԩ to +40Ԩ (32゜F to 104゜F)
Operating Humidity Under 90% RH (no condensation)
PMC:NSL E 139

Okhla, New Delhi
a. Power Source should be 35 V DC, under 30 mA.
b. It should have output of Headphone/Recording: 32 Ω (headphone)/10 kΩ, ‐20 dB*
(recording),and unbalanced, mini jack (with VR).
c. Internal speaker: 130 Ω, 200 mW.
d. Device should have control Microphone, speaker on‐off control by speech switch.
e. Case: ABS resin, black Panel: ABS resin, gray metallic, semi‐gloss, paint.

35. LONG MICROPHONE UNIT:‐ Directivity Unidirectional

Rated Impedance 1.8 kΩ Rated Sensitivity ‐37 dB (1 kHz 0 dB = 1 V/Pa) LED Indicator Speech
indicator (ring type) Frequency Response 100 ‐ 13,000 Hz Output Connector Combined type of
XLR‐4‐32 Finish Gooseneck: Stainless steel, black Other: ABS resin, black.
a. Electret condenser microphone type.
b. Unidirectional
c. Rated Impedance should be 1.8 kΩ.
d. Rated Sensitivity should be ‐37 dB (1 kHz 0 dB = 1 V/Pa).
e. LED Indicator ‐ Speech indicator (ring type).
f. Frequency Response should be 100 ‐ 13,000 Hz.
g. Device should have combined type of XLR‐4‐32 output connector.

36. EXTENSION CORD: ‐ Cable Length 10 m (32.81 ft) Connector 8 pins DIN socket pins DIN plug
(going to the cord).
a. Connector ‐ 8 pins DIN socket (going to the unit's base), 8 pins DIN plug (going to the cord).
b. Cable Length ‐ 10 m (32.81 ft) or more.

37. EXTENSION CORD:‐ Cable Length 2 m (6.56 ft) Connector 8 pins DIN socket pins DIN plug (going to
the cord).
a. Cable Length ‐ 2 m (6.56 ft).
b. Connector ‐ 8 pins DIN socket (going to the unit's base), 8 pins DIN plug (going to the cord).

38. REMOTE DELEGATE INTERFACE UNIT. Power Source 35 V DC, 30 mA or less Input ‐60 dB*, 200 Ω,
balanced, mini phone jack with VR control Output ‐60 dB*, 22 Ω, balanced, mini phone jack with
VR control Speech Mode AUTO: Voice‐activated Automatic switching MANUAL: Talk key on‐off
switching.
a. Device should have input of ‐60 dB*, 200 Ω, balanced, mini phone jack with VR control.
b. Device should have input of ‐60 dB*, 22 Ω, balanced, mini phone jack with VR control.
c. Device should have auto and manual Speech Mode.
d. VR control Speech Mode AUTO: Voice‐activated Automatic switching MANUAL.

39. Sound Reinforcement (Audio) System ‐ Acoustical Boundary Microphone, Embedded Half
Cardioids Polar Pattern, Imp 220 ohms, Condenser Back electrets Transducer, Omni directional
PMC:NSL E 140

Okhla, New Delhi
Pickup pattern ,Extended Frequency response High sensitivity with low frequency roll off, can be
fixed on the Conf. Table in the Circular Opening provided on the Central Table.
a. Features shall be amiable half‐cardioids polar pattern, High gain‐before‐feedback, Flat,
wide range frequency response, High‐quality reproduction of speech.
b. Unobtrusive design shall be Ceiling or tabletop mounting, fast and easy installation
Transducer type Condenser (back electrets), Operating principle Pressure gradient. Polar
pattern Semi‐cardioids.
c. Open circuit voltage at 1 kHz (0dB = 1V/Pa) 15 mV/Pa= ‐36.5 dab
Nominal impedance 220 ohms, Load impedance = 1000 ohms, Connector 3‐pin XLRM
d. Length 76/67 mm Shaft diameter M 20 x 1.5 threads, Head diameter 30 mm, Weight
without cable approx. 70 g.
e. Frequency response 40 ‐ 20,000 Hz, Max. SPL at 1 kHz 124 dB, S/N ratio rel. to 1 Pa 60 dB,
A‐weighted equivalent SPL 26 dB.
f. Power supplies 8 ‐ 52 V phantom power.
g. Current consumption 3.4 MA.
h. Sensitivity (at 1000 Hz) ‐60±3dB* (1mV)* 0dB=1V/μbar
i. Attenuation switch shall be ‐10db
j. Signal to Noise Ratio shall be 68db.
40. WIRELESS SET (Hand Held) :‐ :Diversity wireless tuner Frequency Range 576 ‐ 865 MHz (*1), UHF
Tone Frequency 32.768 kHz Operating Temperature ‐10 Ԩ to +50 Ԩ (14 ゜F to 122 ゜F)
Accessory AC adapter (*2) …1, Screw driver …1
Microphone holder W3/8 (with stand adapter) Wireless microphone Microphone Element
Electret condenser microphone unit: Unidirectional Modulation Frequency modulation Channel
Selectable 64 channels RF Carrier Power Less than 50 mW Oscillator PLL synthesized Maximum
Input Level 126 dB SPL Maximum Deviation ±40 kHz Audio Frequency Response 100 Hz ‐ 15 kHz
Battery rechargeable battery (option) or AA alkaline dry cell battery.
a. Frequency Range should be 576 ‐ 865 MHz (*1), UHF.
b. Tone Frequency should be 32.768 kHz.
c. Electret condenser microphone unit: Unidirectional.
d. Frequency modulation
e. Device should have 64 channels .
f. RF Carrier Power should be Less than 50 mW (Factory preset 10 mW ERP).
g. Oscillator should be PLL synthesized.
h. Maximum Input Level should be 126 dB SPL.
i. Maximum Deviation should be ±40 kHz.
j. Audio Frequency Response ‐ 100 Hz ‐ 15 kHz.
k. Built‐in Antenna.

41. WIRELESS SET (color Mic) :‐ :Diversity wireless tuner Frequency Range 576 ‐ 865 MHz (*1), UHF
Tone Frequency 32.768 kHz Operating Temperature ‐10 Ԩ to +50 Ԩ (14 ゜F to 122 ゜F)
PMC:NSL E 141

Okhla, New Delhi
Accessory AC adapter (*2) …1, Screw driver …1

Microphone holder W3/8 (with stand adapter) Wireless microphone Element Electret condenser
microphone unit: Unidirectional Modulation Frequency modulation Channel Selectable 64
channels RF Carrier Power Less than 50 mW Oscillator PLL synthesized Maximum Input Level 126
dB SPL Maximum Deviation ±40 kHz Audio Frequency Response 100 Hz ‐ 15 kHz Battery
rechargeable battery (option) or AA alkaline dry cell battery.
42. Rack Structure 42 U Air Cooled AV Equipment Rack with Two Nos. of Vertical Power Strips,
Cantilever Selves, Cable routing perforations, 4 No. of Spin Wheels.
45. Cables & Connectors with Patch Panel Terminal ‐ tin Audio / Video Cables & Connectors with
Accessories.
a. The following specifications shall be adhered to for all AV Patch Panels installations.
b. Laptop VGA + 3.5mm inputs,
c. Laptop w/Interactive Whiteboard VGA + 3.5mm+USB inputs,
d. Analogue A/V Phono x 3 (R, W, Y) inputs,
e. Digital A/V HDMI input,
f. Network/Data shall be 1 outlet per laptop connection,
g. Power 240v 1 outlet per laptop or A/V connection.
h. Foil (Shielding) shall be characterised as an aluminium foil coating around a cables
conductor.

PMC:NSL E 142

Electrical: EPABX Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,NBCC

Technical Specification of ISDN & IP Ready EPABX System:

1. General Requirement:‐

a. The exchange shall be Integrated Services Digital Network & IP ready EPABX System of SPC type
PCM/TDM based non‐blocking supporting ISDN and IP features for subscriber lines and trunks / tie‐
lines/junctions and shall house all operating software in Flash‐ Memory or in HDD.

b. The system shall have hot swappable peripheral cards. To replace any peripheral card, system shutdown
Should not be required.

c. The system should support up to 672 ports.

d. The system should have at least one port for External Music on Hold and background music.

e. System should have built‐in fast modem (V.92 ITU‐T) up to 56Kbps for remote maintenance.

f. System should have a capacity of 50,000 BHCA (Busy Hour Call Attempts, a measure of a telephone
System’s ability to handle high traffic demands.
g. System should be 19” Rack mountable
h. System should be RFI protected
i. Should have simple Input/output (I/O) cable routing from the rear panel.

2. Architecture:‐

a. The system should be the state‐of‐art based, software controlled and should switch simultaneously
Voice,
Data & Images without any degradation of service quality.

b. The system shall be IP enable telecom server. The switch should support MGCP protocol and Session
Initiation Protocol (SIP) for transmission of voice over IP network. It should also support G.711, G.723 &
G.729A encoding standards. The system should support IP Video Telephony.

c. The system should support Q‐sig over IP.

d. The IP Phone should support MGCP/SIP protocol. The same IP Phone should be configurable for MGCP
as well as SIP.

e. The system should support IP extension as well as IP trunks also.

o The system should support in skin DECT facility based on IP.

o The system should have in skin Universal Gateway card. The Universal Gateway (UGW) card should
function as internal gateway for IP station sets and QSIG inter‐PBX networking. Each card should
provide the capacity to drive up to 240 IP endpoints regardless of their physical location and provides
PMC: NSL E143

full features to these ports. Voice calls maintained on the UGW should be carried out entirely on the
network when both ports involved are IP ports, allowing for heavy traffic configurations. These
activities occur seamlessly within the stable environment of the PBX. The PBX system should support
a multitude of PUGW cards with load sharing and redundancy capabilities for both media and
signaling data streams. This card should support the following

 Up to 240 IP phones
 Should support trunks (FXO): QSIG Net‐IP, analog trunks (loop start), SIP IP trunks
 Should support redundancy
 Media channels ‐ load sharing
 Complies with voice compression support in either G.711, G.723.1 or G.729 standards
 Voice over IP standard: MGCP
 Session Initiation Protocol Support — SIP
 Full QSIG protocol transparency
 Should support 3rd party IP phone and Video phoned (SIP)

o System should be based on Universal port architecture and except for Common Control and Power
supply card. System should not impose any restriction in terms of slots usage for a particular functional
benefit

o System shall work on 230 V AC or (‐) 48 Volts DC Power Supply with voltage varying between 42 to 58 V
and shall not need any proprietary charger or battery bank for the purpose.

o The exchanges shall support Caller Line Identification for all ISDN & IP network subscribers including
analog subscribers and analog trunks.

o Analog line card should have loop resistance of min. 1800 ohms

o It should be possible to extend the digital phone to extend up to 6 K.M. on .5 mm copper cable

o Exchange should provide the caller id on analog extension as well as on analog trunks (CO lines)
o

o Exchange shall support following signaling Protocols:

 ISDN PRI, R2MFC, CEPT
 ISDN BRI
 E&M (2/4 Wire)
 Ring Down
 DTMF
 Loop Tie on DTMF
 All the Common Signaling Standards adopted for ISDN / Non ISDN connections to PSTN

o Exchange should have build in ACD functionality. Exchange should be upgradeable to CTI with direct
Ethernet Connectivity to LAN.

PMC: NSL E144

3. System Facilities :

o Abbreviated Dialing – The system shall be able to store at least 1000 lists of abbreviated dialing
(AD). The AD list entry size & maximum AD entries per system shall be indicated by the
manufacturer / supplier.
o Integrated Directory
o Call Coverage – The system shall automatically redirect calls to be covered by different coverage
paths and at different times of the day and days of the week to the other voice terminals &
messaging services where the calls can be answered. The minimum number of coverage paths
for automatic redirection of calls may be indicated by the supplier.
o Conference – Three parties & Fourteen party conferences. The system should have at least one
14 party conference. It should also support up to 80 party single conference or 6 simultaneous
conferences of 14 parties each. It should also possible to configure the conference in advance so
that it can be used at any time.
o Consultation hold
o Ring Control – The system should be capable to have ringing preferences such as No Ring, Ring
and Delayed Ring etc.
o Flexible Station Move – The system should give complete flexibility to dial a person his
identification number from any location & thus utilize all the facilities from that point.
o Authorisation Codes – Codes shall be of 4 to 7 digits length.
o Malicious Call Tracing – It shall be possible to identify malicious calls in case it is from CO, Tie or
Other outstation & provided the exchange.

4. DECT:
The PBX must have inskin IP based DECT. Base stations should be connected to the PBX thru IP interface so that
base station can be placed at several locations. It should also possible to customize multi‐site solution with a
number of single‐cell and multi‐cell solutions depending on the size of each individual location. The base station
should support codec G.711 and G.729. The PBX should support up to 1500 wireless users.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF OPERATOR CONSOLE: ‐
The Operator Console should work only on two wires.
a) Minimum 3 x 40 character LCD Display with adjustable Display
b) 5 soft keys with Navigation buttons.
c) Minimum 62 Programmable Keys for extension busy status, junction programming, feature
programming
d) Message Waiting Indicator
e) Incoming Speech Gain Control
f) Hot Dial keypad
g) Ringer Volume Control
h) Should provide multiple ringing cadences for differentiating between ringing of 2 Key Telephones
placed nearby.
i) Full speakerphone.
j) Hot dial from keypad.
k) Adjustable Handset and Monitor speaker volume with auto save.
l) Monitor Speaker/On‐hook Dialling/ Background Music Selection/ Voice page.
m) Message waiting indicator.
PMC: NSL E145

n) VIP Ringing Facility

A) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION of Digital telephone

Digital telephones shall have the following features:
 LCD display of minimum 3 line and each line should have 20 characters
 Dialed number and caller is identified by name, telephone number
 Hands free operations through single key press
 Volume control function
 3 Soft keys for feature activation
 Call log for missed and answered calls (minimum 60 calls )
 Automatic call back display
 Ringing tone control
 Display of trunk name for external call
 Ten numbers memory
 Voice mail indicator
 Single button abbreviated dialing for six numbers
 Boss secretary feature
 Programmable keys for feature operation

Technical Specification for Passive LAN Copper & Fibre cable

Category 6 UTP Cable, 4 Pair CM rated, with LSZH

Characteristic Min. Required Specification
Category 6 Unshielded Twisted Pair
100ohm cable shall be compliant with EIA/TIA 568‐C.2
transmission performance specifications.
Category 6 UTP cables shall extend between the work area
location and its associated telecommunications closet and
consist of 4 pair, 23 AWG, UTP
The 4 pair Unshielded Twisted Pair cable shall be UL Listed

Conductor: Solid Copper
Conductor Diameter: 0.57±0.005mm (23 AWG only)
Insulator Polyolefin
Jacket: LSZH (Low Smoke zero Halogen)
Outer Diameter: 6.0±0.4mm
Filler: PE
Weight (kg/km): 42
Fire performance ‐ 332.1
NVP (%): 68
Insulation Dia. (±0.05mm): 1.04
PMC: NSL E146

Insulator Polyolefin
Third party certificate for IEC 60332‐3‐22:2009 needs to
submitted along with technical bid is mandatory

6 Core Outdoor Unitube Single Sheathed Armoured 50/125μm OM3 Type

Min. Required Specification
Features:

Cable containing 6 optical fibres in water blocked one
loose tube, taped, corrugated steel tape armoured (STA)
polyethylene (HDPE) outer sheathed embedded with two
steel wires on the periphery

Number of elements : 5
Tube Idenification : Single tube
Fibre Protection(Tube) : Polybutylene Terephthalate (PBT)
Water Blocking : Thixotropic Gel (Tube)
Petroleum Jelly (Interstices)
Core Wrapping : Polyethylene Terephthalate
Armouring : Corrugated Steel Tape Armour
(ECCS Tape)
Peripheral Strength Member: Two GI Steel wires only
Sheath : UV Stabilised Polyethylene (HDPE)

Technical Specifications
Attenuation;
At 850 nm: 3.0 dB/km
At 1300 nm: 1.0 dB/km

Min. Bandwidth;
At 850 nm: 2000 MHz
At 1300 nm: 500 MHz

Dimensions and Mass
Overall Cable (Nominal) : 9.8 mm
Mass (Nominal) : 95 kg/km

PMC: NSL E147


Mechanical and Environmental Performance

Max. Bending Radius (during installation) : 20 X Overall diameter
Max. Bending Radius (during full load) : 10 X Overall diameter
Max. Tensile Strength‐Short Term : 1500N
Max. Crush Resistance‐Short Term : 2000N/10 cm
Operating/Storage Temperature range : ‐40°C ‐+70
Mode Field Diameter @ 850nm : 50 + 3.0 μm
Cladding Diameter : 125 + 2.0 μm

Physical Characteristics
Mode Field Diameter @ 850nm : 50 + 3.0 μm
Cladding Diameter : : 125 + 2.0 μm

Certifications
ISO.IEC 11801 ‐ 2nd Edition, type OM3; AS/ACIF S008;
AS/NZS 3080

(ii) FIBER PATCH PANELS – RACK MOUNT
Have sufficient slots accommodate duplex SC adapters
individually.
Should have fiber management provision inside
Have earthing plugs and other accessories.
Panel cover should be slide out for easy maintenance
Provide self‐adhesive, clear label holders (transparent plastic
window type) and white designation labels with the panel, for
front panel labeling.
Should be upgradeable as Intelligent Patch Panel without
changing the existing Patch Panel hardware by simple retro
fitting of intelligent sensors as and when required.

(iii) SC DUPLEX ADAPTORS
Features All SC adaptors should be duplex type with shutter for
protection. Adapters should be snap mount for easy insertion
and removal.
PMC: NSL E148


(iv) Optical Fiber Pigtails (SC)
Features _ Standard or custom assemblies
_ Precision ferrule endface geometry
_ Controlled fibre protrusion
_ Factory polished, tested and serialized.
Connector End : 1xSC connectors, singlemode,
zirconia ceramic ferrule,
composite body
Insertion Loss : 0.35dB max.
Retention Strength : 100N
Operating Temperature : ‐10°C to 60°C
Cable Sheath
Material : PVC/LSZH
Colour : Random
Characteristics
Cable : 900μm Buffered
Outside Diameter : 900μm
Buffer Diameter : 900μm tight buffer
Min. Bend Radius : 30mm
Attenuation :
@ 850nm <2.5dB/km
@ 1300nm <0.7dB/km

(v) Optical Fiber Patch Cords (3 Mtr.)
Features All optical fiber patch leads shall comprise of Multimode mode
50/125µm fiber with SC, fiber connectors terminated at each
end. The optical fiber patch leads shall comply with the
following specifications:
Connector: Zirconia ceramic ferrule
Pre‐radiuses and pre‐polished ferrule
Sheath ‐ LSZH Jacket
Epoxy type fiber encapsulation
Color‐coded connector boots fitted to connectors on duplex
patch leads.
PMC: NSL E149

Dust caps shall be fitted on each connector at the assembly
Cable: 50/125, OM3
Strength member: aramid yarn
Bandwidth :
@ 850nm 2000MHz/km
@ 1300nm 500MHz/km
Attenuation :
@ 850nm <2.5dB/km
@ 1300nm <0.7dB/km

PMC: NSL E150

SPECIFICATIONS: HVAC Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,

SPECIFICATIONS FOR HVAC
SECTION B3

PMC: NSL
CONTENTS
1. SECTION- 01
Special Conditions for submission of Tender
2. SECTION -02
Appendix to the Conditions of the Contract
3. SECTION -03
Design Parameters
4. SECTION -04
Standard Specifications
5. SECTION -05
Noise & Vibration Controls
6. SECTION -06
Standard Specification of VAV Boxes
7. SECTION -07
Standard Specification of Thermal/Acoustic Insulation
8. SECTION -08
Standard Specification of Air Circulation System
9. SECTION -09
Standard Specification of Electrical Motors & Starters
10. SECTION -10

Standard Specification of Motor Control Center,
Sub-Panels, Power & Control Cabling
11. SECTION -11

Modes of Measurement
12. SECTION -12

Painting Work
13. SECTION -13

List of Approved make of Equipment / Materials
14. SECTION -14

Basis of Design and Scheme
15. SECTION -15

Associated Civil / Electrical & other Works
(To be provided free of cost to AC Contractor)
Schedule of Equipment
16. SECTION -16

Standard Specifications of Variable
Refrigerant Volume System
17. SECTION -17

Standard Specifications of Indoor Unit
18. SECTION -18

Standard Specification of Refrigerant Piping Work
19. SECTION -19

Standard Specification of Schedule of Equipment’s
20. SECTION -20

Technical Data
(To be furnished by AC Contractor)
21. SECTION -21

Bill of Quantities
PMC: NSL HVAC 2

SECTION - 01
SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SUBMISSION OF TENDER
CENTRALISED LOW SIDE AIR CONDITIONING WORK FOR PHARMACY

COUNCIL OF INDIA, NEW DELHI-110002
1. INTRODUCTION :-
DEVELOPER SCOPE:-
i) Existing 2X13000CFM Air Handling Units with Chilled water piping & Valves.
PHARMACY COUNCIL OF INDIA SCOPE:-

LOW SIDE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM SHALL BE COMPRISED OF
FOLLOWING ITEMS:-
i) Non VRF 4# 2TR DX type Hi-Wall Unit for UPS & Server Room (1w+1s)
ii) VRV Type 7# 3.18TR Cassette Units for President Cabin, Secretary Room,
meeting room and cabin
iii) 1X20HP Outdoor Units VRF Type (cooling & Heating both)
iv) VRV Type 2#2.0 TR Cassette Units for V.P Room and cabin
v) Main intelligent controller for VRF & Timer for Non VRF to work the system
24 x7 automatically.
vi) Insulated Refrigerant piping for above units
vii) VAV box with sound attenuator to control air volume.
viii) GSS rectangular ducting for air conditioning system
ix) Duct insulation & lining.
The detailed quantity for air-conditioning work & its connected accessories shall be as
per detail mention in the SECTION- 21 Bill of Quantities
2. LIST OF DRAWING:-
Ac layout Plan HVAC -01
PMC: NSL HVAC 3

3. OWNER AND ARCHITECT/CONSULTANT
The addresses of the Owner and of the Consultant responsible for the preparation of the
Contract Agreement/Documents are as follows:-
THE CLIENT M/S PHARMACY COUNCIL OF INDIA
THE PMC M/S NBCC, NEW DELHI
THE ARCHITECT M/S ENABLE CORPORATION ARCHITECTS & ENGG
THE AC M/S GSP DESIGN CONSULTANT

CONSULTANT
4. SITE
The site is located at PHARMACY COUNCIL OF INDIA, COMBINED

COUNCIL’s BUILDIND, KOTLA ROAD, AIWAN-E-GHALIB MARG, NEW
DELHI-110002
5. SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work to be carried out under this contract comprises of the Air-conditioning
system for PHARMACY COUNCIL OF INDIA as NEW DELHI called for in the
Tender Documents. The contractor shall carry out and complete the work under this
contract in every respect, in conformity with the stipulations of the Bureau of Indian
Standards and with the directions of and to the satisfaction of the Architect / Consultant /
Owner. The contractor shall furnish all lab our, materials, appliances, equipment,
installation, testing and commissioning of the whole air-conditioning system as specified
herein and shown on drawings. This also includes any materials, appliances, equipment and
incidental work not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Drawings/Documents,
but essential for ensuring a properly connected installation in good working order. The
work shall include all incidental jobs connected with air-conditioning installation such as
laying cables, drilling holes through walls and floor and making good and grouting of
equipment etc
The scope of work to be carried out as described above and briefly listed below shall
include supply, installation, testing and commissioning of :
a) Air distribution ducting, grilles & Diffusers.

b) Rectangular Ducting as per AC Layout Plan
c) Aluminum Extruded Grills
d) Any Other miscellaneous Work
6. SHOP DRAWINGS
PMC: NSL HVAC 4

On the award of the work, the Contractor shall immediately proceed with the preparation
of Detailed working drawings showing the detail of the equipment that are to be installed
and the ancillary works that are to be carried out.
Within Two weeks after award of work Contract, the Contractor shall submit the shop
drawing for the approval of the Consultant, two sets of detailed shop drawings of all
equipment and materials including piping layout, and wiring layouts required to complete
the project as per Specifications and as required by the Consultant. These Drawings
shall contain details of construction, size, arrangement, operating clearances,
performance characteristics, and capacity of all items of equipment, as also the details of
all related items of work by other contractors.
If the Consultant makes any amendments in the above drawings, the Contractor
shall supply two fresh sets of drawings with the amendments duly incorporated,
along with the drawings on which corrections were made. After final approval, the
Contractor shall submit a further 4 sets of shop drawings for the exclusive use of
and retention by the Consultant.
b. The shop drawings shall be submitted for approval sufficiently in advance of planned
delivery and installation of any material, to allow Consultants ample time for scrutiny.
No claims for extension of time shall be entertained because of any delay in the work due
to his failure to produce shop drawings at the right time.
c. Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogues, pamphlets, and other documents submitted

for approval shall be in quadruplicate, each item in each set shall be properly labelled,
indicating the specific service for which material or equipment is to be used, giving
reference to the governing section and clause number of Specifications.
d. Approval rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of

measurements or of building conditions. Where drawings are approved, said approval
does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve
the contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or
performing work as required thereof, shall be prepared by the Contractor at his own
cost and approved by the Consultant.
e. Where the work of the Contractor has to be installed in close proximity to, or will
interfere with work of other trades, he shall assist in working out space conditions to
make satisfactory adjustments. If the contractor installs his work before co-coordinating
with other trades, or so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, he shall
make all the necessary changes without extra cost to the Owner.
The following shop drawings shall be prepared by the AC contractor for approval
a) AC Ducting Layout Plan
b) Chilled Water Layout Plan
PMC: NSL HVAC 5

c) Schematic layout Plan
d) MVAC Electrical panel, power & control wiring drawings.
e) Any other shop drawings necessary for the project.

7. AS BUILT DRAWINGS
At the completion of work and before issuance of certificate of virtual completion the
contractor shall submit Four (04) sets to the Engineer-in-charge, layout drawing drawn at
appropriate scale indicating the complete MVAC system “as installed”.
The tender is to be submitted in DUPLICATE in the separate sealed cover in the

following format:
a) The tenderer shall submit the offer in Duplicate sealed two separate sealed covers duly
complete in all respects viz. Technical cum Commercial Bid & Price Bid for the above
work. The Technical cum Commercial Bid & Price Bid shall be submitted
simultaneously..
b) The Technical Bid shall be complete with the following :

 Deviation, if any from N.I.T. specifications.
 Complete technical data duly filled as per Performa enclosed.
 A set of leaflets of all the equipments offered.
 Makes considered for equipments& accessories.
c) The price bid in a separate sealed cover shall be in the same format as in the tender
papers supplied by the consultant/client
8. INSTRUCTION / MAINTENANCE / OPERATION MANUAL
The Contractor shall prepare and produce instruction, operation and maintenance
manuals in English for use, operation and the maintenance of the supplied equipment and
installations, and submit to the Owner (03) three copies at the time of handing over. The
manual shall generally consist of the following:
a) Description of the Project.
b) Operating instructions.
c) Maintenance instructions including procedures for preventive maintenance.
d) Manufacturers catalog.
e) Spare parts list.
f) Trouble shooting charts.
g) Drawings.
PMC: NSL HVAC 6

h) Type and routine test certificates of major items.

One (1) set of reproducible ‘as built’ drawings.
9. PRICES, UNIT RATES & DUTIES ETC
9.1 The prices and unit rates quoted by the bidder in the bid shall be firm and deem to be
adequate to cover the entire responsibility involved in the execution and completion of
work. The rates shall be complete in all respects including cost of materials, erection,
fabrication, labour, supervision, tools and plant, transport, contingencies, breakage,
wastage, sundries, scaffoldings, insurance etc. on the basis of works contract.
9.2 The contract value shall be inclusive of custom duty, CVD etc on Imported
Equipment’s (fans Motorized valves etc.) & inclusive of excise duty, local sales tax
on indigenous Equipment’s/Materials and inclusive of octroi, VAT duty or any
other duties or fees levied by government or any public or local bodies as applicable
in state of New Delhi
Please indicate separately the assessable value & quantum / rate of excise duty included
on each excisable refrigeration equipment separately in your price bid.
The AC contractor shall include the cost of supply, installation, testing, commissioning
of imported & indigenous equipment’s from port to site, insurance up to commissioning
at site etc. as required in Indian Rupees.
ASSUMPTION 1 US $ Exchange Rate = Rs.64.81
9.3 The contract value shall remain firm during the currency of the contract and shall be
subject to statutory variation in sales tax on works contract or on rate of custom duty /
excise duty applicable on refrigeration equipment’s only. In case assessable values are
increased by the manufacturer of refrigeration equipment during the currency of contract,
the client shall not pay any increase in quantum of excise duty on account of change in
assessable value. No increase in prices due to change of rate of excise duty on bought out
items such as G.SS, M.S. angles / flats, motor, cables, controls etc., shall be paid. No
increase due to change in daily wages of labour be paid, due to any reasons whatsoever.
9.4 The total contract price quoted by the bidders shall be inclusive of all taxes & duties as
applicable in this state & TDS shall be deducted by the Client at source & certificate shall
be issued for the same. The works contract price quoted shall remain firm till completion
of job and handing over the same in working condition to the client.
9.5 The price should not be subject to exchange rate variations. No foreign exchange and
license shall be arranged by the Client and it shall be contractor’s responsibility to do so,
if required.
9.6 The rates quoted shall be deemed to allow for all minor extras and constructional details,
which are not specifically shown on drawings or given in the specifications but are
PMC: NSL HVAC 7

essential in the opinion of the Owner / Consultant / Architect for the execution of works
to con-form to good workmanship and sound engineering practice.
9.7 The Owner / Consultant / Architect decision to clarify any item under minor changes,
minor extras and constructional details shall be final, conclusive and binding on the
Contractor.
9.8 The rates quoted by the Contractor shall be net so as to include all the requirements
described in the contract agreement and no claim whatsoever due to fluctuations in the
price of materials and labour will be entertained.
9.9 In case the rates of identical items under different sub-heads / parts are different, the
lowest of these will be taken for the purpose of making the payments.
9.10 The contractor shall provide all equipments, instruments, labour and such other assistance
required by the Owner / Consultant / Architect for measurement of the works, materials
etc.
10. VARIATION IN QUANTITIES & TENDER DRAWINGS:
The quantities for ancillary works given in the schedule and / or in drawings are for the
guidance of the tenderer. The contractor shall be paid on the basis of actual quantities of
works carried out. However the contractor shall check these quantities before quoting and
will bring to the notice of Owner / Consultant / Architect for any major variation. MVAC
drawings issued with the tender are diagrammatic only and indicate the general
arrangement only. The data given in the drawings and specifications is as exact as could
be secured, but its accuracy is not guaranteed. Contractor shall carry out his own
computations and provide all such equipment, as required to achieve the specified
conditions. The contract shall be on works contract basis and the Client reserves the right
to add / delete any items of work during the currency of contract.
The price variation shall be permitted only if the actual quantities differ from the
quantities given in the document to and not exceeding 5% of the value of that item
limited extent for the following items:-
a) Ducting / duct lining / duct insulation etc.
b) Insulated Chilled Water & drain piping for AC system
c) Powder coated Aluminum Extruded Grills / diffusers.
c) Power & control cabling.
11. PERFORMANCE BOUND CONTRACT
The contract will be a performance bound contract and therefore the Bidder shall make
their independent check for Heat Load, selection of equipment’s etc. The drawings
enclosed with the tender documents shall be only tentative layout plans and for guidance
PMC: NSL HVAC 8

purpose only. The detailed shop drawings shall be prepared and submitted for approval to
the Owner / Consultant / Architect.
The contractor shall guarantee the specified inside condition at specified outside
condition considering the fresh air as detailed in the basis of design of the tender
documents. The contractor shall guarantee that the capacity of various components as
well as the whole system shall be within ± 3% of the specified capacity.
12. GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee the complete AC system for a period of 12 months of the
date of handing over the plant after successful initial testing & one major seasonal test i.e.
either summer or monsoon whichever is earlier during guarantee period. Or 18 months
from date of delivery of major equipment’s The Tenderer shall guarantee the AC system
to maintain space conditions as specified in SECTION -14, Basis of Design / Scheme.
They shall also guarantee that the performance of the various equipment’s individually
and jointly shall be within ± 3% of the specified ratings when working under operating
conditions for the complete installation.
During guarantee period loss of refrigerant and oil, if any shall be borne by the air-
conditioning contractor. De-scaling, if required during the guarantee period, shall be done
by air-conditioning contractor free of cost if certified by OWNER.
13. REPAIRS / REPLACEMENT OF PARTS DURING GUARANTEE
Any defects or other faults which may appear within defect liability / guarantee period of
twelve months from the date of handing over the plant in a satisfactory working
conditions to the Client (except for normal wear and tear) arising in the plant from
material or workmanship not in accordance with the contract specification will be
rectified by the contractors free of cost & nothing shall be paid extra on any account.
14. TESTING
All testing instruments, velocity meter, digital thermometer, pyschrometer, measuring
steel tapes, tools, scaffolding and ladders etc. that may be required for taking
measurements shall be arranged by air-conditioning contractor at his own cost.
All types of routine and other tests shall be carried out at the works of the Contractor or
the manufacturers of the components and the before dispatch The Client shall be free to
witness any or all tests, if they so desired. The Contractor has to inform to the Client
before dispatch of any material / equipment.
On the completion of the installation the Contractor shall arrange to carry out various
initial tests as detailed below, in the presence of Owner / Consultant / Architect and to the
entire satisfaction of the Owner / Consultant / Architect. Any defect or short-coming
found during the tests shall be speedily rectified or made good by the Contractor at his
own expenses.
15. The initial tests shall include, but, not be limited to the following:
PMC: NSL HVAC 9

a) To operate and check proper functioning of all electrically operated components viz.,
pumps, fan of indoor units etc. as well as other electrical motors.
b) To test and check the proper functioning of electrical gears, safety and other
controls to ensure their proper functioning.
c) To check & balance the air distribution system and to provide designed air flow in all
areas by adjusting the grills, diffusers and dampers for air-conditioning.
d) To check & balance / adjust the refrigerant flow in the circuit for smooth and
noiseless flow.
f) To check the systems against leaks in different circuits, alignment of motor, ‘V’ belt
adjustments, control setting and all such other tests which are essential for smooth
functioning of the plant.
g) Contractor shall have to submit the capacity test of all equipment at site.
g) On the satisfactory completion of all ‘Initial’ tests & one major seasonal test i.e.
either summer or monsoon the plant shall be considered ‘virtually Complete’ for the
purpose of taking over by the Client.
h) In addition to the ‘Initial’ test the Contractor shall also give summer, monsoon &
winter tests of the plant, each of (3) three days duration, and each one during the full
specified outside conditions (when the ambient conditions are close to the specified
ambient conditions). The first running test may be taken on the completion of the
initial test, provided the ambient temperature and humidity are near their peak. Inside
condition as per the contract, performance of each equipment, Airflow etc. shall be as
per the requirement of the contract during these tests.
It is clarified that guarantee period shall start after successful completion of one major
test i.e. either summer or monsoon for all equipments & inside temperature in the
working area if any.
16. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES CLAUSE
Liquidated damage shall be 0.5% of the contract sum per week of delay subject to a
maximum of 5% of total contract value, in case the work is not completed to our
satisfaction, within the stipulated period. The sum indicated above is by way of liquidated
damage and not as penalty during which the work remain un-commenced or unfinished
after the expiry of completion date.
17. OPERATION OF PLANT
The tenderer shall arrange to operate the plant for a period of ONE MONTH from the
date of commissioning of plant and successful completion of initial test free of cost.
PMC: NSL HVAC 10

18. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
The contractor shall impart training to the minimum three technical staffs appointed by
the Client free of cost during erection and commissioning of the plant also trained
operator should be available for 15 days.
19. WEEKLY PROGRESS REPORT
A weekly progress report of site shall be submitted in writing to the Owner / Consultant /
Architect.
20. INSPECTION & TESTING
All major imported & indigenous equipments such as AHU units, electrical panels,
remote controls etc. may be got inspected & tested before dispatch if desired by the client
at the manufacturers work.
The manufacturer of these equipments must have a facility of testing the equipments at
especially the on test bed on full load and partial load at their works. All the test readings
mutually taken shall be recorded & evaluated with the technical data furnished by the AC
Contractor.
21. STORAGE OF MATERIALS / EQUIPMENTS
Plant room, if ready can be used for storage of materials / equipment brought to site by
the contractors. Watch and ward of the same shall be the contractor’s responsibility. In
case the plant room space is not readily available, it shall be contractor’s responsibility to
make his own temporary structure at site with approved location from the client at his
own cost.
22. POWER SUPPLY & CIVIL WORK
Electricity for erection purposes shall be provided to the AC Contractor at one point only.
On payable basis. All Type of civil work such as wall opening & making goods etc done
by the AC Contractor. However power required for testing & commissioning shall be
provided by the client.
23. INSURANCE
The contractor shall be responsible for the storage and safe custody of all equipment /
materials brought to site from time to time till the plant is taken over by the department.
The contractor may provide adequate and comprehensive insurance coverage for storage
and execution.
The contractor shall be responsible for all the injury or damage to persons, buildings,
structures, property etc., which may arise form any act of omission on part of the
contractor or his servants or sub contractors or his employee etc. The contractor shall
indemnify and keep indemnified the owner and hold him harmless in all respects of and
any expenditure liability, loss, claims or proceeding arising from any such injury or
damage to persons or property as aforesaid.
PMC: NSL HVAC 11

The contractor may undertake all risk policy including earthquake risk with an insurance
company approved by the owner in the joint names of owner and contractor at his own
expense.
24. QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION
All work shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration which
is objectionable in the opinion of the Consultant. In case of moving machinery sound
or vibration noticeable outside the room in which it is installed, or annoyingly
noticeable inside its own room, shall be considered objectionable. Such conditions
shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense.
25. ACCESIBILITY
The Contractor shall verify the sufficiency of the size of shafts and openings of clearance
in cavity walls and suspended ceilings for the proper installation of his equipment and
piping. His failure to communicate insufficiency of any of the above shall constitute his
acceptance of sufficiency of the same. The contractor shall locate all equipment which
must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions. The exact
location and size of all access panels required for each concealed control, damper,
valve or other devices requiring service shall be finalised and communicated in
sufficient time, to be installed in the normal course of work; failing which, the
Contractor shall make all the necessary repair and changes at his own expense.
26. BALANCING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Balancing of all systems and all tests as called for in the Specifications shall be carried
out by the Contractor in accordance with the Specifications, the relevant Indian Standard
Specifications and recommendations of the American Society of Heating Refrigeration
and Air-conditioning Engineers (USA). Test results for summer and monsoon cooling
shall be tabulated in approved manner and four copies shall be submitted to the
Consultant for his scrutiny. Four copies of the certified manufacturer’s performance
curves for each piece of equipment shall be submitted along with the test results.
The contractor shall also provide to the Consultant four copies of record of all safety and
automatic control settings for the entire installation. The contractor shall pay for and
arrange, without any extra cost to the Owner, all necessary balancing and testing
equipment, instruments, materials, accessories, power, water and the requisite labour. The
installation shall be tested again after removal of defects and shall be commissioned only
after approval by the Consultant.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the representatives of Consultant.
27. COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

On completion of the installation, a certificate shall be furnished by the Contractor,
countersigned by the licensed supervisor, under whose direct supervision the installation
was carried out.
28. COMPLETION DRAWINGS

On completion of the work in all respects, the contractor shall supply to the Consultant
four (4) complete sets of drawings, on approved scale, indicating the work as installed.
PMC: NSL HVAC 12

These drawings shall clearly indicate the complete plant room layouts, piping layouts,
location of wiring, exact location of all concealed piping, valves, controls, wiring
and other services. The Contractor shall also submit four (4) sets of consolidated
control diagrams, technical literature on all automatic controls and complete technical
literature on all equipment and materials.
29. SITE ENGINEER

AC Contractor shall appoint one experienced Site Engineer dedicated at site for
Supervision. The Site Engineer will be approved by client and experience and
qualification of the site Engineer to intent the client / Consultant.
All technical data to be filled by the bidders in SECTION -20 shall be accepted in
metric system only unless specifically asked for any bidder submitting the technical
data in any other unit would render his bid liable for rejection. The
Technical data should be typed in capitals only.
END OF SECTION – 01
PMC: NSL HVAC 13

SECTION -02
APPENDIX-I
GUARANTEE PROFORMA
GUARANTEE FOR YEAR - ROUND HVAC SERVICES

We hereby guarantee that the entire MVAC system which we have installed in the building as
described below:
Site: PHARMACY COUNCIL OF INDIA 5TH FLOOR
Location: NEW DELHI
Client: M/S PHARMACY COUNCIL OF INDIA
for a period of one year from this date, the date of acceptance of the installation. WE AGREE
to repair or replace to the satisfaction of the owner, any or all such work that may prove
defective in workmanship, equipment, or materials within that period, ordinary wear and tear and
unusual abuse or neglect excepted, together with any other work which may be damaged or
displaced in so doing. In the event of our failure to comply with the above mentioned conditions
within a reasonable time, after being notified in writing, we collectively and separately, do
hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have the defects repaired and made good at our
expense, and shall pay the cost and charges thereof immediately upon demand.
We also hereby UNDERTAKE to test the installation, following the completion of the
installation, to check and do everything necessary to ensure that all systems (as applicable in
contract) are properly balanced, that all controls are calibrated accurately, and that all units and
peripheral controls are functioning satisfactorily, balance the air flow and to test the capacity of
the equipment, check the power consumption and noise level and ensure that all the controls and
instruments contained in System are functioning satisfactorily.
Signature of the Contractor for

Year-round MVAC Services
SEAL:
DATE: ____________________
PMC: NSL HVAC 14

APPENDIX-II
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
1. SUBMISSION OF TENDER
Complete tender duly filled in duplicate as mentioned above shall reach to following
Address on ------------ before 13Hr.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. TERMS OF PAYMENT:-
 10% Mobilization Advance of the contract value.
 10 % against prorata submission of shop drawings as required.
 65% prorata on delivery of material / equipment at site..
 05% prorata on completion of installation.
 Balance 10% of total contract price including high and low side on testing &
commissioning against bank guarantee valid for a period till the end of defect
liability period.
3. COMPLETION PERIOD : Three month from the date of work

order
4. VALIDITY OF TENDER : 30 days from the date of submission
5. LIQUIDATED DAMAGE CLAUSE : 0.5 % per week of delay subject to a

Maximum of 5% of the total contract
value
As per point 15 Liquidated damages,
Of SECTION -01
END OF SECTION - 02
PMC: NSL HVAC 15

SECTION -03
DESIGN PARAMETERS
1.00 Given below are some design parameters which should be followed in addition to those
given in various sections of technical specifications enclosed.
1.01 AIR - HANDLERS

a) Maximum Face velocity across cooling coil MPM : 152.0
b) Maximum face velocity across pre-filters MPM : 152.0
c) Maximum water pressure drop across the coil in Mt. : 4.6
d) Maximum water velocity through coil in MPS : 2.5
e) Fan outlet velocity (maxm.) MPS : 10.0
1.02 DUCTING WORK

a) Method of Duct Design : Equal friction
Method
b) Maximum air velocity in supply duct MPM : 365.0
c) Maximum air velocity in return duct MPM : 305.0
d) Friction loss in duct ( maxm.) MM Wg in 100 Mt run. : 8.33
e) Maximum Velocity at supply air grill outlet MPM : 150.00
1.03 INSULATION
Maximum temperature rise in the supply air duct from Air-handlers outlet to farthest
outlet in 1.1 ºC.
END OF SECTION -03
PMC: NSL HVAC 16

SECTION -04
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
1.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The complete scope of work shall cover supply, erection, testing and commissioning of
the entire MVAC system as detailed under specification.
1.1.2 BASIS OF DESIGN

The entire system has been based and designed on climatologically data available as
given under Basis of Design and Scheme.
1.1.3 TERMS AND DEFINATIONS

The followings terms have been used in the tender specifications, drawings etc.
ISI Bureau of Indian Standards.
ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigeration & Air-conditioning

Engineers, USA.
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
ASA American Standard Association.
B.S. British Standards.
CMH Cubic Meter per Hour.
US GPM US Gallons per minute.
IGPM Imperial Gallons per Minute.
RPM Revolutions per Minute.
BTU/Hr. British thermal unit per Hour.
Kcal/Hr. Kilo Calories per Hour.
HZ Hertz.
H.P. Horse Power
Kg/Cm2 Kilo Gram per Square Centimeter.

SAG Supply Air Grills.
SAD Supply Air Diffuser.
PMC: NSL HVAC 17

SAF Supply Air Filters.
FD Fire Damper.
VCD Volume Control Damper.
RAD Return Air Damper.
FAD Fresh Air Damper.
RH Relative Humidity.
DB Dry Bulb Temperature.
WB Wet Bulb Temperature.
MV Mechanical Ventilation.
DP Drain Point.
1.1.4 The codes, regulation as detailed below shall be followed in this contract:-
1. Safety code for air-conditioning

(Revised) amendment 1 IS 659: 1964 (reaffirmed 1991)
2. Safety code foe mechanical

Refrigeration IS 660: 1963 (reaffirmed 1991)
3. Testing of refrigeration
Compressors IS 5111: 1993
4. Air-cooled heat exchangers IS 10470 : 1983

(Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
5. Packaged Air-conditioner IS 8148: 1976

(Amendment 1991) (Reaffirmed 1991)
6. Hermetic compressors IS 10617: Part I, II & III 1983

(Reaffirmed 1991)
7. Suppliers data sheet for clean IS 12357: 1998

Air equipment (laminar flow)
8. Thermostats for use in IS 11338: 1965

Refrigeration etc. (Reaffirmed 1991)
PMC: NSL HVAC 18

9. Code of practice for design and IS 11338: 1965

Construction of flue chimneys. (Reaffirmed 1991)
10. Metal Duct Work IS 655: 1963 (reaffirmed 1991)
11. Steel for general structural IS 2062: 1992

Purpose
12. Piping Work IS 1239 Part I & II 1990 / 1992

IS & BS: 3601
13. Welding IS: 3589
14. Refrigeration as per ASHRAE / ISI

Air-conditioning & Refrigeration
Air-conditioning institute Standards.
15. Hot Dip Zinc Coated Steel Tubes IS 4736: 1968
16. Gate Valves for Water lines IS 778: 1980
17. Copper Alloy Gate Globe Check IS 778: 1980

Valve for water lines
18. Butterfly Valve IS 13095: 1991
19. Steel Pipe flanges IS: 6392
20. Gaskets IS 638: 1979 (reaffirmed 1993)
21 Mild steel tubes & fittings IS 1239 Part I & II
22. Dual plate Check Valve for AP: 194

Water Lines
23. Color code for the identification IS 2379: 1963

Of pipe lines
24. Specific requirements for the IS 4064 (Part II) 1978

Direct switching of the individual
Motors.
25. PVC insulated (HD) Electric IS: 1554 (Part I)

Cables for working voltage up
Including 1100 Volts
PMC: NSL HVAC 19

26. HRC Cartridge fuse links IS 2208: 1976

Up to 650 Volts.
27. Starter IS 8554 (Part I) 1979
28. Inspection and testing of IS 732 (Part III) 1979

Installation
29. Galvanized steel wire for fencing IS 277: 1977
30. Three phase induction motors IS : 325
31. PVC insulated (heavy duty ) IS 1554 : 1981 Part I & II

Cables for working voltage
up to 1.1. KV and up to 11 KV
Grade respectively.
32. Code for practice for electrical IS 732 : 1989

wiring installations.
33. Code for practice for earthing IS 3043 : 1966
34. Horizontal centrifugal pumps IS : 1620
35. Centrifugal fans ( 1st. Division) IS 894 : 1987 (reaffirmed 1991)
36. Wrought aluminium & aluminium IS : 737

alloy sheet and strip for general
Engineering purposes.
37. Mild steel tubes, tublar and other IS : 1239

wrought steel fittings.
38. Bourdon tube pressure and vacuum IS : 3624

gauges.
39. Glossary of terms used in refrige- IS : 3615

ration and air-conditioning.
40. Code for practice for standard for IS : 7403

selection of standard worm and
helical gears.
41. Three phase induction motors. IS : 325
42. Specification for single phase small IS : 996
A/C & universal motors
PMC: NSL HVAC 20

43. Specifications for flame proof motors IS : 2148

44. Circuit breaker A.C IS 2516 : 1980 Part I & II
45. Contactors for A.C for voltage IS 2959 : 1975
upto 1100 V.
46. Low voltage switch gear and control IS 8623 : 1993 Part I & II
gear assemblies.
47. Code of practice for selection IS 3914

of starters for AC induction motors
48. Specification for cables glands IS 4821

49. Code for selection, installation & IS 10118 : 1982 Part I to IV
maintenance of switch gear and
control gear.
50. Conduits for electrical installations IS 9537 : 1981 Part I to IV
51. Permissible limits of noise level IS 12065 : 1987
for rotating electrical machines.
52. Code of practice for installation IS 3106 : 1966
and maintenance of motors
53. Bourden tube pressure and vacuum IS : 3624
gauges
54. Code of practice for selection of IS : 7403
standard worm and helical gear boxes.
55. Mild tubes, tubulars and other IS : 1239

wrought steel fittings.
56. Electrically welded steel pipes IS : 3589

for water, gas and sewage.
57. Gum metal gate, globe and check IS : 778
Valves for general purposes
58. Wrought aluminum and aluminum IS : 737
Alloy steel and strips for general
Engineering purposes
59. HRC cartridge fuse links upto 650 volts IS : 2208
60. PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric IS : 1554 ( Part I)
Cables for working voltage upto &
Including 1100 watts
61. Method for testing Panel type air IS 7613 : 1975 (reaffirmed 1991)
Filters for AC purposes
PMC: NSL HVAC 21

62. Unbounded glass wool for thermal IS 3690 : 1974
insulation ( 1st. Revision)
63. Expanded polystyrene for thermal IS 4671 : 1984 (reaffirmed)
insulation purposes. ( 1st. revision)
64. Propeller type AC Ventilation fans 1IS 2312 : 1967 (reaffirmed 1991)
65. Electrical axial flow fans IS 3588 : 1987 (reaffirmed 1991)
1.1.5 SAFTEY CODES

The following IS codes shall be followed:
Safety code for mechanical refrigeration IS 660
Safety code for air conditioning IS 659
Safety code for scaffolds & ladders IS 3696
Code of practice for fire precaution in IS 3016
Welding & cutting operations
Code for safety procedures and practices IS 5216
In electrical works
Code of practice for safety and health IS 3696
Requirements in electrical & gas welding
And cutting operations.
1.1.6 SPACE
All shop drawings shall be prepared by the A.C Contractor after examining the
Architectural & AC drawings & as per site.
1.1.7 TENTATIVE LAYOUT PLANS

The tentative layout plans enclosed with the tender documents are only for guidance
purposes only.
END OF SECTION-04
PMC: NSL HVAC 22

SECTION-05
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROLS
1.00 The air conditioning contractor must take all necessary precautions to have minimum
noise generation and its transmission. Minimum vibration as permitted by IS relevant
code shall be ensured. A few points for guidance only are given below:
1.01 a) Double fire retardant flexible connections shall be provided from air discharge to
outlet of air-handler to the duct.
b) Vibration isolation pads of suitable thickness commensurate to loading for
isolation of vibration shall be provided under all air handlers fans etc. in
consultation with manufacturer for proper selection of vibration isolators
c) Flexible conduit connections of minimum diameter of 50mm to motors shall be
provided. All loops should be large enough to allow connections to remain
flexible.
d) All conduit connection where conduits are 60mm or larger shall be made of 1.2
meters minimum length conduit installed in the shape of U and grossly slack to
provide maximum vibration isolation.
e) Operating clearance of 40mm shall be kept between the base and the inertia base.
f) The floor supported piping shall be mounted on pipe supports with 7.5mm ribbed
neoprene pads between the base plate of the pipes and the floors.
g) All items suspended from false ceiling shall be isolated on separate hangers.
h) In case of ducts, conduits, pipes & tubes the annular space between construction
and penetrating element shall be sealed with sand cement plaster.
i) The supply duct 5 Mt starting from air handling unit & suppy air duct collar of the
AHU shall be provided with acoustic lining of 25 mm thick fibre glass rigid board
and remaining will be insulated as indicated in the tender drawings. The duct
lining shall be done with fibre glass rigid board of density of 48 kg/cubic meter.
j) All axial flow fans shall be hanged with Vibration isolator spring .
k) The air-conditioning contractor shall take all other precautions or shall make his
own arrangements even if not specified in the tender documents for eliminating
high noise levels & shall minimize vibrations in all mechanical equipments
without any additional cost.
END OF SECTION-05
PMC: NSL HVAC 23

SECTION-06
STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF VAV TERMINAL UNIT
The scope of this section comprises supply installation, testing and commissioning of Single
Duct VAV Terminal Unit confirming to these specifications and in accordance with
requirements of drawings and schedule of quantities.
VAV is a single duct pressure dependent variable volume unit designed for use with standard air
handling systems at medium and low pressures. Room temperature is controlled by supplying
only enough conditioned air to the space to achieve room thermostat set point. Excess air is
diverted (bypassed) directly to the return air ceiling plenum for free or ducted return. Airflow to
each occupied zone will vary on thermostat demand, from full flow to shut-off or to a
mechanically set minimum air volume. A bypass box, also referred as a "dump box" handles
supply of primary air through its inlet and uses a bypass damper to divert partial supply air into
the plenum return. Room thermostat directly controls the damper to provide the volume of air
required to meet the thermal demand. The air volume and pressure requirements are set by an
Inlet volume control damper. Another manual damper for balancing the bypass air is provided
and has to be field adjusted to maintain minimum airflow to the space.
Construction:
Casing - 22 ga. galvanized steel with round inlets. Outlets are rectangular with flanged/slip
connections.
Damper - 20 Ga. (1.0mm) Galv. Steel Damper blade with seals.
Complete with internal sound absorbent/insulating open/closed cell Nitrile polymer lining
Easily adjustable bypass port balancing dampers.
Sizes range:
o Circular Inlet: 6" (150mm) to 20" (500mm) with capacities from 100 to 4100 CFM
o Elliptical inlet: upto 12” (300mm) x (700mm) with capacities upto 4200 CFM.
Minimum air volume stopper provided on electric actuator. It cannot be factory set and must be
field adjusted as required for the
application.
Controls:
Pressure dependent electronic control. Factory supplied and mounted.
Variety of control options available, based on applications. • Electronic thermostat and actuator
provide accurate
modulating control.
END OF SECTION - 06
PMC: NSL HVAC 24

SECTION-07
STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF THERMAL / ACOUSTIC
INSULATION
1) This section deals with supply and fixing of thermal / acoustic insulation of
Ducts, pipes etc. as per the specification given in this section
2) THERMAL DUCT INSULATION

For Duct thermal insulation - Nitrile Rubber – as follows:
3) INSULATION ON SHEET METAL DUCTING
OUTSIDE/INSIDE INSULATION FOR RECTANGULAR/OVAL DUCTING
Thickness of material:
For Coastal Ares:
Supply Duct running in Non AC areas : Thickness 25mm Closed Cell Elastomeric
Nitrile Rubber with Al PE Foil
Return Duct running in Non AC areas : Thickness 19 mm Closed Cell Elastomeric

Supply Duct Running in AC areas : Thickness 19mm Closed Cell Elastomeric

Return Duct Running in AC areas : Thickness 13mm Closed Cell Elastomeric
For Non- Coastal Ares:

Supply Duct running in Non AC areas : Thickness 19mm Closed Cell Elastomeric
Return Duct running in Non AC areas : Thickness 13 mm Closed Cell Elastomeric

Supply Duct Running in AC areas : Thickness 13mm Closed Cell Elastomeric

Return Duct Running in AC areas : Thickness 09mm Closed Cell Elastomeric
Note: No Al foil required for internal duct insulation.
4) MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
 Insulation material shall be Closed Cell Elastomeric Nitrile Rubber with anti-microbial
properties and with factory laminated Aluminum Foil with reinforced glass scrim of 12
PMC: NSL HVAC 25

microns thickness.
 Thermal conductivity of insulation material shall not exceed 0.033 W/(m.K) at mean
temperature of 0C as per EN 12667.
 Moisture Diffusion Resistance Factor or ‘µ’ value of insulation material shall be
minimum 10,000 without any external barrier as per EN 12086.
 The insulation material shall have fire performance such that it passes Class 1 as per
BS476 Part 7 for surface spread of flame and also passes Fire Propagation requirement as
per BS476 Part 6 to meet the Class ‘O’ Fire category as per 1991 Building Regulations
(England & Wales) and the Building Standards (Scotland) Regulations 1990.
 The insulation material shall have fire performance of V0, HB as per UL 94, 1996.
 The insulation material shall be FM (Factory Mutual), USA Approved.
 Density of insulation material shall be between 40 to 55 Kg/m3.
 The insulation material shall be dust and fibre free.
 The insulation material shall withstand maximum surface temperature of +85 Deg.C and
minimum surface temperature of +7 Deg.C as per EN 14706.
 The insulation material shall have an anti-microbial product, which is EPA

(Environmental Protection Agency), as an integral part of insulation that cannot be
washed off or worn off.
 The insulation material shall give enhanced level of protection against harmful Microbes
such as bacteria, mold, mildew and fungi and should confirm to following standards: DIN
EN ISO 846 Method A - Fungi / Mould Resistance and DIN EN ISO 846 Method C -
Bacterial Resistance.
 The material shall have ODP (Ozone Depletion Potential) and GWP (Global Warming
Potential) of Zero.
 The Aluminum foil shall be of 12 micron thickness with reinforced glass scrim and
weight shall be 70 gsm as per EN 22286, tensile strength shall be 250N/50mm as per ISO
527-3 with elongation of 4% as per DIN 53354.
 Thickness of the insulation shall be as specified for the individual application.

 The insulation material shall be installed as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
5) ADHESIVE FOR DUCT THERMAL INSULATION:-:

 Special adhesive for installing all flexible insulation materials. Adhesive shall be used for
bonding the seams securely together. All butt & longitudinal joints, fittings and coverings
must be closed with adhesive.
 The adhesive shall be specially formulated for the Duct insulation application and
supplied by insulation manufacturer. The adhesive shall be free from benzene.
PMC: NSL HVAC 26

 The adhesive shall have excellent bonding to porous and non-porous surfaces.
Technical Details
Solvent Based Rubber contact adhesive
Colour: Pale Yellow
Temperature Range: +5°C to +85°C
Form: Liquid
Material: Rubber based contact adhesive in blend of solvents
Minimum Drying Time (airing time): 4-5 minutes
Setting Time: 36 hours
Viscosity @ 30°C: 700 - 1200 cps
Specific Gravity: 0.80 - 0.85 g/cc
Density: 0.083 kg/m3 + 0.01
Flash Point: > 10 °C
Coverage: 6-8 square meters of bonded area per Litre (Bonded area – Area of insulation
material and duct together)
Tack Retention Time: 25 minutes
Or CRRX Compound of Shalimar Product for Adhesive.
6) ROUND DUCT THERMAL INSULATION :
Insulation for Round or capsule duct should be carried out from inside of the duct
applied with good quality adhesive. Contents of thickness & adhesive are
described as above.
7) DUCT THERMAL INSULATION : (Within the building)
Thickness & Nitrile specifications shall be above point no 3.
8) EXPOSED TO SUN , THERMAL INSULATION :-
For Rectangular ducts (Exposed to Sun): Thickness & Nitrile specifications

shall be as per point no 3
Further, the material should be with a protective layer of mechanical cloth which is
factory laminated over the Nitrile rubber.
9) SPECIFICATION FOR CLOTH
- Manufacturer bonded / Factory Laminated Treated Woven Glass Fibre

Technical Details: Temperature Range: 0°C to + 105°C Overall (irrespective of the
base product) Color: Black / Grey / Red / Blue
Treatment: Shall be treated Water Based Acrylic binder to give crisp and non-piling
PMC: NSL HVAC 27

property to the fabric, to help in easy installation, minimize fiber erosion, good aesthetics
and resistance to abrasion. Fibre spillage / Thread raveling should be minimum.
Density: 200 +/- 20 GSM
Weight: 205 +/- 10 grams per square meter
Tensile Strength: 275 +/- 25 Kg / 50 mm
(minimum) Thickness: 0.18 mm / 7 mill
Pressure sensitive self-adhesive tape (PSA) Tape: 50 mm width (with glass cloth
only).
Type: Solvent based Acrylic Adhesive
Peel Strength: 1000 gm / 25 mm (minimum) - (Adhesive to steel)

UV Resistance: Glass Cloth shall be UV resistant for artificial weathering as per EN ISO
4892-2 Method - A.
Specification for Tapes:
Glass Cloth foil based tape with self-adhesive ability to ensure 100% leak-proof joints.
The tape shall be with a pre coated layer of solvent based adhesive which is non-
hazardous in nature.
Width: 50 mm +/- 2 mm
GC Thickness: 180 micron
Length: 8.4 meter +/- 100 mm
10) DUCT ACOUSTIC INSUALTION:-
Thickness for Duct Acoustic: 15 mm
Specifications: Ducts are included in Schedule of Quantities shall be provided with

acoustic lining of thermal insulation for a distance of minimum 5 meters (or 30% of the
duct length whichever is more).
Scope: The scope of this section comprises the supply and application of insulation
conforming to these specifications.
Acoustic Insulation
 Acoustic insulation material shall be Open Cell Engineered Nitrile Rubber foam.
 The Random Incidence Sound Absorption Coefficient (RISAC) of the material - Tested
as per ISO 354:2003, ISO 11654:1997 & ASTM C 423 and shall be minimum as per
PMC: NSL HVAC 28

enclosed chart.
Freq 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC
(Hz)
6 mm 0.00 0.05 0.10 0.25 0.55 1.00 0.20
10 mm 0.00 0.05 0.15 0.40 0.85 1.00 0.35
15 mm 0.00 0.10 0.30 0.75 1.00 0.90 0.55
20 mm 0.05 0.15 0.40 0.90 1.00 0.95 0.60
25 mm 0.05 0.25 0.85 1.00 0.90 0.95 0.80
30 mm 0.10 0.35 0.95 1.00 0.95 1.00 0.85
40 mm 0.15 0.50 1.00 0.90 0.95 0.95 0.85
50 mm 0.25 0.75 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.05
 The acoustic insulation material shall be dust and fibre free.

 The acoustic insulation material shall have good sound absorption, damping and barrier
properties.
 The density of acoustic insulation material shall be within 140-180 Kg/m3.
 The acoustic insulation material shall have Microban®* antimicrobial product protection,
and shall pass Fungi / Mould Resistance as per DIN EN ISO 846 method A and Bacterial
Resistance as per DIN EN ISO 846 method C, from an independent testing agency.
 The acoustic insulation material shall have a thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.047
W/(m.K) @ 20 Deg. C as per EN 12667.
 The acoustic insulation material shall withstand maximum surface temperature of +85
Deg.C and minimum surface temperature of -20 Deg.C as per EN 14706.
 The material shall conform to Class 1 rating for surface spread of Flame in accordance to
BS 476 Part 7 & UL 94 (HB, V-0) in accordance to UL 94, 1996.
 The acoustic insulation material shall pass Air Erosion Resistance Test in accordance to
ASTM Standard C 1071-05 without any laminate or covering (section 12.7), from an
independent accredited testing agency.
 Thickness of the insulation shall be as specified for the individual application.
 The insulation material shall be installed as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
Adhesive for Duct Acoustic Insulation:
Specifications: The adhesive shall be formulated for the Duct insulation application and
supplied by insulation (Nitrile) manufacturer. The adhesive shall be rubber based, solvent
based contact adhesive, free from benzene. The adhesive shall have minimum tear
strength resistance of > 20 N / 25 mm when tested as per AFERA – 4001. The adhesive
shall be quick drying characteristics for tropical conditions and shall have service
temperature of 0 deg to +85 °C.
Installation Procedure
The inside surface for the ducts shall be covered with adhesive recommended by the
manufacturer. Cut Foamed sheets into required sizes apply adhesive on the foam and
stick it to the duct surface
11) TREATED WOVEN GLASS FIBRE CLOTH SPECIFICATION :-
PMC: NSL HVAC 29

Technical Details: Temperature Range: 0°C to + 105°C Overall (irrespective of the base
product) Colour: Black / Grey / Red / Blue
Treatment: Shall be treated Water Based Acrylic binder to give crisp and non-piling
property to the fabric, to help in easy installation, minimize fiber erosion, good aesthetics
and resistance to abrasion. Fibre spillage / Thread raveling should be minimum.
Density: 200 +/- 20 GSM
Weight: 205 +/- 10 grams per square meter
Tensile Strength: 275 +/- 25 Kg / 50 mm
(Minimum) Thickness: 0.18 mm / 7 mill
Pressure sensitive self-adhesive tape (PSA) Tape: 50 mm width (with glass cloth
only).
Type: Solvent based Acrylic Adhesive
Peel Strength: 1000 gm / 25 mm (minimum) - (Adhesive to steel)
UV Resistance: Glass Cloth shall be UV resistant for artificial weathering as per EN ISO
4892-2 Method - A.
12) SPECIFICATION FOR TAPES :-
Glass Cloth foil based tape with self-adhesive ability. The tape comes with a pre coated
layer of solvent based adhesive which is non-hazardous in nature. Tape ensures 100%
leak-proof joints whether used along with sheets with GC laminate or tubes with
laminate.
Width: 50 mm +/- 2 mm
Thickness: 180 micron
Length: 8.4 meter +/- 100 mm
13) DRAIN PIPE INSULATION
 Drain pipes carrying condensate water shall be insulated with 9 mm thick Nitrile
rubber as specified in the Boq.
 (Class ‘0’ Nitrile - sleeve without bonded cloth & neither self-sleeve Nitrile shall be used
for drain piping) i.e. only plain Nitrile rubber sleeve to be applied with the help of
specified adhesive. In case the pipes are exposed, then mechanical cloth (protection
against mechanical impact and UV protection, insulation manufacturer bonded Treated
Woven Glass Fibre Covering) should be applied separately over the insulation.
14) THERMAL DUCT INSULATION- XLPE

For Duct thermal insulation - XLPE – as follows:
Fixing of external thermal insulation on ducts with Closed Cell Cross Linked
Polyethylene (XLPE) Foam of density 30 Kg/m³ with 12 mm /9mm thick & thermal
Conductive. is 0.032 W/m²K at an average Temperature of 23°C. The Material Shall be
rated as Class 1, As per BS 476 Part 6 & 7(1987) ISO 5659 - 2, The Smoke Density as
per As - 1530.3 Shall not exceed 1. The Material shall have Fire Approval from CBRI-
PMC: NSL HVAC 30

Roorkie. Adhesive used for setting the insulation shall be non - flammable, vapour
Proof.
To be applied by manufacturer approved adhesive and installation team. All Joints should
be sealed with 50 mm same PE tape and Flange to be overlapped by 6" width of the same
material thickness. Finally Duct insulated should be strapped by 12 mm Plastic Packing
strip at every meter of duct length centre to centre.
INSULATION ON SHEET METAL DUCTING
a) Supply Air Duct 12 mm thick Closed Cell Cross Linked Polyethylene

(XLPE) Insulated with factory Laminated Al PE Foil.
a) Return Air Duct 09 mm thick Closed Cell Cross Linked Polyethylene

b) Fresh Air Duct 12 mm thick Closed Cell Cross Linked Polyethylene

c) Duct Collars 12 mm thick Closed Cell Cross Linked Polyethylene

15) ACOUSTIC LINING OF DUCT
a) RESIN BONDED FIBRE GLASS WOOL

The Thermal conductivity values in W/m.K of fibre glass shall confirm to following:
Mean Temperature °C Density in Kg / Cmt. Thermal Conductivity

W/m.k
For Duct Lining
25 C 48 0.030
50 C 48 0.033
The material to be used for duct lining shall be 25 mm thick resin bonded fibre glass rigid
board having a density of 48 Kg/m³ & covered with 0.5 mm thick perforated aluminum
sheet. The lining of initial length of the duct shall be done as shown in the tender layout
drawings & shall be carried out as follows.
a) Clean the duct piece thoroughly,
b) Fix the board of suitable thickness inside the duct & cover with fiber glass tissue
paper.
PMC: NSL HVAC 31

c) Cover the insulation board with 0.5mm thick perforated aluminum sheet with
at least 20% perforation.
d) Secure the insulation board & aluminum sheet with cadmium coated bolts nuts & cup
washers / steel screws.
f) Finally seal the ends completely, so that no lining material is exposed.

.
END OF SECTION -07
PMC: NSL HVAC 32

SECTION-08
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR AIR CIRCULATION SYSTEM
1.0 This section deals with supply, erection, testing & balancing of GI sheet metal duct work
either site fabricated or Factory fabricated as specified in the SECTION-23 Detailed
Bill of Quantities and air registers conforming to specifications as given below:
2.0 MATERIAL FOR RECTANGULAR DUCTING: - SITE FABRICATED
The duct shall be fabricated out of galvanized sheet, class VIII (Zinc coating 120
gm/m² as per the parameters given below which are conforming to IS 655-1963.
MAXIMUM THICKNESS TYPE OF TRANSVERSE BRACING

SIDE OF GI SHEET JOINT CONNECTIONS
(1) (2) (3) (4)

mm mm
Up to 300 0.63 S-drive, pocket or bar None
Slips, on 2.5m centers
301 to 600 0.63 S-drive, pocket or bar None

601 to 750 slips, on 2.5m centers 25 x 25 x 3 mm
S-drive, 25mm pocket angles, 1.2m
or 25 mm bar slips on from joint
2.5m centers.
751 to 1000 0.80 Drive, 25-mm pocket or 25 x 25 x 3 mm

25mm bar slips, on 2.5 m angles, 1.2 m
centers 40 x 40 mm angle from joint
Connections,
1001 to 1500 or 40-mm bar slips, with 40 x 40 x 3 mm
35 x 3 mm bar reinforcing angles, 1.2 m from
on 2.5 m centres. joints
1501 to 2250 1.00 40 x 40 mm angle conn- 40 x 40 x 3 mm

ections, or 40-mm bar diagonal angles, or
slips, 1 m maximum 40 x 40 x 3 mm
centers with 35 x 3 mm angle 60 cm from
bar reinforcing . joint.
2250 to above* 1.25 50 x 50 mm angle connec- 40 x 40 x 4 mm

tions, or 40 mm pocket or diagonal angles, or
40 mm bar slips, 1 m max. 40 x 40 x 3 mm
centers with 35 x 3 mm bar angles, 60 cm
Reinforcing. From joint.
PMC: NSL HVAC 33

* Ducts 2250 mm and larger require special field study for hanging and supporting
Methods.
In addition to above the following points should be also taken into account while
fabrication of ducts.
a) All ducts of size larger than 450mm shall be cross broken.
b) All ducts shall be supported from the ceiling / slab by means of MS rods of dia
9mm with MS angle of size 40 x 40 x 5 mm at the bottom with neoprene pad in
between the duct & MS angle. The ducts shall be suspended from the ceiling with
the help of dash fasteners. Provision for necessary ancillary materials required for
hanging the ducts shall be arranged by the contractor.
c) The vanes shall be provided wherever required and shall be securely fastened to
prevent noise & vibration.
d) The rubber gasket shall be installed between duct flanges in all connections and
joints.
e) All flanges and supports should be primer coated.
f) The flexible joints shall be fitted to the delivery side of AHU fans with Fire
Retardant Double canvass. The length of flexible joints should not be less than
150 mm and not more than 300 mm between faces.
g) The ducting work can be modified if deemed necessary in consultation with the
Engineer in Charge to suit actual site conditions in the building.
h) Box Type Dampers & Splitters
These dampers shall be provided in the ducting work for proper control and
balancing of air distribution. All dampers shall be louver type robust construction.
These dampers shall be fitted with easily accessible operating mechanism,
complete with links, levers, quadrant for proper control and setting in a desired
position. The position of the handle of the damper operating mechanism shall be
clearly visible and shall indicate the position of the damper in the duct. All
dampers, splitters shall be fabricated out of G.S. sheet of two gauges higher than
the duct piece having these fittings. Dampers shall be installed in duct at all
required locations. No extra payment shall be made separately since these
form part of Air Circulation System.
NOTE: In case angle iron supports are not feasible to be installed for supporting the
ducts due to height constraint then the contractor shall support the ducts with M.S flats
of at least double the thickness of the angle iron supports.
PMC: NSL HVAC 34

3.0 MATERIAL FOR RECTANGULAR DUCTING: - FACTORY FABRICATED
DUCT MATERIAL
All ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheets of the following thickness:
Gauge Thickness
(mm)
Rectangular ducts upto 750mm 24 0.63
Rectangular ducts greater than 750 mm

and upto 1500mm 22 0.80
Rectangular ducts greater than 1500mm

and upto 2250mm 20 1.00
Rectangular ducts greater than 2250mm 18 1.25
FACTORY FABRICATED DUCTS SHALL HAVE THE THICKNESS OF THE SHEET

AS ABOVE AND SHOULD HAVE BEADING AT EVERY 300mm.
Recommended SMACNA Standard at 4 Feet Transverse Joint Reinforcement
Duct static pressure

Sin Inches 2''
Duct Size (mm)
150-300 B-26
301-550 C-26
551-700 D-26
701-900 E-24
901-1000 F-22
1001-1200 G-22
1201-1300 H-20
1301-1500 H-20 R
1501-1800 I-18
1801-2100 J-18 R
2101-2400 J-18 R
Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside. Longitudinal seams shall be airtight and
at corners, which shall be either Pittsburgh or snap Button Punch as per SMACNA
practice, to ensure air tightness.
Note:
 SMACNA – Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractor National Association
Inc. “ MVAC Duct construction standard Metal & Flexible” – 1995 USA.
 In 1” static pressure i.e. comfort cooling application optional “ C&S and C&SS
cleats joints can be used
PMC: NSL HVAC 35

Upto 450mm duct size use C&S Cleats
451 mm to 750mm duct size use “ C&SS cleats.
Over 750mm duct size use TDC Flanges with respective gauges as mentioned above.
 Alphabets B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I and J per SMACNA 1995, transverse joint
reinforcement table 1-12m (T-25b flanged) and TDC addendum.
 R means reinforcement with Zeebar Stiffener.
DUCT FABRICATION
All Galvanized ducts shall be factory fabricated from lock form grade galvanized sheet
steel zinc coated conforming with IS: 277, coating grade 120 or aluminium sheets
conforming to ISS:737-1955 (wherever aluminium ducts are specified).and installed in a
workman like manner. To suite pieces shall be fabricated at site as per ISS: 655 latest
editions.
Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. All joints
shall be made airtight by applying sealant during the assembly of the ductwork; Sealing
of the seams shall be accomplished by using approved sealant. Transverse joints shall be
made using sponge rubber sulphur-free foam rubber gasketing (3mm thick and 20mm
wide) All exposed ducts within conditioned spaces shall have only slip joints and no
flanged joints. The internal ends of slip joints shall be made in the direction of Air flow.
Changes in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual. Curved elbows, unless
otherwise approved, shall have a center line radius equal to one and half times the width
of the duct. Air turns shall be installed in all abrupt elbows and shall consist of curved
metal blades or vanes, arranged to permit the air to make the turns without appreciable
turbulence.
All ducts shall be rigid and shall be adequately supported and braced where required with
standing seams to keep the ducts true to shape and to prevent buckling, vibration or
breathing.
All sheet metal connections, partitions and plenums required to confine the flow of air to
and through the filters and fans, shall be constructed out of 18 gauge galvanized steel
sheet, thoroughly stiffened with 25mm x 25mm x 3mm angle iron braces and fitted with
all necessary doors, to give access to all parts of the apparatus. Doors shall not be less
than 45cm x 45cm in size.
Volume control dampers wherever indicated on the drawings shall be installed as a
minimum. The final duct design may call for additional volume control dampers based
on final duct configuration.
4.0 MATERIAL FOR OVAL / ROUND DUCTING: - FACTORY FABRICATED
SCOPE
The Specification covers the general design material , construction features ,
manufactures ,shop inspection & testing at manufacture‘s work ,delivery at site ,
installation testing commissioning & carrying out performance test at site of air
PMC: NSL HVAC 36

distribution system. All ducts shall be factory fabricated. The accepted factories are listed
in the approved list of makes.
CODES & STANDARDS
The design material ,construction features ,manufactures ,inspection ,testing &
performance of air distribution system shall comply with all currently applicable statues
regulation , codes & standards in the locality where the system is to be installed nothing
in the specification shall be constructed to relieve the contractor of this responsibility . In
particular, the air distribution system shall conform to the latest edition of following
standards:
IS 277 Galvanized Steel Sheets (Plain & Corrugated)
SMACNA MVAC system –Testing adjusting & balancing
UL181 Factory made air ducts & connectors
UL555 Fire dampers
ASHRAE 70 method of testing for rating the performance of air outlets & inlets
MATERIAL REQUIREMENT:
Ducting shall be fabricated of galvanized steel sheet & stainless steel as specified in BOQ
a) GSS duct shall be lock forming grade , zinc coated conforming to IS 277 coated grade
120 GSM
b) SS duct shall be of SS304 as per ASTMA167
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES:
Fabricated detail shall be generally in accordance with the detail given here under:
ROUND DUCT:
a) Dead End caps / Blank off shall be dish type.
b) Round duct thickness in mm/G for GSS/SS shall be given below:
c) Slip type coupling shall be used for transverse joints & shall be joined with each other
with Al 3mm to 5mm POP RIVERTS.
Up to 600mm 3mm POP RIVERTS

Above 600mm 5mm POP RIVERTS
d) Duct shall be forming using lock forming machine.
ROUNDDUCT Up to65mm WC static

S.NO Gauge DIAMETER(mm) pressure positive
Spiral Seam (mm
thick/Gauge)
1 24G Up to 200mm dia 0.63 /24
2 24G 201 to 350mm dia 0.63 /24
3 24G 350 to 600mm dia 0.63 /24

4 22G 601 to 900mm 0.80/22
5 20G 901 to 1250mm 1.00/20

6 18G 1251 to 1600 1.25/18
Round duct shall have longitudinal or spiral seam as specifies above
PMC: NSL HVAC 37

DUCT SUPPORTS & HANGERS:
Round duct shall be supported using one/two hanger straps & rods. Straps or Rods shall be of
GSS. Supporting of round duct shall be as given below:
G.IThreaded
S.No Duct Dia.mm G.I Strap 2.5mm Thick Rod
Nos. Width(mm) Thickness(G) Nos. Dia. MM
1 Up to 600mm dia 1 30 22 1 10
601 to 900mm
2 dia 1 30 20 1 10
901 to 1250mm
3 dia 2 30 20 2 10
1251to1600mm
4 dia 2 40 18 2 10
Zinc coated anchor fasteners or embedded plates shall be provided for upper attachment in the
buildings. Anchor fasteners, embedded plates & necessary supports to hang the duct shall be
provided by the contractors. Anchor fasteners shall be loaded to maximum 30% of the maximum
rated capacity specify by the mafuctures. Site engineers shall approve all anchors fasteners for
supporting ducts. In case of insulated duct anchor fasteners shall be selected based on the actual
load.
The spacing between supports should not be greater than 2.5meter
5.0 STEEL WIRE ROPE HANGER & SUPPORTS:-
Wire Hangers shall be used to suspend all static HVAC Air Distribution services.
Wire Hangers should consist of a pre-formed wire rope sling with a range of end fixings
to fit various substrates and service fixings, these include a ferruled loop, permanently
fixed threaded M6 (or M8, M10) stud, permanently fixed nipple end with toggle, at one
end or hook or eyelet, cladding hook, barrel, wedge anchor, eyebolt anchor or any other
end fixture type or size as per manufacturers recommendation and design. The end
fixings and the wire must be of the same manufacturer with several options available.
The system should be secured and tensioned with a Hanger self-locking grip at the other
end. Once the grip is locked for safety purpose unlocking should only be done by using a
separate setting key and should not be an integral part of the self-locking grip. Only wire
and/or supports supplied and/or approved, shall be used with the system.
a. Wire Hangers should have been independently tested by Lloyds Register. APAVE, TUV,
UL NEBS, CSA, Chiltern International fire, ADCAS, Intertek, ECA, and SMACNA,
approved by ULC and CSA and comply with the requirements of DW/144 and BSRIA –
wire Rope Suspension systems. Wire rope should be manufactured to BSEN 12385: 2002
PMC: NSL HVAC 38

The contractor shall select the correct specification of wire hanger to use for supporting
each particular service from table 1 below. Each size is designated with a maximum safe
working load limit (which incorporates a 5:1 safety factor).
The correct specification of wire hanger required is determined using the following
formula.
Weight per meter of object suspended (kg) X distance between suspension points (m)
= weight loading per Hanger suspension point (kg).
Where the installed wire rope is not vertical then the working load limit shall be reduced in
accordance with the recommendations give in the manufacturer’s handbook.
The contractor shall select the correct length of wire rope required to support the service.
Lengths from 1-10m lengths. Specials can be made, check with manufacturer. No in–line
joints should be made in the rope.
Table. 1
Wire (Gripple) Hanger Safe Working Loads

minimum breaking load working load limit
size of Wire Rope (kg/lbs)
No. 1 80kg/176 lbs 0-10 kg / 0-22 lbs
No. 2 260kg/572 lbs 10-45 kg / 23-100 lbs
No. 3 580kg/1276 lbs 45-90 kg / 101-200 lbs
No. 4 1500kg/3300 lbs 90-225 kg / 210-495 lbs
No. 5 2160kg/4752 lbs 225-325 kg / 496-715 lbs
No. 6 2500kg/5500 lbs 325-500 kg / 715-1100 lbs
The standard range of Hanger Kits should contain galvanized high tensile steel wire rope or
stainless steel wire rope as per the application, the minimum specification is as above and should
be manufactured to BS 302 (1987), BSEN12385. Comply with manufacturer's load ratings
and recommended installation procedures.Note the testing is done to the minimum breaking
load of the wire thus giving a minimum safety factor of 5: 1.
HVAC Supports – Gripple Hanger Supports are suitable for: Rectangular duct, Spiral
Duct, Oval Duct, Fabric Duct, Desertification fans, Air Conditioning Units, Plenum Boxes,
Fan Coil Units, Diffusers
Ducting Supports:
a) All ductwork shall be independently supported from building construction. All

horizontal ducts shall be rigidly and securely supported, in an approved manner, with
PMC: NSL HVAC 39

hangers formed of galvanized steel wire ropes and galvanized steel angle/channel or a
pair of brackets, connected by galvanized steel wire hangers under ducts, rigid supports
may be provided at certain interval if need be. The spacing between supports should be
not greater than 2.4 meter. All vertical ductwork shall be supported by structural
members on each floor slab. Duct supports may be through galvanized steel insert plates
or Toggle end wire fixing left in slab at the time of slab casting. Galvanized steel cleat
with a hole for passing the wire rope hanger shall be welded to the plates. Trapeze hanger
formed of galvanized steel wire rope using Gripple shall be hung through these cleats.
Wherever use of metal insert plates is not feasible, duct support shall be through
dash/anchor fastener driven into the concrete slab by electrically operated gun. Wire rope
supports shall hang through the cleats or wire rope threaded studs can be screwed into the
anchor fasteners. In case of PEB structure Loop and Catenary system can be used based
on the site conditions as per approved suspension system drawings.
b) All horizontal ducts shall be adequately secured and supported. In an approved manner,
with trapeze Hangers formed of galvanized steel wire rope in a cradle support method
(refer to typical drawings) under ducts at no greater than 3000mm centre, for 3001mm-
above appropriate size angle along with neoprene pad in between the duct & MS angle
should be used with prior approval. All vertical duct work shall be supported by
structural members on each floor slab. Duct support shall be through dash / anchor
fastener driven into the concrete slab by electrically operated gun. Hanger wires shall
then hang around the ducting. Rigid supports shall be used in conjunction with wire rope
hangers to assist with alignment of services where recommended for by the manufacturer.
Rigid support must also be used in conjunction with wire rope hangers with duct work at
each change of direction or connection or as per approved drawings. Support ducting in
accordance with Schedule I at the end of this Section. Any other Gripple solution can be
used based on manufacturer’s recommendation on site conditions after prior approval. In
cases of Spiral ducting the wire can be wrapped directly around the ducting without the
need for a spiral ducting clamp for sizes above 1100 a cradle support should be provided,
refer to manufacturer’s recommendations.
c) Ducting over furred ceiling shall be supported from the slab above or from beams after
obtaining approval of Construction manager/consultant. In no case shall any duct be
supported from false ceiling Hangers or be permitted to rest on false ceiling. All metal
work in dead or furred down spaces shall be erected in time to occasion no delay to other
Contractor’s work in the building. All supports of pipe shall be taken from structural
slab/wall by means of fastener.
Catenary Supports: Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations on Catenary supports
with C-clip, special care should be taken with tensioning of the wire and angles at which
the installation of services are made.
Stainless Steel Supports should be available for food, chemical and High Corrosion areas
near coastlines.
Refer to manufacturers catalogue and installation guide for further technical
information.Comply with manufacturer's load ratings and recommended installation
procedures.
Schedule I: Duct Hanger Schedule
PMC: NSL HVAC 40

For ducts with external SP upto 250 Pa For ducts with external SP upto 500 Pa
Maximum Duct Size Gauge Gripple Maximum Duct Size Gauge Gripple
(mm) Hanger No. (mm) Hanger No.
1 - 750 26 1 or 2 1–600 mm 26 1 or 2
751-1000 26 2 601-750 mm 26 2
1001-1200 24 2 or 3 751-1000 mm 24 2 or 3
1201 - 1500 24 3 1001-1200 mm 22 3 or 4
1501 - 1800 22 3 or 4 1201-1300 mm 20 3 or 4
1801-2100 20 3 or 4 1301-1500 mm 18 4
2101‐2700 18 4 1501-1800 mm 18 4
1801-2100 mm 18 4
2101-2250 mm 18 4 or 5
2251-2400 mm 18 4 or 5
2401-2700 mm 18 4 or 5
Notes: All supports are considered at 2400 mm interval in above table and may vary
as per the design but should not be greater than 2400mm.
Desertification fans, Air Conditioning Units, Plenum Boxes, Radiant Panels,

Heaters, Fan Coil Units, Diffusers, Cassette units and Chilled Beams.
All units shall be adequately secured and supported in an approved manner using wire
hanger suspension Y fit solution as per manufacturers’ recommendation with prior
approval.
Rigid Supports: `
Rigid supports if required in conjunction with wire hangers shall be of steel, adjustable
for height and Zinc chromate primer coated and finish coated black. Where supports and
clamps are of dissimilar materials, a gasket shall be provided in between. If the MS angle
at the bottom if required as per design should be as per following table:
Longer size
of Duct Type of Joints
Up to 750 25x25x3 mm L angle with M8 nuts & bolts
751-1000 25x25x3 mm L angle with M8 nuts & bolts
2251 &
above 50x50x6 mm L angle with M10 nuts & bolts
All the supporting system should be supplied from same manufacturer.
PMC: NSL HVAC 41

6.0 THE SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR GRILLS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS
The supply and return air grills and ceiling diffusers shall be made of 50 micron powder
coated extruded aluminum sections. The supply air grills / diffusers shall be provided
with screw operated opposed blade volume control device made of extruded aluminum in
black anodized finish.
All grills / diffusers shall have soft continuous rubber / foam gasket between the
periphery of the grills / diffusers and surface on which it has to be mounted. The colour
of grills / diffuser shall be as per the approval of the Engineer in Charge.
7.0 LINEAR SUPPLY AND RETURN GRILLS

The linear continuous supply / return air grills shall be made of 50 micron powder coated
extruded aluminum construction with fixed horizontal bars. The thickness of fixed bar
louvers shall be 5mm in front and the flange shall be 20mm wide with round edges. The
register shall be suitable for concealed fixing and horizontal bars of the grills shall
mechanically crimped from the back to hold them.
The colour of grills shall be as per the approval of the Engineer in Charge. The volume
control device made of extruded aluminum construction in black anodised finish shall be
provided in supply air duct collars only.
8.0 FRONT FIXED BAR REAR ADJUSTABLE LOUVERED GRILLS.

The grills shall be made of 50 micron powder coated extruded aluminum construction
with front fixed horizontal bar at 0 degree inclination with one way or two way deflection
with rear vertical individually adjustable louvers in black shade mounted on Nylon
bushes to hold deflection setting under all conditions of velocity and pressure.
The colour of grills shall be as per the approval of the Engineer in Charge. The volume
control device of extruded aluminum construction in black anodised finish shall be
provided in supply air duct collars.
9.0 SQUARE / RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS.

The square / rectangular ceiling diffusers shall be made of 50 micron powder coated
extruded aluminum construction with flush fixed pattern. The diffusers shall have Anti-
Smudge ring and spring loaded removable central core in various pattern for air flow
direction. The diffusers shall be mounted by concealed screw fixing arrangement. The
volume control device of extruded aluminum construction in black anodised finish shall
be provided in supply air diffusers. The colour of diffuser shall be as per the approval of
the Engineer in Charge.
10.0 VOLUME CONTROL DEVICE

The opposed blade volume control device shall be made of Powder Coated extruded
aluminum construction in black anodised finish. Opposed blades shall be pivoted to
extruded aluminum frame with Nylon bushes. Specially designed blade shall have an
overlapping lip which shall ensure a tight closure.
11.0 FRESH AIR INTAKE LOUVERS WITH BIRD SCREEN

The fresh air intake louvers at least 50mm deep will be made of 50 micron powder coated
extruded aluminum construction. Bird / insect screen will be provided with the intake
PMC: NSL HVAC 42

louvers. The blades shall be inclined at 45 degree on a 40mm blade pitch to minimize
water ingress. The lowest blade of the assembly shall be extended out slightly to facilitate
disposal of rain water without falling on door / wall on which it is mounted.
The intake louvers shall be provided with factory fitted aluminum construction volume
control dampers in black anodised finish.
12.0 JET NOZZLE /CIRCULAR DIFFUSER

The jet diffusers shall be made of 50 micron powder coated extruded aluminum
construction frame & inner rings. Jet nozzle section is mounted in aluminum square plate
covered by flange border. Nozzle cane adjusted 30° /40° up and down to maintain
required level/through as per site .It also be rotated 360° by adjusted the mounting frame .
The noise level for jet nozzles shall not exceed to 35 db for air quantity.
The color of jet diffuser shall be as per the approval of the Engineer in Charge
5.0 PAINTING
All ducts collar / shoot behind the grills / diffuser shall be given at least two coats oil
black enamel paints.
6.0 TESTING
The complete duct system shall be tested for air leakage & complete air distribution
system shall be balanced in accordance with air quantities indicated on the approved
drawing.
END OF SECTION-08
PMC: NSL HVAC 43

SECTION-09
STANDARD SPECIFICATION ON ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND
STARTERS
1.00 This section deals with supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all types of
motors used for , air-handlers, etc. The motor installation, wiring & its control shall be
carried out in accordance with the specifications as detailed below.
1.10 MOTORS
MAKE OF MOTORS
The make of motors shall be as specified in List of Approved Make.
a) The motor shall be of the following design and should run at all loads without any
appreciable noise or hum.
i) Totally enclosed fan cooled Sq. Cage.
ii) Screen protected drip proof wound Sq. Cage motor.
Enclosure and type of motor shall depend upon duty and usage unless otherwise
specified.
b) The winding of motors shall be class ‘F’ insulation and suitable for local conditions.
The insulation of motors shall confirm to IS:325/1978.
c) All motors shall comply with IS:325, IEC-34.1 or BS – 2313, IEC-72.1 for foot
mounted motors.
d) The rating of the motor shall be as indicated in the Schedule of Equipment & Bill of
Quantities. The motors shall be selected on the basis of ambient temperatures and
allowable maximum temperature rise.
e) Motor above 1HP shall be three phase unless otherwise specified.
f) All motors shall be rated for continuous duty as per IS:325. Motor shall be suitable
for operation on 415 volts ± 10% volts, 50 ± 5% Hz AC supply (or 230 ± 10% volts,
50 ± 5% Hz for single phase AC supply).
g) Motors shall be provided with cable box to receive Aluminum conductors, PVC
insulated, PVC sheathed and armoured cables.
h) All motors shall be provided with combination of ‘Ball and Roller Bearing’. Suitable
grease nipples for regreasing the bearing shall be provided.
PMC: NSL HVAC 44

i) Motors above 0.25 HP shall be provided with overload protection. Motors above 100
HP shall be provided with thermal protection and thermostat detector in the starter
winding.
j) The starter current and the type of starter to be used shall be as follows (unless
otherwise specified)
Type of motor Starting Current Starting method
a) Sq. Cage motor 600% of full load D.O.L

up to 7.5 hp current
b) Above 7.5 hp 250% of full load Star / Delta

up to 60 hp current
c) 75 HP & above 200% of full load Closed transition Star / Delta

current
1.20 MOTOR STARTERS
a) All starters shall confirm to IS: 13947. The starter shall be enclosed in sheet metal
enclosure, which would be dust vermin proof.
b) All starters should have suitable range of voltage and frequency.
c) All starter shall have integral stop/start push button of international colour code.
d) Contactor shall have number of poles as required for appropriate duty. Contacts
should be made of solid silver faced & shall be suitable for at least 40 contacts per
hours.
e) In event of power failure, the starter should automatically disconnect.
f) All starters shall be provided with thermal over load relay.
g) All star delta starters shall have adjustable timers.
h) Terminal blocks with integral insulating barrier shall be provided for each starter.
i) All starters shall be provided as specified in Bill of Quantities. All starters shall
be compatible to the drive and driven equipment.
j) Extra contact for interlocking purpose shall be provided in the starter.
1.30 INSTALLATION OF MOTORS
PMC: NSL HVAC 45

a) The motor and drive machine shall be fixed on slide rails to facilitate belt and
other adjustments.
b) Vibration isolation arrangement shall be provided.
c) The installation of motor shall be carried out as per IS: 900.
d) All motor shall be wired as per specifications. Earthing of motor frame shall be
done with GI strips as specified in ‘Bill of Quantities’.
e) All motors shall be tested at manufacturer’s works as per I.S. standard and test
certificates shall be furnished.
f) All motors after installation shall be tested at site for vibrations, heating and
electrical insulation resistance by AC contractor.
END OF SECTION-09
PMC: NSL HVAC 46

SECTION-10
STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MV
PANEL), AHU SUB-PANEL, POWER & CONTROL CABLING
1.00 This section deals with supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Motor Control
Centre (MV panel), AHU Sub-Panels etc. & shall be manufactured by CPRI approved
venders. The power / control cabling & earthing work shall be carried out as per the
specification given below:
1.10 SCOPE
All work shall confirm to Indian Electricity Act (amended up to date), I.S. code of
practices local rules and regulations etc. Power cabling shall be carried out with approved
make of cables as indicated in the List of approved make of equipment / materials
and shall be of grade 1100 volts, PVC insulated & sheathed, armoured aluminum
conductors cables. Control cabling shall be of approved make and shall be of grade 1100
volts, PVC insulated & sheathed, copper conductor armoured multicore cables as
specified in B.O.Q.
1.20 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE (MV PANEL) / AHU SUB-PANEL
Motor control centre (MV Panel) floor mounted extendable type & wall mounted AHU
sub-panel shall be fabricated out of 14G C.R.C.A. Sheet. These panels shall be cubical
sectionalized type, totally enclosed dust & vermin proof. Gaskets shall be provided in all
joints to prevent dust to reach the internals of the panels to make it completely dust proof.
The degree of protections for panels shall be IP 52 for indoor applications and IP 55 for
outdoor applications as per IS: 2147.
These panels (MV) shall be suitable for voltages up to 500 volts, three phase 50 Hz, 4
wire supply capable of functioning satisfactorily in temperature ranging up to 45 to 50
degree centigrade and rupturing capacity suitable for connected load & design should be
type tested for 42 KA fault level. All joints of panels shall be welded and braced as
necessary to provide a rigid support for all components. The base channel provided in the
floor mounted MV panel shall be 75mm high & a clear space of 200mm between the
floor and the bottom most part of the unit shall be provided. The panel shall be correctly
positioned. Self- threading screws shall not be used in the construction of control panels.
Appropriate knock-out holes of proper sizes shall be provided for incoming and outgoing
cables. The facility for bottom or top entry of cables in the panels shall be provided.
Necessary cables clamps shall provided for holding the cables in position.
All power/control wiring inside the panel shall be colour coded and control wiring
ferruled for identification purpose. All labeling shall be provided in engraved anodized
aluminum strips on the front face of the panel.
Each circuit breaker shall be housed in separate compartments. It shall have steel sheets
on top and bottom of compartment. The steel sheet hinged door shall be interlocked with
the circuit breaker on the “ON” position. When the breaker is on the “ON” position,
PMC: NSL HVAC 47

suitable preventive measures shall be provided, such as interlocks, to prevent the breaker
from being drawn out. When the breaker is in “ON” position steel sheet shall be provided
between the tiers in the vertical section. The door of this compartment shall not form part
of the draw out arrangements.
1.30 BUS-BARS
The bus-bar and its connections shall be aluminum Electrolytic grade E-91 as per IS:
5082 and shall be of rectangular section. The minimum amperage capacity of aluminum
bus bar shall 1A / Sq. mm. These should be suitable for full load current for phase bus-
bar and neutral bus-bar shall be of half rated current capacity. The bus-bar should have
provision on either side for extension for main panel. The bus-bar should be sleeved with
colour coded heat shrinkable PVC sleeve. Bus-bar supports shall be of fibre glass
reinforced thermosetting polyester having in built and tracking barriers to break the path
of conducting dust through moulded ribs.
In panels bus-bar connections shall be done by drilling holes with cadmium coated bolts
and nuts. Extra cross section shall be provided to compensate drilling of the holes.
Insulated aluminum strips of suitable size of full rated current capacity shall be used for
interconnecting bus-bar and breaker.
A horizontal / vertical wire way shall be provided for interconnecting control wiring
between different vertical sections.
The terminal blocks shall be used for outgoing terminals and neutral link at a suitable
located place in the control panel. Separate compartments for outgoing and incoming
cable shall be provided. The current transformers of all instruments shall be mounted
with terminal blocks.
All live parts including incoming and outgoing link / terminals should be totally shrouded
by means of non hygroscopic and fire retardant material.
1.40 ROTARY SWITCH / SELECTOR SWITCH / SWITCHES / HRC FUSES /

STARTERS / SINGLE PHASE PREVENTERS / TOGGLE SWITCH.
These shall be of approved make and conforming to relevant ISI standard. The rupturing
capacity of HRC fuses should not less than 80 KA and in case of switches it should be 60
Amps maximum.
1.50 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
The current transformers shall have accuracy of class 1, 5 and 5P10 / 10P10 and suitable
VA burden for operation of the connected meters and relays.
1.51 OVERLOAD RELAYS
PMC: NSL HVAC 48

All the motors shall have overload relay protections conforming to relevant IS.
1.52 TIME DELAY RELAYS
These shall be adjustable type with time delay adjustments of 0-180 or as per
manufacturers standards.
1.53 INDICATING LAMPS AND METERING
These shall confirm to BS37 & BS39. All meters shall be flush mounted and draw-out
type. The indicating lamp shall be LED type.
1.54 VOLTMETER AND AMMETERS
Motor Control Centre (MV Panel) shall have flush type voltmeter & ammeter of size 96 x
96 mm analog or digital type as detailed in B.O.Q.
1.55 PUSH BUTTON STATIONS
These shall be suitable for panel mounting and accessible from front without opening.
These shall be provided for manual starting and stopping of motors/equipments as per
normal practices. The contacts shall be suitable for 2amps current capacity.
1.56 CONDUITS
These shall be preferable made of mild steel, stove enameled from inside and outside
with minimum wall thickness of 1.6 mm for conduits up to dia of 25mm and 2 mm for
conduits above 25 mm diameter.
1.57 CABLES
These shall be PVC insulated, pre-sheathed, aluminum conductor armoured cables as per
IS:694 and as per list of approved make of equipment / materials. Control Cables
shall be multi-core PVC-insulated PVC sheathed copper conductor and armoured cables
of approved make only.
1.58 LAYING OF CABLES
These shall be laid as Indian Standard code of practice. All cables shall be laid on 16G
Cadmium Plated U shaped Channel 40mm x 20mm cable trays. In case more than one
cable is running, then proper space in between the two cables shall be provided to avoid
loss of current carrying capacity. While cables are running on walls, proper saddles must
be provided.
1.59 WIRE SIZES
PMC: NSL HVAC 49

Multi-strands PVC-copper conductor wires shall be used inside the control panel for
interconnecting different components. All wires shall be neatly dressed and coloured
beads shall be provided for easy identification in control wiring. The minimum size of
control wiring shall be 1.5sq.mm. Testing of panels as per code of practice shall be done
at works by AC contractor before inspection & dispatch to site.
1.60 DRAWINGS
Necessary drawings of all control panels and wiring of equipment etc., shall be submitted
by the A.C contractor for approval of the Engineer in Charge. On final completion of job
and before handing over of AC System As Built Drawings shall be submitted to the
Department.
1.61 TESTING
The complete electrical installation shall be tested in accordance with relevant ISI codes
in presence of Electrical Supervisor of the Department before commissioning of plant.
1.62 PAINTING OF PANELS
All sheet metal enclosures shall be powder coated only after de-rusting & hot-dip
phosphating degreasing through seven tank process at works only.
NOTE: Rubber mats of 1100 volts shall be laid in front of all switch boards
1.63 POTENTIAL FREE CONTACTS

The AC contractor shall provide fire shunt relay (24V.DC) in his panel wherever
necessary either it is specified in the Schedule of Quantities or not free of cost for all the
starter feeder meant for AHU Fan, etc. to take fire input signal and trip the starter in the
event of fire.
END OF SECTION-10
PMC: NSL HVAC 50

SECTION-11
MODE OF MEASUREMENT
The following measurement code shall apply to the Contract:
1.0 SHEET METAL WORK
1. DUCTING
a) The final finished sheet area in sqmt shall be measured only.
b) Vanes, splitters, flanges, access doors etc. shall not be separately measured. These
shall be treated as part of duct work.
c) Bends, Elbows, Transformation, pieces etc. shall be measured along the centre
line and measured as per duct work.
d) Canvas connections, Duct Supports, Stiffening members, frames etc. shall not be
measured separately and shall form part of duct work.
e) For each drawing, all supply of duct work must be accompanied by computer-
generated detailed bill material indicating all relevant duct sizes, dimensions and
quantities. In addition, summary sheet are also to be provided showing duct areas
by gauge and duct size range as applicable.
f) Measurement sheet covering each fabricated duct piece showing dimensions and
external surface area along with summary of external surface area of duct guage-
wise.
g) All duct pieces shall a part number, corresponding to the serial number assigned
to it in the measurement sheet. The above system shall ensure speedy and proper
site measurement, verification and approvals
2. GRILLS / DIFFUSERS / FIRE DAMPERS
All Grills / Diffusers / Fire Damper areas will be measured in terms of effective
area (Neck Area). Any Extruded aluminum grill / diffusers having an area less
than 0.1 sq.mt shall be accounted as 0.1 sq.mt.
3. BOX DAMPERS
a) No separate measurement of box dampers shall be done since they form part of
duct.
b) Fresh air dampers shall be measured as effective areas only. No separate
measurements for bird screen inlet / outlet louvers shall be done.
PMC: NSL HVAC 51

1.20 A) Insulation of Duct
1. This shall be measured on the basis of bare duct surface area i.e. the area of duct
insulation & area of duct shall be same.
B) Acoustic Lining of Duct & collars
This shall be measured on the basis of bare duct surface area i.e. the area of duct
lining & area of duct shall be same.
1.30 ELECTRICAL CABLING WORK
a) All power cables / controls cables shall be measured on linear basis in meters.
b) No extra price shall be paid on account of end termination of cables which

includes thimble, gland etc.
1.40 STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
No extra price shall be paid on account of structural supports required for piping,
ducting & cabling work. All wooden frames for fixing like Grill etc. will be
provided by the AC Contractor.
END OF SECTION – 11
PMC: NSL HVAC 52

SECTION-12
PAINTING WORK
This section deals with painting of various equipment / material supplied under this
contract. It gives basic guidance for painting as specified below:-
a) Application: The original colour of all equipments like, air-handling units etc.
which if get damaged during transportation or during installation shall be painted
in original shade with the two coat of paint to give a final finish.
b) All chilled water pipes shall be painted as per standard code of practice and
arrows shall be marked to indicate direction of flow of water.
COLOUR SCHEME FOR THE EQUIPMENTS / MATERIALS
i) Electrical panels/sub-panel/ --- Light gray powder coated

Remote control console
ii) Cable trays --- Cadmium Plated
iii) Supports for ducts --- Silver
vi) Wooden Frame --- All Wooden frame for fixing of

Grills/ Louvers will be provided by
Contractor as per BOQ mentioned.
END OF SECTION -12
PMC: NSL HVAC 53

SECTION -13
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF EQUIPMENTS / MATERIALS
AS Per Section C
END OF SECTION-13
PMC: NSL HVAC 54

SECTION-14
BASIS OF DESIGN
1) DESIGN CRITERIA:
Site Location : DELHI

Altitude : 216mt m above mean sea level
Based on the data given in ISHRAE handbook for NEW DELHI the outdoor design
conditions have been considered as follows:-
Outside Design Data –Peak IP (US) SI (METRIC)

SUMMER – DB/WB 110/75 43.3/23.9
RELATIVE HUMIDITY % 20 20

MONSOON – DB/WB 95/83 35/28.3

WINTER – DB/WB 45/41 7.2/5.0

INSIDE DESIGN CONDITIONS IP(US) SI(METRIC)

Summer /Monsoon – WORKSTATION, ROOM 77° + 1.8 ° F 25 ° + 1° C
AND CONFERENCE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY * Around 60% Around 60%
2) CHILLED WATER INLET TEMPRATURE :-

REQUIRED AT 7DEG C FROM DEVELOEPER
3) EQUIMENT PROVIDED BY DEVELOPER :- 2X13000CFM AHUS
END OF SECTION-14
PMC: NSL HVAC 55

SECTION-15
ASSOCIATED CIVIL/ ELECTRICAL AND OTHER WORKS TO BE
PROVIDED BY THE DEVELOPER SHALL NOT BE APART OF MVAC
BOQ.
a) Any Foundation of Equipment’s.
b) Minor masonry work such as opening in walls, slabs and making good.
c) Any kind of masonry trench / shaft for laying ducts and pipes.
d) Drain points in / near each Air-handling units
e) Any kind of exposed roof insulation.
f) Any kind of false ceiling work or return air boxing work.
g) Any kind of aluminum / wooden frame work for grills / diffusers fixing
END OF SECTION-15
SECTION -16
STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF IMPORTED VARIABLE
REFRIGERANT VOLUME / FLOW SYSTEM
6.00 The specifications under this section covers the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM INVERTOR
CONTROLLED conforming to these specifications and in accordance with the Detailed
Bill of Quantities given in the tender.
6.01 General
Each VRF Unit shall be air cooled, split type multi-system air conditioner consisting of
outdoor units and number of indoor units, each having capability to cool and heat for the
requirements of the individual area to be air-conditioned. The VRF unit should be capable
of connecting minimum ten different types of indoor units to one refrigerant circuit and
controlled individually.
Each VRF unit shall have minimum two number scroll compressor and both inverter
Compressor (With inverter controller) and capable of changing the rotating speed to
follow variations in cooling loads. Each indoor units having capability to cool or heat
for the requirement of the rooms
Compressor shall be inverter controlled. Compressor installed in each outdoor module unit
shall be equipped with both inverter compressor in bigger (if modular) machines for higher
reliability, improved life, better backup and duty cycling purpose. The system shall be
capable of changing the rotating speed of inverter compressor by inverter controller to
follow variations in cooling and heating load.
The Outdoor units shall be suitable for mix-match connection of following type of indoor
units. All indoor units of any capacity shall be provided with condenser drain pump of
Imported Sumen or equivalent make only free of cost .
 Ceiling mounted cassette type (Double flow)
 Ceiling mounted cassette type (Multi flow)
 Ceiling mounted duct type.
 Ceiling suspended type.
 Wall mounted type
 Floor standing type
 Concealed floor standing type.
Please note that the refrigerant piping shall be capable of extending up to 100m with 50m
level difference without any oil traps.
Both indoor and outdoor units shall be factory assembled, tested and filled with first charge
of refrigerant. These being very hi-tech in construction with lots of factory checks being
conducted, hence no sub assembly should be done at site preferably.
PMC: NSL HVAC 57

6.02 OUTDOOR UNIT
The outdoor unit shall be factory assembled, weather proof casing, constructed from heavy
gauge mild steel panels and coated with baked enamel finish. The unit should be completely
factory wired, tested with all necessary controls tested prior to dispatch conforming to the
following specifications.
a. All outdoor units shall consist of minimum two scroll compressors, preferable both with
inverter drive,.
b. Outdoor units when consisting of more than 1 module (e.g. 36 HP = 18 HP +18 HP),
each should have both separate inverter driven compressors.
c. In such case, the units shall be provided with duty cycling arrangement for multiple
Inverter compressors.
d. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design to facilitate installation one after another
Close to each other Preference would be given to compact units having smaller
Footprint
e. Outdoor units should be rugged of anti-corrosion design and should have strong base
Plate for easy mounting of unit.
f. The outdoor unit shall comprise of sub-cooling feature to effectively use the entire coil
surface through proper circuit/bridge in order to prevent flushing of refrigerant owing
to large length of piping.
g. The condensing unit shall be provided with state-of-the-art microprocessor based
control panel.
h. The outdoor unit shall be provided with provided with Aero spiral design fan exhibiting
low noise level characteristics complete with aero fitting grille to facilitate spiral discharge
of airflow to effect reduction in pressure losses. The fan should be capable to respond to
external static pressure of 5mm.
i. Motor shall be speed controlled to ensure a stable operation for varying ambient by a
factory fitted direct acting head pressure activated variable speed drive for at least 15
steps to give precise discharge pressure and minimum power consumption of condenser
fan motor.
j. The condenser shall be complete with provisions for refrigerant piping connections, shut
off valves and any other standard accessories necessary with the equipment supplied.
The condensing unit shall be designed to facilitate fail safe operation when connected to
multiple indoor units. If possible, the system should work on standard operating parameters
like discharge pressures of not more than 300 PSI as the ref. Piping will be moving around
within a residential house, otherwise on any misfortune of any leakage it will act like a bullet
on higher pressures. If working on higher operating pressures, vendor to comply with all
safety codes of high pressure safety & testing as recommended by Japanese (being Japanese
design product) and give 2 sets of special tools to handle such equipment at site. All brazing
PMC: NSL HVAC 58

should be done by only qualified trained person who had training on HIGH PRESSURE
brazing, special tools & procedures.
6.03 SCROLL COMPRESSOR

The scroll compressor shall be an industrial quality rugged, cast iron, direct hermetic
compressor with scroll plates, suction & discharge service valves. The compressor shall be
completely enclosed in a chamber with no leakage path and providing the capability for
scroll plates to separate. The compressor shall be provided with industrial solid motor
mounts internal motor protection and vibration isolation pads. Each compressor shall be
independently wired and piped to its own circuit for efficient operation & ease of
maintenance. The compressor speed shall not exceed 3000 RPM.
The compressor shall be highly inverter control type. The inverter compressor shall change the
speed in accordance to the variation in cooling or heating load requirement:
a) All outdoor units shall have multiple steps of capacity control to meet load fluctuation and
indoor unit individual control. All parts of compressor shall be sufficiently lubricated stock.
Forced lubrication may also be employed.
b) Oil heater shall be provided in the compressor casing.
c) The inverter compressor shall preferably be efficient & reliable inverter compressor.
6.04 HEAT EXCHANGER

The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically bonded to
aluminum fins to form a cross fin coil.
a) The aluminum fins shall be covered by anti-corrosion resin film.
b) The unit should be with heat exchanger to optimize the path of heat exchanger and for
better efficiency of condenser.
c) The unit shall be provided with necessary number of direct driven low noise level
propeller type fans arranged for vertical discharge. Each fan shall have a safety guard.
6.05 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT

The refrigerant circuit shall include liquid & gas shut-off valves and a solenoid valves at
condenser end. The equipment must have inbuilt refrigerant stabilization control for proper
refrigerant distribution.
All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safely operation of the system.
6.06 REFRIGERANT
The VRF units shall be selected on R-410A refrigerant. The units should be fully factory
charged with refrigerant & oil & spare refrigerant & oil must be sent along with the machine
for topping up of gas & oil as may be required.
6.07 SAFETY DEVICES
PMC: NSL HVAC 59

All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure safe operation of the system.
Following safety devices shall be integral part of the outdoor unit:
 High pressure switch
 Fan drive overload protection switch
 Fusible plug
 Overload relay including overload protection for inverter driven compressor.
6.08 OIL RECOVERY SYSTEM

Entire system shall be designed and capable of oil recovery to ensure stable operation with
long refrigeration piping lengths. The system should have inbuilt (avoid external) oil
balancing circuit to avoid poor lubrication.
END OF SECTION -16
PMC: NSL HVAC 60

SECTION -17
STANDARD SPECIFICATION OF INDOOR UNITS
7.00 INDOOR UNITS
This section deals with supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Various Type of
Indoor Units confirming to general specification and suitable for the duty selected. The type,
capacity and size of indoor units shall be as specified in Detailed Bill of Quantities. All
indoor units of any capacity shall be provided with condenser drain pump of Sumen
make only if recommended by consultant as per site conditions after the award of
work & contractor shall provide the same free of cost.
7.01 GENERAL
Indoor units shall be either ceiling mounted cassette type, or ceiling mounted ductable type
or floor standing type or wall mounted type or other as specified in BOQ. Each unit shall
have electronic control valve to control refrigerant flow rate respond to load variations of
the room.
a) The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual and group
control
b) In case of centralized control, it shall be set by liquid crystal remote controller
The fan shall be dual suction, aerodynamically designed turbo, multi blade type, statically &
dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation of the system. The fan
shall be direct driven type, mounted directly on motor shaft having supported from housing.
The cooling coil shall be made out of seamless copper tubes and have continuous aluminum
fins. The fins shall be spaced by collars forming an integral part. The tubes shall be staggered
in the direction of airflow. The tubes shall be hydraulically/ mechanically expanded for
minimum thermal contact resistance with fins. Each coils shall be factory tested at 21kg/sqm
air pressure under water.
Unit shall have cleanable type filter fixed to an integrally moulded plastic frame. The filter
shall be slide away type and neatly inserted.
Each indoor unit shall have computerized PID control for maintaining design room
temperature. Each unit shall be provided with microprocessor thermostat for cooling or
cooling and heating.
Each unit shall be with wired LCD type remote controller. The remote controller shall
memorize the latest malfunction code for easy maintenance. The controller shall have self-
diagnostic features for easy and quick maintenance and service. The controller shall be able
to change fan speed and angle of swing flap individually as per requirement.
7.02 CEILING MOIUNTED CASSETTE TYPE UNIT (ONE WAY FLOW TYPE)
The unit shall be ceiling mounted type. The unit shall include pre-filter, fan Section and DX-
coil Section. The housing of the unit shall be powder coated galvanized steel. The body shall
PMC: NSL HVAC 61

be light in weight and shall be able to suspend from four corners. The fan shall be
aerodynamically designed diffuser turbo fan type. Also Units shall have an external attractive
panel for supply and return air. Unit shall have four /One way supply air grilles on sides and
return air grille in center as detailed in the BOQ.
Each unit shall have high lift drain pump, fresh air intake connection with nut bolt etc to
connect the flexible duct & cassette properly and very low operating sound.
All the indoor units regardless of their difference in capacity should have same decorative
panel size for harmonious aesthetic point of view. It should have provision of connecting
branch ducts.
7.03 CEILING MOUNTED DUCTABLE TYPE UNIT

Unit shall be suitable for ceiling mounted type with drain pump. The unit shall include pre
filter, fan section & DX coil section .The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated
galvanized steel. The unit shall have high static fan for Ductable arrangement. Each unit
shall have high lift drain pump, fresh air intake connection with nut bolt etc to connect the
flexible duct & cassette properly and very low operating sound. Each unit shall have high lift
drain pump, fresh air intake connection with nut bolt etc to connect the flexible duct &
cassette properly and very low operating sound.
7.04 CEILING SUSPENDED TYPE

Unit shall be suitable for ceiling suspended arrangement below false ceiling. The unit include
pre filter , fan section & DX coil section . The housing of unit shall be light weight powder
coated galvanized steel.
7.05 HIGH WALL MOUNTED UNITS

The units shall be wall-mounted type. The unit includes pre filter, fan section & DX coil
section. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel .Unit shall
have an attractive external casing for supply and return air.
7.06 FLOOR STANDING TYPE

Unit shall be suitable for floor standing arrangement. The unit includes pre filter, fan section
& DX coil section. The housing of unit shall be light weight powder coated galvanized steel
Each unit shall have high lift drain pump, fresh air intake connection with nut bolt etc to
connect the flexible duct & cassette properly and very low operating sound.
7.07 CENTRALIZED TYPE REMOTE CONTROLLER
A multifunctional compact centralized controller shall be provided with the system. The
controller should be LCD remote controller to act as an advanced air-conditioning
management system to give complete control of VRF air-conditioning Equipment, It should
have ease of use for the user and must have a user friendly panel and LCD display.
It shall be able to control up to minimum 180 indoor units with the following functions:-
PMC: NSL HVAC 62

a) Starting/stopping of Air-conditioners as a zone or group or individual unit.
b) Temperature settling for each indoor unit or zone.
c) Switching between temperature control modes, switching of fan speed and direction of
airflow, enabling/disabling of individual remote controller operation.
d) Monitoring of operation status such as operation mode & temperature setting of

individual indoor units, maintenance information, trouble shooting information.
e) OPTIONAL-Display of air conditioner operation history.
f) OPERATIONAL-Daily management automation through yearly schedule function with

possibility of various schedules.
The controller shall have wide screen user friendly LCD display and can be wired by a non
polar 2 wire transmission cable to a distance of 1 km. away from indoor unit.
7.08 COLOUR
The colour of indoor units should be white or to suit interiors as designed by the architects /
clients.
END OF SECTION -17
PMC: NSL HVAC 63

SECTION -18
STANDARD SPECIFICATION ON REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK
This section deals with supply, installation, testing & commissioning of refrigerant piping as
detailed below in specifications.
9.10 REFRIGERANT PIPING

All refrigerant piping for the air conditioning system shall be constructed from soft seamless
upto 19.1mm and hard drawn copper refrigerant pipes for above 19.1mm with copper
fittings and silver-soldered joints. The refrigerant piping arrangements shall be in accordance
with good practice within the air conditioning industry, and are to include charging
connections, suction line insulation and all other items normally forming part of proper
refrigerant circuits.
All joints in copper piping shall be sweat joints using low temperature brazing and or silver
solder. Before joining any copper pipe or fittings, its interiors shall be thoroughly cleaned by
passing a clean cloth via wire or cable through its entire length. The piping shall be
continuously kept clean of dirt etc. while constructing the joints. Subsequently, it shall be
thoroughly blown out using nitrogen.
After the refrigerant piping installation has been completed, the refrigerant piping system
shall be pressure tested using nitrogen at pressure of 20Kg per sq.cm and 10 Kg per sq.cm
(low side). Pressure shall be maintained in the system for 24 hours. The system shall then be
evacuated to minimum vacuum if 700mm hg and held for 24 hours.
The thickness of copper piping shall not be less than 20gauge for pipes up to 19.1mm and
18 guage for bigger sizes
The suction line pipe size and the liquid line pipe size shall be selected according to the
manufacturers specified outside diameter. All refrigerant pipes shall be properly supported
and anchored to the building structure using steel hangers, anchors, brackets and supports
which shall be fixed to the building structure by means of inserts or expansion shields of
adequate size and number to support the load imposed thereon.
The OD wall thicknesses & wall thickness size of Copper refrigerant piping shall be as follows:
Outside Diameter (mm) Wall Thickness (G)
a) 41.3 18
b) 34.9 18
c) 19.1 20
d) 15.90 20
PMC: NSL HVAC 64

e) 12.70 20
f) 9.5 20
g) 6.4 20
The air-conditioning system supplier shall design sizes and erect proper interconnections of
the complete refrigerant circuit.
END OF SECTION -18
PMC: NSL HVAC 65

SECTION-19
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT (PROPOSED)
1.00 The capacity/rating of various equipments in this contract are given for guidance only.
The AC contractor shall check in detail the design parameters against selection of
equipment. The AC contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the desired inside
conditions with the equipments selected & offered by him and shall not deprive him of
the responsibility if selection of equipment is not thoroughly checked. In case of shortfall
the AC contractor shall replace / modify equipment for achieving desired parameter
without any extra cost to owner / employer. The contractor would be bound to replace the
equipment / equipments selected by him if design condition is not achieved by the AC
System offered & installed by him.
1.2 G.S.S. DUCTING
a) Class of Galvanizing VIII
b) Code of Fabrication ISS –655 (Revised)
c) Material of hangers MS
d) Quantity of sheet Lock forming quality
1.3 CLASS O NITRILE RUBBER INSULATION
a) For external thermal

Insulation of duct As per specification
b) Density 30 Kg / M³
1.4 CLASS 1 NITRILE RUBBER OPEN CELL
a) For acoustic lining of

Duct As per specification
b) Density 48 Kg / M³
END OF SECTION-19
PMC: NSL HVAC 66

SECTION - 20
TECHNICAL DATA
(T0 BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER IN METRIC SYSTEM ONLY)
1.1 GRILLS / DIFFUSERS / DAMPERS
Please indicate make / material / gauge of the following:
Make Material
a) Duct Dampers :
b) Grills / Diffusers :
c) Fire Dampers :
d) Smoke & Temperature :

Sensor
e) Fresh Air Louvers :
1.5 DUCT INSULATION
a) Manufactures Name :
b) Material :
c) Density Kg. Per Cmt :
d) Thermal Conductivity :
Kcal / Hr. Deg. C.
1.6 DUCT LINING
a) Manufactures Name :
b) Material :
c) Density Kg. Per Cmt :
d) Thermal Conductivity :
e) Kcal / Hr. Deg. C. :
PMC: NSL HVAC 67

1.7 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
Please indicate the makes of the following.
a) Panel Manufacturer’s name :
b) Remote Control console :

Manufacturer’s name
c) ACB / MCCB :
d) HRC Fuses :
e) Rotary Switch :
f) Starter’s DOL / Star Delta :
g) Contractor :
h) Indicating Lights :
i) Push Buttons :
j) Control Cables :
k) Power Cables :
l) Ammeters :
m) Voltmeters :
n) Single Phase Preventers :
o) Current Transformer :
p) Bus-bar / Grade :
END OF SECTION-20
PMC: NSL HVAC 68

SPECIFICATIONS: PLUMBING Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,

SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND FIRE
SECTION B4

PMC: NSL
SPECIFICATIONS: FIRE Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,
SECTION I
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 Scope of Work

1.1.1 The form of Contract shall be according to the “Conditions of Contract”. The
following clauses shall be considered as an extension and not in limitation of the
obligation of the Contractor.

1.1.2 Work under this contract shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials,
equipment and appliances necessary and required. The Contractor is required to
completely furnish all the Fire fighting and other specialized services as described
hereinafter and as specified in the Schedule of Quantities and/or shown on the
Plumbing Drawings.

1.1.3 Without restricting to the generally of the foregoing, the sanitary installations shall
include the following:‐

A. Fire Fighting Work
a. Sprinkler System
b. Fire Extinguishers
1.1.4 Services rendered under this section shall be done without any extra charge.

1.2 Specifications

1.2.1 Work under this contract shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
Specifications attached with the tender.

1.2.2 Items not covered under these Specifications due to any ambiguity or misprints, or
additional works, the work shall be carried out as per Specifications of the latest
Central Public Works Department with upto date amendments as applicable in the
contract and or as per the requirement of the client or its representative.

1.2.3 Works not covered above in para 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 shall be carried out as per
relevant Indian Standards and in case of its absence as per British Standard Code
of Practice.

1.3. Execution of Work

1.3.1 The Contractor should visit and examine the site of work and satisfy himself as to
the nature of the existing roads and other means of communication and other
details pertaining to the work and local conditions and facilities for obtaining his
own information on all matters affecting the execution of work. No extra charge
PMC: NSL F 1

made in consequence of any misunderstanding, incorrect information on any of
these points or on ground of insufficient description will be allowed.

1.3.2 The work shall be carried out in conformity with the Plumbing drawings and within
the requirements of Architectural, HVAC, Electrical, Structural and Other
specialized services drawings.

1.3.3 The Contractor shall cooperate with all trades and agencies working on the site.
He shall make provision for hangers, sleeves, structural openings and other
requirements well in advance to prevent hold up of progress of the construction
schedule.

1.3.4 On award of the work, Contractor shall submit a schedule of construction in the
form of a PERT Chart or BAR Chart for approval of the Project
Manager/Architect/Consultant. All dates and time schedule agreed upon should
be strictly adhered to, within the stipulated time of completion/commissioning
along with the specified phasing, if any.

1.4 Drawings

1.4.1 Plumbing drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual
construction permits. Any deviations made shall be in conformity with the
Architectural and other services drawings.

1.4.2 Architectural drawings shall take precedence over Plumbing or other
services drawings as to all dimensions.

1.4.3 Contractor shall verify all dimensions at site and bring to the notice of the Project
Manager all discrepancies or deviations noticed. Decision of the Project Manager
shall be final.

1.4.4 Large size details and manufacturers dimensions for materials to be incorporated
shall take precedence over small scale drawings.

1.4.5 All drawings issued by the Architects/Consultant for the work are the property of
the Architects/Consultant and shall not be lent, reproduced or used on any works
other than intended without the written permission of the Architects/Consultant.

1.5 Inspection and Testing of Materials

1.5.1 Contractor shall be required, if requested, to produce manufacturers Test
Certificate for the particular batch of materials supplied to him. The tests carried
out shall be as per the relevant Indian Standards.

1.5.2 For examination and testing of materials and works at the site Contractor shall
provide all Testing and Gauging Equipment necessary but not limited to the
followings:‐

PMC: NSL F 2

a) Theodolite, Steel tapes
b) Dumpy level
c) Weighing machine
d) Plumb bobs, Spirit levels, Hammers
e) Micrometers, Tachometers
f) Thermometers, Stoves
g) Hydraulic test machine
h) Smoke test machine

1.5.3 All such equipment shall be tested for calibration at any approved laboratory, if
required by the Project Manager.

1.5.4 All Testing Equipment shall be preferably located in a special room meant for the
purpose.

1.5.5 Samples of all materials shall be got approved before placing order and the
approved samples shall be deposited with the Architects or kept at site in a sample
room as prepared by the owners. Any materials declared defective by Project
Manager/Architect/Consultant shall be removed from the site within 48 hours.

1.6 Metric Conversion

1.6.1 All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment given in the tender document
are commercial metric sizes.

1.6.2 Any weights, or sizes given in the tender having changed due to metric conversion,
the nearest equivalent sizes accepted by Indian Standards shall be acceptable
without any additional cost.

1.7 Reference Points

1.7.1 Contractor shall provide permanent Bench Marks, Flag Tops and other reference
points for the proper execution of work and these shall be preserved till the end of
the work.

1.7.2 All such reference points shall be in relation to the levels and locations given in the
Architectural and Plumbing drawings.

1.8 Reference Drawings

1.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain one set of all drawings issued to him as reference
drawings. These shall not be used on site. All important drawings shall be mounted
on boards and placed in racks indexed. No drawings shall be rolled.

1.8.2 All corrections, deviations and changes made on the site shall be shown on these
reference drawings for final incorporation in the completion drawings. All
changes to be made shall be initialed by the Project Manager or Architects.

PMC: NSL F 3

1.9 Shop Drawings

1.9.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager three copies of the shop
drawings.

1.9.2 Shop drawings shall be submitted under following conditions:‐

(a) Showing any changes in layout in the plumbing drawings.

(b) Equipment layout, piping and wiring diagram.

(c) Manufacturer’s or Contractor’s fabrication drawings for any materials or
equipment supplied by him.

1.9.3 The Contractor shall submit two copies of catalogues, manufacturer’s drawings,
equipment characteristics data or performance charts as required by the Project
Manager.

1.10 Completion Drawings

1.10.1 On completion of work, Contractor shall submit one complete set of original
tracings and two prints of “as built” drawings to the Project Manager. These
drawings shall have the following information.

a) Run of all piping, diameters on all floors, vertical stacks and location of external
services.

b) Ground and invert levels of all drainage pipes together with location of all
manholes and connections upto outfall.

c) Run of all water supply lines with diameters, locations of control valves, access
panels.

d) Location of all mechanical equipment with layout and piping connections.

No completion certificate shall be issued unless the above drawings are submitted.

1.10.2 Contractor shall provide two sets of catalogues, service manuals manufacturer’s
drawings, performance data and list of spare parts together with the name and
address of the manufacturer for all electrical and mechanical equipment provided
by him.

1.10.3 All “Warranty Cards” given by the manufacturers shall be handed over to the
Project Manager.

PMC: NSL F 4


1.11. Contractors Rates

1.11.1 Rates quoted in this tender shall be inclusive of cost of materials, labour,
supervision, erection, tools, plant, scaffolding, service connections, transport to
site, taxes, octroi and levies, breakage, wastage and all such expenses as may be
necessary and required to completely do all the items of work and put them in a
working condition.

1.11.2 Rates quoted are for all heights and depths and in all positions as may be required
for this work.

1.11.3 All rates quoted must be for complete items inclusive of all such accessories,
Fixtures and fixing arrangements, nuts, bolts, hangers as are a standard part of the
particular item except where specially mentioned otherwise.

1.11.4 All rates quoted are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in walls and floors and
making good the same with cement mortar/concrete/water proofing of
appropriate mix and strength as directed by Project Manager. Contractor shall
provide holes, sleeves and recesses in the concrete and masonry work as the work
proceeds.

1.11.5 The Contractor shall furnish the Architects with vouchers and test certificates, on
request, to prove that the materials as specified and to indicate that the rates at
which the materials are purchased in order to work out the rate analysis of non
tendered items which he may be called upon to be carried out.

1.12 Testing

1.12.1 Piping and drainage works shall be tested as specified under the relevant clause(s)
of the specifications.

1.12.2 Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Project Manager/ Consultant.

1.12.3 All materials and equipment found defective shall be replaced and whole work
tested to meet the requirements of the specifications.

1.12.4 Contractor shall perform all such tests as may be necessary and required by the
local authorities to meet Municipal or other bye‐laws in force.

1.12.5 Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and materials for the performance
of the tests.

1.13 Site Clearance and Cleanup

PMC: NSL F 5

1.13.1 The Contractor shall, from time to time clear away all debris and excess materials
accumulated at the site.

1.13.2 After the Fixtures, equipment and appliances have been installed and
commissioned, Contractor shall clean‐up the same and remove all plaster, paints
stains, stickers and other foreign matter of discoloration leaving the same in a
ready to use condition.

1.13.3 On completion of all works, Contractor shall demolish all stores, remove all surplus
materials and leave the site in a broom clean condition, failing which the same
shall be done at Contractors risk and cost.

1.14 License Permits and Authorities

1.14.1 Contractor must keep constant liaison with the Municipal/statutory authority and
obtain all approval of all drainage, water supply and other works carried out by
him.

1.14.2 Contractor shall obtain, from the Municipal and other authority’s necessary
completion certificate(s) with respect to his work as required for occupation of the
building. Contractor shall obtain permanent water supply and drainage
connections from authorities concerned. Employer shall pay all fees/deposits as
required to be paid to the authorities towards connection charges.

1.15 Recovery of Cost for Materials issued to Contractors Free of Cost

1.15.1 If any materials issued to the Contractor free of cost, are damaged or pilfered, the
cost of the same shall be recovered from the Contractor on the basis of actual cost
to owner which shall include all freight and transportation, excise duty, sales tax,
octroi, import duty etc. plus 100%. The decision on the actual cost given by the
Employer shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

1.16 Cutting of Water Proofing Membrane

No walls, terraces shall be cut for making and opening after water proofing has
been done without written approval of Project Manager/Architects. Cutting of
water proofing membrane shall be done very carefully to ensure that other
portion(s) of water proofing is (are) not damaged. On completion of work at such
place the water proofing membrane shall be made good and ensured that the
opening/cutting is made fully water proof as per specifications and details of water
proofing approved by Architects.

1.17 Cutting of Structural Members

No structural member shall be chased or cut without the written permission of the
Project Manager.

1.18. Materials Supplied by Owner
PMC: NSL F 6


1.18.1 The Contractor shall verify that all materials supplied by the Employer confirm to
the specifications of the relevant item in the tender. Any discrepancy found shall
be brought to the notice of the Project Manager.

1.19 Materials

1.19.1 Unless otherwise specified and expressly approved in writing by the Project
Manager, only materials of makes and specifications mentioned in the list of
approved makes attached with the specifications shall be used.

1.19.2 If required, the Contractor shall submit samples of materials proposed to be used
in the works. Approved samples shall be kept in the office of the Project Manager
and returned to the Contractor at the appropriate time.

PMC: NSL F 7


SECTION II:
PIPING FOR FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work covers, supply, fabrication, laying, testing, painting and
commissioning of the entire piping system for the fire fighting installation i.e. fire
hydrant and sprinkler systems.

2.0 Piping

2.2 Internal
2.2.1 All internal pipes shall be, unless otherwise specified, heavy quality mild steel tubes
to IS 1239 using wrought steel heavy duty screwed fittings. Flanges shall be provided
to mate with valves and other equipment and shall conform to IS 6392. Flanges shall
be screwed type. Flanges shall be rated for 2.0 N/sqmm.
2.2.2 Valves shall be suitable for external piping.
2.2.3 All pipes shall be of approved make and best quality without rust marks. Pipes and
fittings shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair,
maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc. Pipes and
fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat
workmanship manner. Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable
supports at intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used
for RCC ceiling and walls.
2.2.4 All pipes shall be adequately supported from ceiling or walls through structural
supports fabricated from mild steel structural e.g. rods, channels, angels and flats
generally as shown on drawings. Fasteners shall be shear type anchor fasteners in
concrete walls and ceilings and wrought steel spikes of at least 75mm long in brick
walls. All pipes supports shall be painted with 1 coats of red oxide primer and two
coats of black enamel paint.
2.2.5 All low point loops in the piping shall be provided with 25mm Ball Valves with rising
spindle for draining the system. All valves shall have screwed brass caps. Likewise
25mm gun metal air vents shall be provided at all high point loops to prevent air‐
locking.
2.2.6 All piping shall have flanged joints at about 25m intervals to facilitate easy
maintenance.

PMC: NSL F 8

3.0 Pipe Jointing
3.1 All pipes shall be provided with threaded joints up to 50mm diameter and welded
joints for pipe above 50mm diameters. Hold tight shall be used for sealing.
3.2 All welded joints shall be tested by radiography test.
3.3 Joints between CI and GI pipes shall be made by providing a suitable flanged tail or
socket piece and MS flange on the GI pipe. Flanges shall have appropriate number of
holes and shall be fastened with nuts, bolts and 1.5mm thick compressed asbestos
gasket.
4.0 Valves and other accessories
4.1 Gate Valves
4.1.1 Sluice / Gate valves shall be used for isolation of flow in pipe lines For sizes upto 65
mm, gate valves shall be outside screw rising spindle type and shall be as per IS: 778
Class‐I and Class‐II, as applicable. For sizes 80 mm to 300 mm, gate valve shall be as
per IS: 780, PN=1.0 and shall be of inside screw and non rising type and cast iron
double flanged.
4.1.2 Gate valves shall be provided with a hand wheel, draining arrangement of seat valve
and locking facility (as required). Gate valves shall have back setting bush to
facilitate gland renewal during full open condition.
4.1.3 The Body, bonnet, Stuffing Box, cap and hand wheel shall be of cast iron to
IS:210/70, grade FG 200 / 260. The non rising spindle shall be of solid forged high
tensile brass or carbon steel to AISI 304 construction. The Body seating and wedge
ring shall be of solid leaded gun metal. The Bonnet gasket shall be of high quality
rubber.
4.1.4 The Valve shall be PN 1.0 rated but shall withstand tests of upto 20 kg / cm2. The
ends shall be flanged. The batch number of the valve shall be punched on the top of
the flange. The spindle shall be removable type, and shall be easily rotated.

4.5 Pressure Gauge
4.5.1 The Pressure Gauge shall be constructed of die cast aluminium and stove enameled.
It shall be weather proof with an IP 55 enclosure. It shall be a stainless steel Bourden
tube type Pressure Gauge with a scale range from 0 to 16 Kg / CM2 and shall be
constructed as per IS: 3624. Each Pressure Gauge shall have a siphon tube
connection. The Shut off arrangement shall be by Ball Valve.
4.6 Ball Valve
4.6.1 The Ball Valve shall be made from die cast brass and tested to 14 Kg/cm2 pressure.
4.6.2 The valve shall be internally threaded to receive pipe connections.
4.6.3 The Ball shall be made from brass and machined to perfect round shape and
subsequently chrome plated. The seat of the valve body‐ bonnet gasket and gland
packing shall be of Teflon.
4.6.4 The handle shall be of chrome plated steel with PVC jacket. The handle shall also
indicate the direction of òpen' and `closed' situations. The gap between the ball
and the teflon packing shall be sealed to prevent water seeping upto 14 Kg / cm2
pressure.
4.6.5 The handle shall also be provided with a lug to keep the movement of the ball valve
within 90 degree. The lever shall be operated smoothly and without application of
any unnecessary force.
4.7 Non Return Valve
PMC: NSL F 9

4.7.1 Non‐return valves shall be cast iron spring action swing check type. An arrow mark
in the direction of flow shall be marked on the body of the valve. The valve shall
bear IS:531 certification.
4.7.2 The Valve shall be of cast iron body and cover. The internal flap in the direction of
water shall be of cast iron and hinged by a hinge pin of high tensile brass or stainless
steel. Cast iron parts shall be conform to IS:210 / 70, grade 200 / 260 type.
4.7.3 The gasket shall be of high quality rubber and flap seat ring of leaded gun metal to
BS 1400 LG 2C. At high pressure of water flow the flapper shall seat tightly to the
seat. The Valve shall be capable of handling pressure upto 15 kg / cm2.

4.8 Butterfly Valve
4.8.1 The Butterfly Valve shall be suitable for waterworks and tested to minimum of 16 kg
/ sq cm pressure. The Valves shall fulfil the requirements of AWWA (American Water
Works Association) C 504, API 609 and MSS‐SP‐67.
4.8.2 The body shall be of cast iron to IS:210 in circular shape and of high strength to take
the minimum water pressure of 10 kg / cm2. The disc shall be heavy duty cast iron
with anti corrosive epoxy or nickel coating.
4.8.3 The valve seat shall be of high grade elastomer or nitrile rubber. The Valve in closed
position shall have complete contact between the seat and the disc throughout the
perimeter. The elastomer rubber shall have a long life and shall not give away on
continuous applied water pressure. The shaft shall be of EN 8 grade carbon steel.
4.8.4 The Valve shall be fitted between two flanges on either side of pipe flanges. The
Valve edge rubber shall be projected outside such that they are wedged within the
pipe flanges to prevent leakage.
4.8.5 The Valves shall be supplied with manual gear operated opening / closing system by
lever.

5.0 Pipe supports
All pipes whether horizontal or vertical shall be suitably supported using galvanized
mild steel clamps/clevis hanger manufactured by M/s Hitech Support (India) Pvt Ltd
or equivalent product of good quality as approved by engineer in‐charge.

5.1 Vertical Pipes
5.1.1 The pipes running vertical shaft shall be supported by galvanised mild steel rigid
clamps fixed to wall with anchor bolts and studs.
5.1.2 When the horizontal distance between the centre line of two adjacent pipes is less
than 300 mm a powder coated HITECH/or equivalent rail shall be fixed to wall the
pipes independently clamped to the rail with Ù' bolt clamps.

5.2 Horizontal Pipes
5.2.1 Pipes running horizontal shall be supported from structural beam/slab by using
appropriate galvanised M.S. pipe clevis hangers.
5.2.2 The spacing of supports shall be as follows:
GI Pipes/MS Pipes CI Spun Pipes
Internal Dia Internal dia
Spacing (mm) Spacing (mm)
(mm) (mm)
PMC: NSL F 10

15 1800 75‐150 2700

20,25 2400 200‐250 3000
32 2700 300 3600
40‐50 3000
65‐80 3600
100 4000
150 4500
5.2.3 Supports for horizontal piping longer than 15m in a stretch shall be provided with
swivel clamps. Otherwise, the clamps shall be universal clamps or rigid clamps as
required by the project engineer.
5.3 Fixing of clamps/rails etc.
All clamps, rails and accessories shall be fixed to the structure (beam, slab, walls
etc.) by using approved good quality anchor fasteners of appropriate size.

6.0 Painting
6.1 All exposed piping for fire fighting shall be distinctly painted `Fire red' shade 536 to
IS:5‐1978. Pipes shall first receive two coats of red oxide primer uniformly applied
and two coats of oil paint applied thereafter. All pipes supports shall be painted
black as specified for support & clamps.

6.2 Painting Schedule
6.2.1 All equipment and piping shall be painted in accordance with the following colour
code:
Equipment Colour Distinguishing Mark
a) Pump motors Fire Red Shade
No.536 to IS: 5 ‐1978
b) Internal piping Fire Red "
c) Sprinkler pipes Fire Red
6.2.2 All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush to remove
completely rust and other extraneous substances. Over the cleaned surfaces one
coat of red oxide primer shall be applied completely covering the exposed surfaces.
Finishing coat of enamel paint shall be applied one day after the prime coat, after
ensuring that the paint is dry. The second coat shall be done before the installation
is handed over and after approval to do so from the Engineer‐in‐charge.
7.0 Testing & commissioning
All piping after installation shall be tested for a hydrostatic test pressure of 10.5
kg/sqcm or 1.5 times the working pressure (whichever is less) maintained for 24
hours. All joints and valves shall be checked for leaks and rectified and retested.
During testing all valves except drain & air valves shall be kept fully open.
8.0 Makes of materials
For makes of materials refer to list of approved makes of material.

9.0 Mode of measurement
9.1 All external piping shall be measured along the centre line of the pipe and paid per
unit length and shall include:
9.1.1 All pipes & fittings
9.1.2 Bituminous coating
PMC: NSL F 11

9.2 All internal piping shall be measured similarly but shall include for the pipe supports
and clamps.
9.3 All valves, air valves, drain valves together with flanges or tail pieces shall be
measured per unit.
9.4 All excavation and concrete supports and thrust blocks shall be measured as per
drawing and paid for per cum.
9.5 The cost of pipe supports described above form part of the rate quoted for piping
and no extra shall be payable on the account.
All painting shall form part of the cost of equipment piping etc. No separate
payment shall be admissible.
PMC: NSL F 12

SECTION ‐ III
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1.0 Pendant type Sprinkler Head
1.1 Sprinkler heads shall be of quartzoid bulb type with bulb, valve assembly, yoke and
the deflector. The sprinkler shall be of approved make and type with 15 mm nominal
dia outlets.
1.2 The bulb shall be made of corrosion free material strong enough to withstand any
water pressure likely to occur in the system. The bulb shall shatter when the
temperature of the surrounding air reaches at 68o C / 79o C.
1.3 The nominal bore shall be 15 mm dia and colour of liquid shall be Red / Yellow.
1.4 The Sprinkler head shall be approved by UL / FM.

2.0 Upright type Sprinkler Head
2.1 Upright sprinkler heads shall be similar to Pendent type in material construction and
performance but designed to throw water Droplets upwards in umbrella fashion, to
cool the underside of ceiling and extinguish any fire involving combustibles on the
floor below.
2.2 The Sprinkler head shall be approved by UL / FM. The nominal bore shall be 15 mm
dia and the colour of liquid shall be red.
2.3 Upright Sprinkler heads shall be use in lower and upper basement parking areas and
above the false ceiling.

3.0 Side Wall type Sprinkler Head
3.1 Side wall sprinkler heads shall be similar to Pendent type in material construction
and performance but designed to throw water Droplets horizontally.
diameter and the colour of liquid shall be red.
3.3 Side wall sprinkler heads shall be use in staircase landing and along the ramp.

4.0 Powder coated Sprinkler with Powder coated Twin plate Rosette.
4.1 Most areas below false ceiling shall be provided with powder coated pendant
sprinkler with twin plate sliding rosette. The sprinkler head shall be same as Pendent
type above but powder coated white. The sprinkler head shall be provided with a
double plate powder coated rosette that shall seal the gap between the false ceiling
and he sprinkler head.
4.2 The adjustment allowable shall be 12 mm. The lower part shall have flared ends that
shall fit tightly into the upper piece.
diameter and the colour of liquid shall be red.

4.0 Makes of materials
For makes of materials refer to list of approved makes of material.

5.0 Mode of measurement
5.1 Sprinkler head including supports and clamps for fixing shall be measured as
unit.
5.2 All alarm control valves including drain valves, butterfly valve and all other
accessories together with flanges or tail pieces shall be measured per unit.
PMC: NSL F 13

5.3 All floor control valves including drain valves, butterfly valve, sight glass and all
other accessories together with flanges or tail pieces shall be measured per unit.
PMC: NSL F 14

SECTION ‐ IV
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work covers the supply and installation of portable fire extinguishers.
The following types are envisaged in these specifications and provided as shown in
the schedule of portable fire extinguishers.
1.1.1 Dry powder extinguisher
1.1.2 Carbon‐dioxide extinguisher
1.1.3 Mono ammonia phosphate extinguisher
1.1.4 Water expelling type.
2.0 Standards
2.1 The following standards and rules and regulations shall be applicable:
2.1.1 Fire protection manual of the tariff advisory committee, Fire Insurance Association
of India
2.1.2 IS:2176 :Portable fire extinguisher Dry power type
2.1.3 IS:2878 :Portable fire extinguisher carbon‐dioxide type
2.1.4 Local Fire Brigade/Authority
2.2 All standards mean the latest.
3.0 Extinguishers
3.1 Dry powder type
3.1.1 The extinguishers shall be 2, 5, 10 kg capacity and cartridge type unless specified
otherwise.
3.1.2 The body shall be of cold rolled carbon steel grade D and 1.5mm thick upto 5 kg and
2mm for 10 kg. The construction shall be similar to `Soda Acid type' but of the
following dimensions.
Capacity (kg) Outside dia (mm) Filler opening (mm)
2.00 100 45
5.00 150 45
10.00 175 45
3.1.3 The discharge fitting shall be with 500mm 10mm dia hose upto 5 kg and 750 mm
12.5 mm dia for 10 kg with a trigger controlled nozzle capable of discharging 85% of
the contents as follows:
Capacity (kg) Time (sec) Throw (m)
2.00 8 ‐ 10 2
5.00 15 ‐ 20 4
10.00 23 ‐ 30 6
3.1.4 A carbon dioxide cartridge conforming to IS:4947 shall be fitted in a cartridge holder
with an inner shell. A spring loaded piercing device shall be provided in the cap for
piercing the seal of the gas cartridge. A syphon tube of copper or PVC shall be
provided for upright operation. The cap and neck ring shall be similar to Soda Acid
type extinguisher.
3.1.5 All internal and external components and surfaces shall receive anti‐corrosive
coating of not less than 12 microns shall be applied uniformly as indicated below:
a) Body Mild steel Tin alloy
b) Cage for acid Brass sheets Lead or tin alloybottle and
spring
c) Discharge fittings Leaded ‐ Tin Tin alloy
Bronze
PMC: NSL F 15

d) Strainer Brass sheets Lead or Tin alloy

3.2 Carbon dioxide type
3.2.1 The extinguishers shall be rated for 2.0 and 4.5 kg by weight or carbon dioxide,
unless stated otherwise. The contents shall be with a filling ratio not exceeding
0.667.
3.2.2 The body shall be steel cylinder made according to IS:2872 and approved by the
chief controller of explosives.
3.2.3 The discharge head shall be simple and safe to operate conforming to IS:3224 with a
safety release to IS:5903 set to 18.0 to 20.0 N/sqmm. A syphon tube of copper or
PVC shall be fitted. A non‐conducting discharge horn and a high pressure hose (27.5
N/sqmm pressure) shall be fitted with each extinguisher.
3.2.4 The discharge system shall be designed to expel 95% of the contents in continuous
discharge as follows:
Capacity (kg) Time (Sec.)
2.0 8 ‐ 18
3.0 10 ‐ 20
4.5 10 – 24
3.3 Mono ammonium phosphate type
3.3.1 The capacities envisaged are 2 kg & 5 kg. The filling pressure shall be 0.95 +/‐ 0.055
N/sqmm.
3.3.2 The body shall be cylindrical in shape and made of cold rolled carbon steel grade
D/DD or hot rolled steel plate with radiographically tested welded construction.
Plate thickness shall conform to IS:11108.
3.3.3 Discharge valve mechanism shall be a simple and safe squeeze grip valve. 4.5 kg and
above capacity shall have a high pressure (0.5 N/sqmm) hose and non‐conducting
horn and shall also be provided with a pressure gauge. 95% of the contents shall be
discharged as follows:
Capacity (kg) Time (sec) Throw (m)
2.00 8 ‐ 16 2
5.00 15 ‐ 24 4
3.3.4 The internal and external components and surface shall be treated for anti‐corrosion
as for dry powder type extinguishers.
3.4 Water CO2 Fire Extinguisher
3.4.1 The extinguishing medium shall be primarily water stored under normal pressure,
the discharge being effected by release of carbon dioxide gas from a 60 gms
cylinder.
3.4.2 The capacity of the cylinder when filled shall be 9 litres +/‐ 5 %.
3.4.3 The cylinder shall be fabricated from MS sheet, welded at seams, with dish and
dome, being of same thickness and of size not exceeding the diameter of the body.
The neck shall be externally threaded with leaded tin bronze.
3.4.4 The cap shall be of leaded tin bronze. The siphon tube shall of brass or GI. The
cartridge holder, knob, discharge fittings and plunger shall be of leaded tin bronze
and plunger of stainless steel with spring also of stainless steel. The discharge tube
shall be of braided nylon, of 10 mm dia and 600 mm length with a brass nozzle.
3.4.5 The extinguisher shall be treated for anti corrosion internally and externally and
painted fire red externally. The cartridge shall be IS marked. The Extinguisher body
PMC: NSL F 16

shall be tested to 25 bar pressure for 2 minutes. The Extinguisher shall be IS:940
marked.

3.5 General requirements
3.5.1 All extinguishers shall be standard products approved by the Local Fire Authority and
manufactured and tested strictly in accordance with the relevant Indian Standard.
All markings and test results shall be stamped in the appropriate colour markings
accordingly to the Indian Standards.
3.5.2 All extinguishers shall have a structurally designed galvanised steel handle and also a
suitable wall mounting bracket.

PMC: NSL F 17

SPECIFICATIONS: Plumbing Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor,
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PLUMBING SYSTEM
SECTION - 1
SANITARY FIXTURES & FITTINGS
a. The execution of works and materials used shall be as per the latest relevant I.S.
specification.

Wherever reference has been made to Indian Standard or any other specifications,
the same shall mean to refer to the latest specification irrespective of any particular
edition of such specification being mentioned in the specifications below or Schedule
of Quantities.
b. WORKMANSHIP
The workmanship shall be best of its kind and shall conform to the specifications, as
below or Indian Standard Specifications in every respect or latest trade practices and
shall be subject to approval of the Architects. All materials and/or Workmanship
which in the opinion of the Engineer is defective or unsuitable shall be removed
immediately from the site and shall be substituted with proper materials and/or
workmanship forthwith.

c. MATERIALS
All materials shall be best of their kind and shall conform to the latest Indian
Standards.

All materials shall be of approved quality as per samples and origins approved by the
Architects/Consultants.

As and when required by the Architect/Consultant, the contractor shall arrange to
test the materials and/or portions of works at his own cost to prove their soundness
and efficiency. If after tests any material, work or portions of work is found defective
or unsound by the Architect/Consultant, the contractor shall remove the defective
material from the site, pull down and re‐execute the works at his own cost to the
satisfaction of the Architect/Consultant. To prove that the materials used are as
specified, the contractor shall furnish the Architect/Consultant with original
vouchers on demand.

PMC: NSL PL1

1. INSTALLATION OF SANITARY FIXTURES AND FITTINGS
1.1 General Requirement
The fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories as are required
to complete the item in satisfactory working conditions, whether specifically
mentioned or not in the schedule of quantities, Specifications and drawings.

The sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be installed at the correct assigned position as
shown on the drawings and as directed by the Architect, and shall fully meet with
the aesthetic and symmetrical requirements as demanded by the Architect.

All fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with a set pattern matching
the tiles or interior finish as per Architect requirements. Wherever necessary, the
fittings shall be centered to dimensions and pattern as called for.

Fixtures shall be installed by skilled workman with appropriate tools according to the
best trade practice. Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed for the installation
of fixtures. Fixtures in all toilets shall be standard height mounting as called for on
the drawings. Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb, and true to alignment.

1.2 Mock up and Trial Assembly
The contractor shall have to assemble at least one set of each type of sanitary
fixtures and fittings in order to determine precisely the required supply and disposal
connections. Relevant instructions from manufacturers shall be followed as
applicable. This trial assembly shall be developed to determine the location of
puncture holes, holding devices etc. which will be required for final installation of all
sanitary fixtures and fittings. The above assembly shall be subject to final approval by
the Architect.

The fixtures in the trial assembly can be re‐used for final installation without any
additional payments for fixing or dismantling of the fixtures.

1.3 Supporting and Fixing Devices
The contractor shall provide all the necessary supporting and fixing devices to install
the sanitary fixtures and fittings securely in position. The fixing devices shall be
rigidly anchored into the building structure. The devices shall be rust resistant and
shall be so fixed that they do not present an unsightly appearance in the final
assembly. Where the location demands, the Architect may instruct the contractor to
provide chromium plated or other similarly finished fixing devices. In such
circumstances the contractor shall arrange to supply the fixing devices and shall be
installed complete with appropriate vibration isolating pads, washers and gaskets.

2
1.4 Final Installation
The contractor shall install all sanitary fixtures and fittings in their final position in
accordance with approved trial assemblies and as shown on drawings. The
installation shall be complete with all supply and waste connections. The connection
between building and piping system and the sanitary fixtures shall be through proper
unions and flanges to facilitate removal/replacement of sanitary fixtures without
disturbing the built in piping system. All unions and flanges shall match in
appearance with other exposed fittings.

Fixtures shall be mounted rigid, plumb and to alignment. The outlets of water closet
pans and similar appliances shall be examined to ensure that outlet ends are butting
on the receiving pipes before making the joints. It shall be ensured that the
receiving pipes are clear of obstruction. When fixtures are being mounted, attention
shall be paid to the possibility of movement and settlement by other causes.
Overflows shall be made to ensure that necessary anchoring devices have been
provided for supporting water closets, wash basins, sinks and other appliances.
2. PROTECTION AGAINST DAMAGE
The contractor shall take every precaution to protect all sanitary fixtures against
damage, misuse, cracking, staining, breakage and pilferage by providing proper
wrapping and locking arrangement till the completion of the installation. At the time
of handing over, the contractor shall clean, disinfect and polish all the fixtures and
fittings. Any fixtures and fittings found damaged, cracked chipped stained or
scratched shall be removed and new fixtures and fittings free from defects shall be
installed at his own cost to complete the work.

PMC: NSL PL3

SECTION - 2
WATER SUPPLY
1. PIPING MATERIAL
1.1 CPVC Pipes

All water supply CPVC pipes shall be manufactured using CPVC compound with cell
class 234478 defined by ASTM D1748 with design stress of 2000 psi. All pipes &
fittings shall be jointed with solvent as supplied by the manufacture. All CPVC pipes
& fittings shall be approved by CPWD. Metal hooks or nails shall not be used to
support/hold or put pressure on the pipes. Straps & hangers with rough or sharp
edges shall not be used.

Horizontal support spacing shall be as follows.
(Distance between pipe clamps).

15 mm normal dia – 1m
20 mm normal dia – 1.2m

1.2 Valves & Controls

All valves (gate, check, safety) shall be of gun metal, non rising spindle,
suitable for the particular service as called for. All valves shall be of the
particular duty and design as called for. Valves shall either be of screwed
type or flanged type, with suitable flanges and non‐corrosive bolts and
gaskets. Gate and check valves shall conform to Indian Standard IS:776

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type of valve Size Construction Ends.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a) G.M.valve 15mm to 65mm Gun metal Screwed.
65mm and above Gun metal Flanged.

2. LAYING AND JOINTING OF PIPES

4
All pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal unless unavoidable.
The pipes shall be fixed to walls with standard slotted angles Ù' shape threaded
bolts, nuts for clamping pipes to angles. Slotted angles shall be grouted to R.C.C.
work with dash fasteners of size so as to fit tightly on the pipes when tightened with
screwed bolts. These slotted angles shall be spaced at regular intervals in straight
lengths and heights at 1.8m C/C.

The pipes and fittings shall run in wall chase or ceiling or as specified. The fixing
shall be done by means of standard pattern holder bat clamps keeping the pipes
about 1.5cm clear of the wall where to be laid on surface. Where it is specified to
conceal the pipes, chasing may be adopted or pipes fixed in the shafts, ducts etc.
provided there is a sufficient space to work on the pipes with the usual tools. As far
as possible, pipes may be buried for short distances provided adequate protection is
given against damage and where so required special care to be taken at joints.
Where directed by the Architect, pipe sleeves shall be fixed at a place where the
pipe is passing through a wall or floor for reception of the pipe and allow freedom
for expansion and contraction and other movements. Under the floors, the pipes
shall be laid in layer of sand filling.

Pipes shall be jointed with solvent joints.

The pipes and fittings shall run in wall chase or ceiling or as specified. The fixing shall
be done by means of standard pattern holder bat clamps keeping the pipes about
1.5 cm clear of the wall where to be laid on surface. Where it is specified to conceal
the pipes, chasing may be adopted or pipes fixed in the shafts, ducts etc. provided
there is sufficient space to work on the pipes with the usual tools. As far as possible,
pipes may be buried for short distances provided adequate protection is given
against damage and where so required special care to be taken at joints. Where
directed by the Architect, pipe sleeves shall be fixed at a place the pipe is passing
through a wall or floor for reception of the pipe and allow freedom for expansion
and contraction and other movements. In case of pipe is embedded in walls or
floors it should be provided with protection.

3. PIPING INSTALLATION:
Piping shall be properly supported on, or suspended from, on stands, clamps,
hangers as specified and as required. The Contractor shall adequately provide all the
brackets, saddles, anchor, clamps and hangers, and be responsible for their
structural stability.

Pipe supports shall be steel, adjustable for the height and primer coated with rust
preventive paint and finish coated black.

Vertical risers shall be parallel to walls and column lines and shall be straight and
plumb. Risers passing from floor to floor shall be supported at each floor by clamps
PMC: NSL PL5
or collars attached to pipe and with a 15 mm thick rubber pad or any resilient
material.

All pipe work shall be carried out in a proper workman like manner, causing
minimum disturbance to the existing services, buildings, roads and structure. The
entire piping work shall be organized in consultation with other agencies work, so
that area can be carried out in one stretch.

Cut‐outs in the floor slab for installing the various pipes area are indicated in the
drawings. Contractor shall carefully examine the cut‐outs provided and clearly point
out wherever the cut‐outs shown in the drawings, do not meet with the
requirements.

The contractor shall make sure that the clamps, brackets, saddles and hangers
provided for pipe supports are adequate. Piping layout shall take due care for
expansion and contraction in pipes and include expansion joints where required.

All pipes shall be accurately cut to the required sizes in accordance with relevant BIS
codes and burrs removed before laying. Open ends of the piping shall be closed as
the pipe is installed to avoid entrance of foreign matter.
3.1 Cutting Chases in Masonry Walls
The chases upto 7.5 x 7.5 cm shall be made in the walls for housing GI pipes etc.
These shall be provided in correct positions as shown in the drawings or directed by
the Architects. Chases shall be made by chiselling out the masonry to proper line and
depth. After pipes etc are fixed in chases, the chases shall be filled with cement
mortar 1:2:4 or as specified may be made flush with the masonry surface. The
concrete surface shall be roughened with wire brush to provide a key for plastering.
Chase cutting in walls & hole cutting in conc. slabs shall be done by electric
cutters/grinders.

3.2 Water Fittings
Unless otherwise specified all gunmetal fittings such as gate, globe, check & safety
valves shall be fitted in pipe line in a proper workman like manner. Necessary unions
shall be provided on both ends of the valves for easy replacement. The joints
between fittings and pipes shall be leak‐proof when tested to a pressure of 2.5
times of working pressure. The defective fittings and joints shall be replaced or
redone.
3.3 Shifting of Excavated Surplus Material
Contractor shall make his own arrangement to shift the surplus excavated material
within the site limits as directed by Engineer‐in‐charge.

6

3.4 Testing

a) All water supply system shall be tested to hydrostatic pressure test of at last two
and half time the maximum pressure but not less than 10.0 Kg/Sq Cm. for a
period of not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during
the testing shall be rectified and got approved at site.

b) Piping required subsequent to the above pressure test shall be retested in the
same manner.

c) System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be entirely retested on
completion.

d) The Contractor shall make sure that proper noiseless circulation of fluid is
achieved through the entire piping network of the system concerned. In case of
improper circulation, the contractor shall rectify the defective connections. He
shall bear all expenses for carrying out the above rectifications including the
tearing up and refinishing of floors and walls as required.

PMC: NSL PL7

SECTION - 3
INTERNAL DRAINAGE(SOIL,WASTE & VENT PIPES)
1. BASIC PIPING SYSTEM
Soil, waste and vent pipes in shafts, ducts and in concealed areas i.e. false ceilings
etc. shall consist of UPVC pipes & fittings as called for. In general wastes and vents
smaller than 50mm dia shall be of UPVC.

The soil pipes shall be circular with a minimum diameter of 75mm. Pipes shall be
fixed by means of stout MS / GI clamps in two sections, bolted together, built into
the walls, wedged and neatly jointed as directed and approved by the Architect. All
bends, branches, swan neck and other parts shall conform to the requirement and
standards as described for the pipes. Pipes shall be rested against the walls on
suitable wooden cradles. Local authority regulations applicable to the installations
shall be strictly followed.

Where indicated, the soil pipes shall be continued upwards without any diminution
in its diameter, without any bend or angle to the height shown in the drawings.
Joints throughout shall be made with molten lead as described under jointing of
pipes. The soil pipes shall be covered on top with cast iron terminal outlets as
directed and approved. All vertical soil pipes shall be firmly fixed to the walls with
properly fixed clamps, and shall as far as possible be kept 50mm clear of wall.

Every waste pipe shall discharge above the grating of properly trapped gully. The
contractor will ensure that this requirement is adequately met with. Wherever floor
traps are provided, it shall be ensured that atleast one wash is connected to such
floor traps to avoid drying of water seal in the trap. Ventilating pipes shall be UPVC
pipes, conforming to the requirements laid down earlier.
All the fittings used for connections between soil, waste and ventilation pipes and
branch pipes shall be made by using pipe fittings with inspection doors for cleaning.
The doors shall be air and water tight.

Where soil, waste and ventilating pipes are accommodated in shafts ducts, adequate
access to cleaning eyes shall be provided.
2. PIPING MATERIALS
2.1 UPVC Pipes
UPVC pipes and fittings shall be of good quality. The pipes and fittings shall
be true to shape, smooth and cylindrical, their inner and outer surface being
as nearly as practicable concentric. They shall be sound and nicely cast, shall
be free from cracks, taps, pinholes and other manufacturing defects.

8
The pipes and fittings shall conform to IS as mentioned in schedule of
quantities. Fittings shall be of required degree with or without access door.
All access doors shall be air and water tight. The fittings shall be of the same
manufacture as the pipes used for soil and waste.
All pipes and fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name and ISI specification to which
it conforms.
All pipes and fittings shall be coated internally and externally with the same material
at the factory.
All pipes and fittings before installation at site shall be tested hydrostatically to a
pressure of 0.4 Kg/sq. cm without showing any sign of leakage, sweating or other
defects of any kind. The pressure shall be applied internally and shall be maintained
for not less than 15 seconds. All these tests shall be carried out in the presence of
the representative of the Architects. Alternatively a test certificate from manufacturers
be obtained before despatch of material to site.
The pipes and fittings shal be as called for. The pipes and fittings shall be of uniform
material throughout and shall be free from all manufacturing defects.
2.2 UPVC Specialities
UPVC speciality item such as deep seal floor traps, urinal traps, trap integral
pieces with integral inlet/outlet connections etc. shall be fabricated to suit
individual location requirements. The contractor shall arrange the fabrication
of these items from an approved source. All traps shall have minimum 5cm
deep seal.
2.3 UPVC Pipes
Waste pipes 50mm dia below and where called for shall be UPVC pipes
conforming to the requirements of IS:4985. The pipes and sockets shall be
cleanly finished and free from cracks, surface flaws and other defects. All
ends shall be clean and well cut. All pipes and fittings shall bear
manufacturer's trade mark and conform to the IS as specified.
3. INSTALLATION OF SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPES
Soil, waste & vent pipes in shafts under the floors shall consist of UPVC pipes as
described earlier. Waste pipes from bottle trap to floor/urinal traps for wash basin,
urinal and sink shall be of UPVC pipes and fittings.

All Horizontal pipes running below the slab and along the ceiling, shall be fixed on
structural adjustable clamps, sturdy hangers of the design as called for in the
drawings. The pipes shall be laid in uniform slope and proper levels. All vertical pipes
shall be truly vertical fixed by means of stout clamps in two sections, bolted
together, built into the walls, wedged and neatly jointed. The branch pipes shall be
connected to the stack at the same angle as that of fittings. All connections between
soil, waste and ventilating pipes and branch pipes shall be made by using pipe
PMC: NSL PL9
fittings with inspection doors for cleaning. Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to
provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction
in shafts. Where the horizontal run off the pipe is long or where the pipes cross over
building expansion joints etc. suitable allowance shall be provided for any
movements in the pipes by means of expansion joint etc. such that any such movement
does not damage the installation in any way.
All pipes and fittings shall be jointed with best quality solvent free from all impurities.
Before jointing, the interior of the socket and exterior of the spigots shall be
thoroughly cleaned and dried.

The joint shall not be covered till the pipe line has been tested under pressure. Rest
of pipe line shall be covered so as to prevent the expansion and contraction due to
variation in temperature.
4. INSPECTION AND TESTING
Before the appliances are connected all opening of pipes shall be inspected and
tested. All opening of pipes shall be sealed with plugs and water test in small
sections of pipes shall be carried out to a static head of 4.5 meters.

The contractor shall give a smoke test to the drains and sewers at his own expense
and charges as directed by the engineer‐in‐charge.

After installation of all the appliances, discharge test shall be conducted individually
and collectively. Obstruction in any of the pipe lines shall be traced and whole
system is examined for hydraulic performance, including the retention of any
adequate water seal in each trap. Any defect revealed by the tests shall be made
good and the tests are repeated until a satisfactory result is obtained.

5. PIPE PROTECTION
Where pipes are embedded in floors, slabs, column, beams etc. they shall be
Given a protection by encasing them with 100mm thick 1:3:6 cement concrete
All round the pipes and fittings as specified in Schedule of Quantities.

6. NAHANI TRAP OR FLOOR TRAPS
Nahani traps or floor traps shall be UPVC deep seal with an effective seal of 50mm.
The trap and waste pipes shall be set in cement concrete blocks firmly supported on
the structural floor. The blocks shall be in 1:2:3 mix (1cement: 2coarse sand: 4 stone
aggregate 20mm nominal size ) mixed with water proof compound and extended to
40 mm below finished floor level. Contractor shall provide all necessary shuttering
and centering for the blocks. Size of the block shall be 30x30 cms of the required
depth. The trap shall be installed at lowest point ensure no ponding occurs at
perimeters of the drain.
10
7. CLEANOUT PLUGS
Contractor shall provide cast brass cleanout plugs in all horizontal run more than 15
mtr length required one cleanout plugs shall be threaded and provided with key
holes for opening. Cleanout plugs shall be threaded and provided with key holes for
opening.

PMC: NSL PL11

APPROVED MAKE Pharmacy Council of India, 3rd Floor, NBCC Center, Okhla, New Delhi

LIST OF APPROVED MAKES
SECTION C

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 0


SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES FOR INTERIOR WORKS
The attached list schedule indicates the approved manufacturer for Interior works

S.No. Equipment/ Material Acceptable Supplier/ Manufacturer
1 Timber Wood Ivory cost/ATI/ Burma Teak/ Equivalent
2 Plywood Century/Green Ply/Kitply
3 MDF Board Kitply/ Green Ply
4 Particle Board/Ply board Kitply/ Merino/ Green Ply
5 Flush Door Kitply/Century/Green Ply
6 Glass Saint Gobain/ Indo Asahi/ Modifloat/
7 Gypsum board and sections USG Boral/Armstrong/Gyprock/
8 Veneer Century/ Green Ply/ kitply
9 Laminate sheet Century/Royal Touch/Greenlam/
10 Flooring (Vitrified/wall) Somany/ RAK/ Kajaria/ NITCO
11 Grouting / Adhesive Laticrate/ Fosrock/ferrouscrete
12 Flooring wooden Green Ply /Pergo/EGO
13 Anti‐Static flooring Armstrong / premier polyfilm or approved equivalent make
14 Carpets Forbo flooring/ Interface/ Milliken
15 Raised floor Unifloor/ TATE/ Kingspan
16 Acoustic Grid ceiling Armstrong/USG Boral/ecophon
17 Metal Ceiling Armstrong/ USG Boral/ Unimet
18 Adhesive Fevicol / Vamicol/ Araldite/
19 Anchor Fastener Fischer/ Hilti/ or approved equivalent make
20 Hardware Fittings Dorma/FSB/Dline
21 Signage Neki/ 3m/ Or approved equivalent make
22 Paint and polishes Asian paints/ ICI/Dulux/
23 Glass Wool UP TWIGA/ Kimmco/ or equivalent make
24 Glass Graphics 3M or approved equivalent make
25 Window Blinds Hunter Douglas/ Vista / D Decor
26 Modular furniture Godrej /HNI/Steel case
27 Wall Paper Marshall/Wallking/ Elemento/
28 Cement (OPC 43 grade) Ultratech/ Birla Uttam/ JK Laxmi/ ACC
29 Aluminum Skirting Bottomlne or equivaent
30 Planters and Pot https://www.fourwalls.in/contact
http://www.artificialplants.in/bamboo‐plant.html
https://www.pepperfry.com/home‐decor‐garden‐decor‐artificial‐
plants.html
31 Signages Vansh Graphics, Insha Advertising, Gcom Advertising
32 2 hr fire rated doors Promat, Ardor, Doors n doors
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 1


SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

The attached list schedule indicates the approved manufacturer for electrical and Data Centre works.

S.No. Equipment/ Material Acceptable Supplier/ Manufacturer
1 MCCB’s & ACB’s Legrand/Schneider/ABB/L&T
2 MCB’s & DB's Legrand/Schneider/Hager/L&T/MK‐Honeywell
3 ELCB’s & RCBO’s Legrand/Schneider/ABB/L&T/MK‐Honeywell
4 MPCB’s : Legrand/Schneider/Hager/L&T
5 1100 V grade ZHLS (Zero Halogen low PolyCab/RR Kable/KEI wires/Havells
smoke) ZHLS Polymer insulated,
unsheathed, flexible, copper conductor
wires
6 1100 V grade FRLS (Fire Retardant low PolyCab/RR Kable/KEI wires/Havells
smoke) HR FRLS PVC insulated unsheathed,
flexible, copper conductor wires
7 1.1/11/33kV grade LT/HT XLPE insulated, PolyCab/RR Kable/KEI wires/Havells/ Ravin Cable
HR PVC sheathed, stranded Al. / Cu.
conductor, Armoured/ Unarmoured cables
as per IS:7098 Part‐I
8 1.1kV grade LT PVC insulated, PVC, PolyCab/RR Kable/KEI wires/Havells
sheathed, stranded Al. / Cu. conductor,
Armoured/ Unarmoured cables as per
IS:1554
9 1.1kV grade Single core LT PVC insulated, PolyCab/RR Kable/KEI wires/Havells
unsheathed, multi strand, flexible Copper
conductor Un. Ar. Cables as per IS:694.
10 Cable lugs & thimbles Dowell/Asian/Action
11 Cable glands PolyCab/Dowell/Commet
12 TV Co‐axial Cable Delton/Finolex/Havells
13 Paging / Music Speaker Wire (Twin Twisted) Delton/As recommonded by Speaker supplier
14 MS/GI Conduits & Accessories RKG/AKG/POLYPACK
17 Data Wire (Cat6) Legrand/AMP
18 Occupancy Sensor Philips/Wipro/Schneider/ M.K. (Honeywell)
19 PAC Emerson, Schneider, Bluebox
20 UPS System Emerson, Schneider, EATON, Numeric
21 IT Racks Panduit, Rittal, Schneider
22 BMS System SCHNEIDER, SIEMENS, JCI, HONEYWELL.
23 Structured Cabling System (LSZH) Panduit, TE, Schneider
24 Hardware server/ Desktop Computers HP/IBM/DELL
25 Cable Tray LEGRAND (CABLOFIL)/ Panduit / PROFAB/ MK
26 NOVEC Gas System UTC, Tyco, Siemens
27 Fire Detection & Alarm System Honeywell, UTC, Tyco, RAVEL
28 VESDA System Siemens, UTC, System Sensor, TYCO, HONEYWELL
29 LED Light Fixture Wipro, Philips, HAVELLS
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 2

30 Electrical Switchgear ABB, Schneider, Siemens, L&T

31 Energy meter Enercon / L & T / HPL Socomec
32 Industrial socket outlet (socket and top) MDS‐Legrand / PCE (RR Kabel)/Clipsal/Hensel
33 Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Legrand (MDS)/ABB/ L&T Hager
34 Maintenance Free Earthing Ampere Protection Service, Manav Energy, Servotech
India Ltd.
35 Raceway – with sheet steel Applicam Industries / MK/ Profab

SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES FOR ELV WORKS

S.No Equipment/ Material Acceptable Supplier/ Manufacturer
A. AV Equipment
1 LED TV Samsung, Sharp, LG
2 Mount Bronx, NB, Chief
3 AV Hidden Connection Box Bronx, Kramer, Altenix
4 Multi format Switcher Lightware, Extron, AMX
5 Ceiling Speaker TOA, Equipson SA, JBL
6 Mixer Amplifier TOA, Equipson SA, Crown
7 Wireless Microphone System TOA, Shure, Sennheiser
8 Automatic Line / Mic Mixer Tendzone, Biamp, Polycom
9 Multipurpose Line / Mic Mixer Tendzone, Sound craft
10 Boundary Microphone Bronx, Shure, Sennheiser
11 Video Conference System Polycom, Lifesize, Cisco
12 Central Processor Crestron, AMX, Cue
13 Wifi D Link, Netgear, or Approved Equivalent
14 Relay System Crestron, AMX, Bronx
15 Dimming Module Crestron, AMX, Lutron
16 Equipment Rack Bronx, Valrack, President
17 Audio Video Cable Kramer, Belden, Extron

B PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
1 Ceiling Speaker Bosch, TOA, Aties
2 Wall Mount Speaker Bosch, TOA, Aties
3 Power Amplifier Bosch, TOA, Aties
4 System Pre Amplifier Bosch, TOA, Aties
5 DVD Player Samsung, Philips, Sony
6 Call Station Bosch, TOA, Aties
7 Control Unit Bosch, TOA, Aties
8 Microphone Unit Bosch, TOA, Aties
9 Equipment Rack Bronx, Valrack, President
10 Speaker Cable MX, Kramer, Belden
11 Priority Circuit Bosch, TOA, Aties, or Approved Equivalent

C ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 3

1 Proximity card reader HID, AWID, Motorola
2 Proximity card reader with Keypad HID, AWID, Motorola
3 Electro Magnetic Lock Bell, RBH
4 Emergency door release RBH, Lenel, Honeywell
5 Card reader interface RBH, Lenel, Honeywell
6 Network controller RBH, Lenel, Honeywell
7 Proximity cards HID, AWID, Motorola
8 Access card photo ID printer HID, AWID, Motorola
9 Data Cable Finolex, Delton, Polycab
10 Access Control Software RBH, Lenel, Honeywell
11 Server Dell, hp, IBM

F CCTV SYSTEM
2 IP Dome Camera Urmet, Sony, Axis
3 Monitoring Software Milestone, Urmet, Videonetics, Genetec, ISS
5 Network Switch Cisco, Juniper, Allied Telesis
6 Server Storage Milestone, Urmet, Videonetics, Genetec, ISS
7 Equipment Rack Rittal / APC / Arctic
8 Armored Optical Fiber Finolex, Excel, Delton, Molex
9 Cat Cable Finolex, Excel, Delton, Molex
10 Server Dell, hp, IBM
11 Video Wall Panel Samsung, Panasonic, LG
12 RJ‐45 Out lets Dlink, Netgear, Cisco
14 Media Converter SM/SFP Module Dlink, Netgear, Cisco
15 LIU to Media converter Dlink, Netgear, Cisco
16 LIU box Dlink, Netgear, Cisco

F LAN SYSTEM
1 CAT 6 UTP Cable Finolex, Excel, Delton, Molex
2 Jack Panel Finolex, Excel, Delton, Molex
3 Cat 6 Patch Cords Finolex, Excel, Delton, Molex
4 2 Port Faceplate Finolex, Excel, Delton, Molex
5 Riser Cable Finolex, Excel, Delton, Molex
6 Krone Module Krone or Approved Equivalent
7 Armored Optical Fiber & Accessories Finolex, Excel, Delton, Molex
8 LIU box Dlink, Netgear, Cisco
9 Equipment Rack Rittal / APC / Arctic

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 4


SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES FOR HVAC WORKS

The attached list schedule indicates the approved manufacturer for HVAC works.
S.No Equipment/ Material Acceptable Supplier/ Manufacturer
A HVAC EQUIPMENTS
1 Split Unit system Carrier/MEI/Daikin/Midea
2 Variable Refrigerant Flow(VRF) Carrier/MEI/Daikin/Midea
3 Cooling Coil for AHUs & FCU Cariyare / Systemair/ Edgetech
4 AHU Fans Nikotra / Kruger/Cemfri
B PIPE FITTING & VALVES

1 Pipes TATA / JINDAL/SAIL
2 Fittings TATA / JINDAL/SAIL
3 Y-strainer Rapid Cool /Emerald /Emrald
4 Water duty butterfly valve Advance /Flowel /SM
5 Dual plate check valve Advance / Flowel/SM
6 Balancing valves Advance / Flowel /SM
7 Ball Valve CIM / Audco/ Kitz/ Zoloto
8 Auto Air Vent Valve Anergy / Rapid Cool/Emrald
9 Pressure Gauges Feibig / Emerald / Guru
Industrial type thermometer
10 (MERCURY filled V form WITH Emerald / Taylor /Feibig / Guru
VALVE)
11 Ventilation Fan Systemair/Kruger/Humidin
12 Closed Cell Linked Polythene(XEPL) Cani /Supreme /K Flex

C HVAC CONTROLS
1 Two-way Motorized Valve Honeywell / Danfoss/ Johnson Control
2 Thermostat Honeywell / Danfoss/ Johnson Control
Danfoss (Model : REND)
Honeywell (Model: T6571)/Johnson Control /Sauter
3 Actuator (Model: NRT 105 F061)/Schneider (TA-168-2)/Siemens
(Model: RDF 50.1)/Yamataki (Model: HY 7043)
4 Dial Thermometer Capillary Type Penn/Tadington/H-Guru/Emrald
D OTHER HVAC MISC ITEMS

Mapro/Resistoflex/Equivalent approved from AC
1 Flexible duct connector
Consultant
2 Heavy duty pipe support clamp Hira/Arosio/ Equivalent approved from AC Consultant
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 5

Grooved Pipe Connector

3 Seven Star/Vectaulic
4 Paints ICI / Asian /Berger
5 Dash Fasteners Canon / Fisher / TKS
6 Welding Rods Advani / L&T / Esab
7 Tar felt / CPRX compound Shalimar tar product
8 Adhesive for Pipe Insulation - Pidilite SR-998/ 505
9 Aluminum Tape - Johnson / 3m/ Equivalent approved from AC Consultant

DUCTING GRILLE DIFFUSER
E
DAMPER ETC.
1 GSS Sheet Sail / Tata / Jindal
2 Factory Fabricated Duct Ductofab / Rolastar /Dustech/Ecoduct
3 Fire & Smoke Damper Spring Type Airflow / Greenheck / Tristar
4 Fire Damper Actuator Airflow / Greenheck / Tristar
Extruded aluminum Grills / FRuskin /Titus /Tristar /Airflow/Systemair/Dynamics
5
Diffusers
6 Pre Filters Thermodyne / Klenzoid/Mechmark
Loyyd / Rawcool / NGP
7 Rock Wool Insulation
8 XLPE Insulation Trocellin / Thermobreak/ Supreme
9 Fiber Glass U.P.Twiga / Owen Corning
Dunlop / Resistoflex / Equivalent approved from AC
10 Vibration Isolation Spring
Consultant
11 Nitrile Rubber K-Flex /Armacell / Eurobatex
Protective Coating over Closed Cell
12 Elastomeric – Fibreglass Woven Armacell Armachek/UP Twiga
Cloth
13 VAV Box Systemair/Trox/Tristar
F ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
1 Motor Control Centre & Bus Ducts Trikolite / Advance / KEPL
PVC insulated XLPE
aluminum/copper conductor
2 Skytone/ Havells / KEI / Gloster
armored MV Cables upto 1100 V
grade
ABB/ Bharat Bijlee/Kirloskar/Siemens/C. G / Siemens /
3 Three phase motors
Kirloskar / ABB.
ABB/Allen Bradley/Kirloskar
4 Starter
L & T/Schneider/Siemens
ABB/Danfoss/Siemens
5 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
6 Air-Circuit Breaker L&T / Siemens /GE/ABB
Moulded Case Circuit
7 L&T / GE / Siemens / ABB
Breaker(MCCB)
Motor Protection Circuit
8 L&T / GE / Siemens / ABB
Breaker(MPCB)
9 Miniature Circuit Breaker(MCB) L&T / GE / Siemens / ABB
10 HRC Fuse and Fittings L&T / Siemens / GE/ C & S
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 6

11 Contactors L&T / Siemens / BCH./ GE / ABB

C & S/Havells/H H Elcon/HPL – Socomec
12 Change Over Switch
Larsen & Toubro/GE
Automatic Electric/Gilbert & Maxwell
Current Transformer & Control Indcoil/Matrix/Pragati/Precise
13
Transformer Reco
14 Protection Relay
15 Numeric Type ABB/Areva/Larsen & Toubro/Siemens
16 Electromagnetic Type ABB/Areva/Larsen & Toubro/Siemens
Indicating Lamps LED type and Altos /GE Power Controls/Larsen & Toubro
17
Push Button (ESBEE)/Schneider Electric (MG)
18 Power cable Skytone/Havells/Polycab
19 Control cable Skytone/Havells/Polycab
20 Voltmeter / Ammeter A.E. / IMP./ Rishab
21 Switches L&T / Siemens / GE
22 Selector / Toggle switch Kaycee / L&T/Schneider
23 Time Delay Device Siemens / L&T/ BCH.
24 Single Phase Device L&T / Minilec/Schneider
25 Overload Relays L&T / Siemens / BCH./GE / ABB
26 Prepaid Meters & accessories Actaris/Conzerve/Secure
Electronic Digital Meters ABB/Automatic Electric/Conzerv/El Measure
27 (A/V/PF/Hz/KW/KWH) with IME/L & T/Nippen/Schneider Electric
LED Display Secure
28 Fire Sealant & Fire Retardant Paint BTHM Engineering/Birla 3 M/HILTI/Promat
Automatic Electric/Rishabh (L&T) / Equivalent approved
29 Electromagnetic Meters
from AC Consultant
Conzerv
Static Power Meter & Logger
30 El measure/Larsen & Toubro/Nippen
(SPML) with RS 485 port
Schneider Electric
Automatic Power Factor Correction Areva/BELUK (Germany)/Conzerv/Datar
31
Relay(Numeric Type) Ducati/Siemens
ABB/Datar/Ducati /Meher(Larsen & Toubro)
32 Thyristerised APFC Control Panel
Power Matrix Solutions/Siemens
Cable Glands Double Compression
33 Baliga Lighting/Comet/Cosmos
with earthing links
Comet/Cosmos/Dowell’s (Biller India)/Hax Brass (Copper
34 Bimetallic Cable Lug
Alloy India)
PVC insulated copper conductor Finolex/Lapp Kabel/Rajanigandha/R R Kabel
35
stranded flexible wires (FRLS) - Batra Henlay
36 Mettalic Conduit (ISI approved) AKG/BEC/NIC/Vimco
ABB/BCH/GE Power Control/Larsen & Toubro
37 Timer
MDS Legrand/Schneider Electric /Siemens
Cadmium Coated Cable
38 Slotco / Pilco / KEPL / Ricco/Elcon
Tray(Factory Fabricated)

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 7


SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES FOR FIRE & PLUMBING WORKS

The attached list schedule indicates the approved manufacturer for fire &plumbing works.
PLUMBING AND FIRE FIGHTING
S.No. Equipment/ Material Acceptable Supplier/
Manufacturer
1 Check Valves (Dual Slim type) DRP / KARTAR/Advance
2 Butterfly Valve DRP / ZOLOTO / AIP
3 Ball valves (15 to 40mm) DRP/ZOLOTO/AIP
4 Gate Valve DRP/ ZOLOTO / AIP
5 Fire fighting equipment (Hydrant, Hose Drum, F.B Inlet, NEWAGE / SAFE GUARD / EXFLAME
Branch)
6 Fire Extinguishers CEASE FIRE/ SAFE GUARD / MINIMAX
7 Fire fighting first‐aid hose reel tubing NEWAGE/JYOTI/DUNLOP / EXFLAME
8 Fire pumps MATHER + PLATT /KIRLOSKAR
9 Motors KIRLOSKAR/SIEMENS/ABB
10 M.S. Pipes JINDAL HISSAR/ PRAKASH
SURYA/SAIL/TATA
11 Sprinkler heads VIKING/TYCO/H.D./NEWAGE
12 M.S. FORGED FITTINGS DRP‐M / V.S. or approved equivalent
make
13 C.I. Double Flanged Non‐Return Valves. (80mm diameter DRP / AIP / SANT
and above)
14 Welding Rod ADWANI/ VICTOR/ ADOR/ Cosmos/ Supe
Bond (S)
15 Alarm Control Valve NEWAGE/ VIKING/TYCO
16 Flow Switch DANFOSS/ VIKING or approved make
17 Dash Fasteners HILTI/ canon or approved equivalent
make
18 Automatic Air Vent DANFOSS/ IBP or approved equivalent
make
19 Water level indicator & controller ITAL/ TECHNIKA/ Auto Pump/ Cirru
Engineering/Technika/Techtrol
20 Pipe Clamps / Hangers / Support CAMRY/ CHILLY or approved
equivalent make
21 Clamps & Support CAMRY/ CHILLY or approved
equivalent make
22 Paint Shalimar/ Asian/Dulux/Nerolac/K.S/
Unik/Zoloto
23 Vitreous China Sanitaryware Jaquar/Hindware/Kohlar
24 C.P. Brass fittings Jaquar/Kohlar/Hindware
25 Cast iron pipes & fittings, Manhole covers and frames. NECO/RIF
NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 8

26 G.I. pipes. Jindal Hissar/Tata

27 G.I. pipes fittings. K.S. / Unik / Zoloto
28 G.M. / Forged brass valves Zoloto / Leader
29 Gratings,Cleanouts,Funnels GMGR/Neer
30 PVC Pipes Supreme / Prince/Astral
31 Geyser AO Smith/Racold/Venus
32 Sink Neelkanth/Kobra
33 Water purifier Eureka Forbes/Kent
34 CPVC Pipes Astral Fowguard/Supreme
35 Gratings,Cleanouts,Funnels GMGR/Neer

NSL
PMC CONSULTANT 9

View Tend

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

View Tend

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S.no. TITLE Page no.

F. Carefully check space requirements with other division works to ensure that equipment

PMC: NSL E27

PMC: NSL E28

PMC: NSL E29

PMC: NSL E30

PMC: NSL E31

PMC: NSL E32

PMC: NSL E33

PMC: NSL E34

PMC: NSL E35

PMC: NSL E36

PMC: NSL E37

PMC: NSL E38

PMC: NSL E39

PMC: NSL E40

PMC: NSL E41

5. IS 3156 : Voltage Transformers

PMC: NSL E42

PMC: NSL E43

PMC: NSL E44

PMC: NSL E45

PMC: NSL E46

PMC: NSL E47

PMC: NSL E48

PMC: NSL E50

PMC: NSL E51

PMC: NSL E52

PMC: NSL E53

PMC: NSL E54

PMC: NSL E55

PMC: NSL E56

PMC: NSL E57

PMC: NSL E58

10 IS‐10810 : Testing method of cable.

PMC: NSL E59

PMC: NSL E60

PMC: NSL E61

PMC: NSL E62

PMC: NSL E63

PMC: NSL E64

PMC: NSL E65

1. HV Cable (33 KV) ‐ HV Cable (33 KV) 50 mm

PMC: NSL E66

PMC: NSL E67

1. IS:13947 : Air circuit breaker/molded case circuit breaker.

A. A component list and catalogues.

B. Preparation of bill of materials for Different Items as mentioned in Schedule of

D. Protection co-ordination drawings/tables for complete power system.

E. Shop inspection and testing procedures.

F. Field testing and commissioning procedures.

H. Sectional drawings of the circuit breaker panels, showing general constructional

K. Relay wiring diagrams.

N. The information furnished shall include the following:

a. Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.

c. A comprehensive spare parts catalogue.

2.1 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

2.02 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)

2.03 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

2.04 RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB)

D. All RCCBs shall be complete with test buttons.

3.1 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

1. Test for protective relay operation by primary or secondary injection method.